N Sreedharan Learn Hindi Through English_optimizer
This document was uploaded by user and they confirmed that they have the permission to share it. If you are author or own the copyright of this book, please report to us by using this DMCA report form. Report DMCA
Overview
Download & View N Sreedharan Learn Hindi Through English_optimizer as PDF for free.
More details
- Words: 42,354
- Pages: 106
Loading documents preview...
Learn Hindi THROUGH
English
PREFACE - cb'cftwra A language is like a flowing stream - Kabirdas
“Write a better book,” my mind commanded me after 1 had gone through several self-instructor books, tempting people to learn Hindi. Most of these books, certainly good in parts, assure the reader that one can learn Hindi in thirty days. I beg to differ from that point of view. Also I do not understand why on earth one should be able to learn a language in thirty days? What is the hurry? Based on my quarter century of teaching career, I should honestly say that one cannot fully learn Hindi or, for that matter, any language within a month. I have been learning Hindi for well over fifty years and there are still miles to go. Hence I thought that there should be a better book, a two-in-one book, which, without making any tall claim, would enable the reader to acquire step by step a solid knowledge of Hindi through model sentences and also get acquainted with Hindi grammar in full, without much stress and strain. There are no short cuts to knowledge. At the same time, some kind of promise by the author is essential so that the reader will confidently go through the lessons with optimism. As the author of this book, I assure that if one is willing to spend twenty more days in addition to the thirty days’ claim made by other instructor books, one will reap full benefit from my book. In other words, through Sura’s Learn Hindi Through English, one can gain a considerable knowledge of Hindi in 50 days, neither more nor less, because this book consists of exactly 50 lessons. Of course, it is assumed that the reader will devote one full hour daily (repeat daily) to learn each lesson. It will not serve any purpose if one practises these lessons by fits and starts, off and on. There should be consistency and regularity during the initial stages of learning a language. This book is a boon to readers who are serious about their aim and consistent in their approach.
This one week labour of learning the alphabet is well rewarded. The Hindi language is written in the Devanagari script. It is in the same script that Sanskrit, Marathi, Nepali and many North Indian dialects are written. Hence it will be easier to learn these languages straightaway without having to learn a new' script for each. Further, the Hindi alphabet has the same letters which almost all Indian languages have, including Kannada, Telugu and Malayalam. Therefore, learning a new script may be necessary for some languages, but there will be no problem regarding pronunciation. Learning a new language involves a lot of writing practice. Knowledge has to be transferred from the eyes to the fingers to make it permanent. Hence said Francis Bacon : “Reading maketh a full man; conference a ready man; and writing an exact man.” The learner should also practise writing the lessons given in this book. One can become meticulous in the use of written language only through a good knowledge of grammar. Viewed from this angle, this book will also effectively serve as a standard book of Hindi grammar. As the grammar of a language rarely changes, this book has a permanent value and it deserves to occupy a proud place next to Wren and Martin’s English grammar in the bookcase. It may be preserved as a family heirloom for the benefit of the younger and future generations also. Then there is an exhaustive appendix at the end of the book covering a wide range of vocabulary and serving as a ready reference to help the reader in the day-to-day use of Hindi language in various spheres of life. As a practice book to learn alphabet, as a reliable guide to Hindi grammar and as a treasure trove of examples and model sentences, besides being useful from the examination point of view, Sura's Learn Hindi Through English is a must for the learner as well as the leamed. As Hilaire Belloc said in another context: “Do not throw this book about... Preserve it as your chiefest treasure.” N. Sreedharan
Needless to say that before taking up the first lesson, one will have to spend a week in advance to leam the Hindi alphabet. That takes the total number of days to go through this book to 57 days! (v) (iv)
HINDIALPHABET Vowels a
aa 3TT voo 37 ai $ am
3T VU
3 ey <1
e
qa Sp
st
as 'n' in pinch.
a is similar to American'r'as in very. s is aspirated 3. It is pronounced with an 'h' sound or with a breath.
au
0 ah
3J:
nt is like strong 'n' with the tip of the tongue curled backwards and touching the tip of the palate.
Consonants
ST is very much like the English 'sh' in shut. It is pr onounced with the tip of the tongue touching the palate.
aha
3T
ka
kha
ga ’T
cha XT ta 3 tha a
chcha
ja vf da a dha a ba
pa q ya a sha ST ksha ST kha >3
® is pronounced as 'ng' in as in sing, England.
ee
5 ri
tta a ththa ar PPa qr ra V sha ’T thra a ga TT
la eT sa a gna
occurs only in borrowed Sanskrit words. It is identical in pronunciation with st.
gha a jha
nga 3 gna 5T dda nna 3 W dhdha na a bha ma
The sign'chandrabindu placed above a letter indicates that it is nasalized, or spoken also through the nose. Where use of English words with half open 3?r sound is desired, half-moon symbol should be placed above. e.g.:
sEwx.,
Note: va
In the vocabulary box in each lesson, the asterisk symbol (*) shows that the noun concerned is always used in feminine form and it takes verb in feminine form.
ha shra
ST .
za 5T
(vi)
ra 3
rha 3
fa
(vii)
Mode of writing consonants + vowels ka 35
ki fa
kee
35T
kaa
kha
khaa
khi
khee
73T
fa
ftt
gaa
ft
koo
S5
gee
ga a
T
gha
ghaa
gi ft ghi
a
st
fa
fa
cha
chaa
chi
chee
ST
ST
ft
fa
chcha
ku
ghee
khu gu 3 ghu
khoo goo 3 ghoo
kru
ke
kai
ko
kau
kam
kaha
¥ khru
ft
ft
far
fa
ft
S>:
gru 3 ghru
khe
khai
kho
khau
kham
khaha
ft
ft
ftr
fa
ft
7J:
ge *T
gai ft
go ft
gau
gam
gaha
ft
4
’T:
ghe ft
ghai ft
gho
ghau
gham
ghaha
ftr
ftr
ft
ST:
che
chai
cho
chau
cham
chaha
ft
fa
fa
ft
ST:
chchai ft
chcho
chchau
3 choo
3 chru
9 chchee chchu
3 chchoo
ft 3 chchru chche ft 3 jm
chu
chchaa
chchi
w
fa
fa
ji fa
jee fa
ju
3 joo
jhu
3 jhoo
3 jhru
3
3
fa
fa
chcham chchaha ft jam
je ft
jai ft
jo fa
jau
jaha
fa
fa
ST:
jhe
jhai
jho
jhau
jham
jhaha
ft
ft
fa
fa
ft
ST:
ja ST
jaa
jha
jhaa
ST
5TT
jhi fa
jhee
ta
taa
ti
tee
tu
too
tru
te
e
er
fa
ft
3
t
ttaa
tti
ttee
ttu
3 tthoo
?
tta
ttru
tte
ttai
3
5T
fa
ft
5
&
daa
di
dee
du
3 doo
3
da
dru
de
3
ST
fa
ft
5
ddaa
ddi
ddee
ddu
I ddoo
3
dda
ddru
3
ST
fa
ft
?
£
tha
thaa
thi
thee
thru
the
thai
tho
thau
tham
thaha
3
ST
fa
ft
3
3
cT
$
ft
ft
a
a:
ththa
ththaa
ththi
ththee
ththu
ththru
ththe
ththai
ththo
ththau
ththam
ththaha
ar
2TT
ft
3
3
ar
ft
ft
ft
at
ar=
dhaa
fa dhi
dhee
dhu
dhru
dhe
ST
fa
ft
dhdha
dhdhaa
dhdhi
dhdhee dhdhu
ST
srr
fa
ft
3
3 3 dhdhoo dhdhru dhdhe st 3 3
nu
noo
dha
vTT
fa
na
naa
ni
nee
3
HT
fa
ft
§ thu
5
3
3 thoo 3 ththoo 3 dhoo
3
nru
3
to
tau
tarn
ft
ft
e
taha e:
tto
ttau
ttam
ttaha
$
ft
ft
a
e;
dai
do
dau
dam
daha
£
t
ft
ft
ft
dde
ddai
ddo
ddau
ft
ft
ddam ft
ne
tai
ddaha 5:
dhai
dho
dhau
dham
dhaha
ft
ft
ft
S
S:
dhdhai
dhdho
dhdhau
dhdham dhdhaha
ft
ft
ft
st
ST:
nai
no
ft
ft
nau ft
nam ft
a;
naha
pa q
paa
pha
phaa
q>
qq
ba
baa
q bha
P'
pee
pu
poo
pru
pe
pai
ft
4t phee
3 phu
3 phoo
3 phru
4
phi
phe
bee
S5 bu
3 boo
’?• bru
t> be
bai
qr
bi ft
tt
bhi
bhee
3 bhu
3 bhoo
3 bhru
t
bhaa
bhe
q
HT
ft
4t
ma
maa
mi
mee
3 mu
3 moo
3 mru
q
HT
ft
4t
ya q
yaa
yee
qT
y> ft
4t
ra
raa
ri
ree
q
ft
laa eTT
la
5 yu
3 yoo
3 yru
4
po qt
pau qt
pam q
q:
phai
pho
phau
pham
phaha
qfr
qt
q>
q>;
bo
bau
bam
baha
t
4r
qt
q
q;
bhai
bho
bhau
bham
bhaha
4
4t
qt
4
H:
me
mai
maha
4
mau 4t
mam
t
mo 4t
4
q:
ye t
yai
yo
yau
yam
yaha
4
4r
qt
4
q:
rai
ro
3 roo q
3 -
tt
3 ru q
-
re t
4
li
lee
lu
loo
lru
le
lai
feT
eft
3
3
ef
va
vaa
vi
vee
vu
voo
vru
q
qT
ft
eft
sha
shaa
shi
shee
3 shu
3 shoo
3 shru
ST
STT
f4
3
q
qT
ft
?ft 4t
sa
saa
q
qr
si ftl
4t
ha
haa
hi
B
BI
ft
paha
rau
ram
4
t
raha q
lo
lau
lam
laha
eft
eft
cf
cT:
ve 4
vai 4
VO
she fr
shai 4 4
qt
vau qt
vam q
vaha q;
sho
shau
sham
shaha
st 4r
4t
4
ST:
qt
q
q:
3
3
3 su
3 SOO
3 sru
4 se
sai
so
sau
sam
saha
3 hoo
3 hru
4
4
qt
qt
q
q:
hee
3 hu
he
hai
ho
hau
ham
haha
tt
§
I
1
t
tr
tr
B
B=
see
HINTS ON PRONUNCIATION
1.
2.
If a word ends in asound, then that sound is not pronounced fully, but clipped half. 3ra ab
RTR aaj
sth
•er ghar
TOR Qalam
RR Ram
to
R occurs only in borrowed Sanskrit words. It is pronounced like h but with more pressure, e.g. Shanmukha, Santosh.
8.
Some letters which have a dot below indicate that the words in which they occur, have been borrowed from Arabic, Persian, Turkish or English.
kal
■frrr sir
If a 3-letter word does not end in R sound, but has the st sound in the middle letter, then that letter is not pronounced fully, but cut short. TOR - kamra - kursi
3.
aam
7.
TORT - Kamla HKRi - aadmi
WIT - rupya
In a 4-letter word, if the second letter has R sound, then that letter is not pronounced fully. 3TTOR - Akbar +.<^.<4 - kathal ^rttrt - darwaza rtor - bachpan
iiw
- sharbat - tasveer
9.
5.
6.
- kehna TOR - behn
tort
rtrtr
- Rehman
? is similar to American “r” as in very. R?rf larayee. ? is aspirated 3 (i.e. rh [rh]). 4^1? - Chandigarh, urtto - Aligarh.
R is a hissing sound, like the English ‘sh’ shut. It is pronounced with the tip of the tongue, e.g. Shankar, Sharmila.
(xii)
- qila
- kh
RRR - khatam
RTO
- khabar
- gh
H7TR - mughal
RH
- gham HRR - ghazal
-z
htrtr
toVrk
- zamindar
-f
TRRRR - final
thel
- fail
- Azad
hrrr
If the next consonant is Ti, R, n, H, then the preceding dot denotes R; sound . WT to be pronounced as M**l, RRR as HTOTO =fTO as W”-
ii) - pehla frorrt - Behari
fihnr
The dot placed above a letter (like R) indicates one of the nasal sounds -TO n, n, R, n -depending upon the next consonant. This dot is called Anuswar.
If the first letter has R or ’ sound and if the next letter is s?, then that R / becomes R sound. h^rt
TOR - qalam
In common speech, people ignore these niceties and pronounce them just like TO R, n, R, R,5.
i) 4.
-q
If the next consonant is R, TO TO TO then the preceding dot denotes sound. TOR - Moftd, TOR - RiJRR.
iii) If the next consonant is TO ~s, TO TO then the preceding dot denotes ”( SOUnd. 3RI-SRRT> RTPHRTT. iv) If the next consonant is R, TO TO TO then the preceding dot denotes T sound. HR - Sant, HR-Nanda, aim - andha. y) If the next consonant is R, TO TO TO then the preceding dot denotes H sound, tot - Champa, - Mumbai, nnk - gambhir, torkambal, hru - Sambandh. (xiii)
vi)
CONCLUSION
If the next consonant is the preceding dot denotes sound, w - thfre-ttspre.
vii) If the next consonant is H, ?T, H, the preceding dot denotes sound. KW-sanlagna, ^fi-munshi, ^t-Kansa, Httrc-sansar. However, for convenience, sound also is heard-samlagna, Kamsa, Samsar.
Nowadays, for the convenience of DTP and printing press, the half-moon symbol is fast becoming obsolete. It has only pronunciation value now. = swan, ^t=laugh. Even here people are not very particular. Thus, se, t?, etc., are spoken and written as arret, 3Z, ^T. In other words, the Anuswar (dot) has dethroned Anunasic (half moon) in both speech and
viii) If the next consonant is^, the preceding dot is pronounced asH.W - samvad, trer(- samvat.
writing.
ix) If the dot is on the last letter, pronounce with the nasal sound of n. - nahi(n),^ - kahi (n).
clearly as it is. So, in Hindi too, words are spoken exactly as they are written-
Hindi is a descendant of Sanskrit. In Sanskrit, every letter is spoken
keeping in mind the niceties shown above. Even these delicate distinctions get automatically absorbed in our speech in course of time. Hence, Hindi did
10.
The half moon-like symbol (chandra bindhu) placed above a vowel indicates the nasal sound of the vowel. It is called Anunasik. - kaha(n)
in - ha(n)s
- ba(n)s
not require a Daniel Jones-type scholar to produce a separate pronouncing dictionary. In Hindi, just utter each letter as it is-you will be fully a nd correctly understood.
Note: The dot above stands for (represents) ?, st, vt, n. (e.g.^=^+3t+n). The half moon above indicates that the vowel is nasalized, (e.g. 35=^+3t). In other words, the Anuswara (dot) follows a vowel. The Anunasik (half moon) is a modification of the pronunciation of the vowel itself.
11.
The sign is call Visarga. It has the sound of ha ('Sj-ant: -ataha, -falataha.
(xiv)
(xv)
WORD PRACTICE Before going to Lesson 1, practise the following words by speaking and writing. While writing, try to draw the headline after writing the whole word as far as possible. In course of time, the hand will automatically find a convenient way of drawing the headline. 3TT- come
TsTT- eat
KT - sing
xft - ghee, clarified butter
KT - spread KT - go louse
touch 7ft - sir, mind Kt - one who
Kt - barley
Kt - carry
7^- thou
KT - was (masculine)
eft - was (feminine)
- give
Kt - give, two
ut - wash
H, HI - no, not
Kt - nine
KT-get
xft - drink
smell
Kt - sow
Kt - also
KT-or
xf - these
ft-cry
7=TT - bring
7^ - take
it - those
ift - sew
it - by, than
Kt - sleep, so
Kt - hundred
Kt - only
% - is
■jtt - are
3TK - now
3TTK - today
3TTK - fire
3TTK - mango
- sugar-cane 3K - wool
KrtK - sugar-cane KiK - loan (xvi)
ixef; - one
7K - defect
3Ttl - and
KT7H - yesterday, tomorrow
T^TT - letter
KI - house
KK - walk
K7T - roof
K7H - water, burn
- at once
3K - cheat
KI - afraid
KK - method
TrtH - weigh
KIKT - little
KK - breath
Kift - not
73 - read
KKi - throw
K7H - strength
- roast
HI-die
KK - fame
IK - chariot
7T3 - quarrel
KT? - he, she, it, that
KT? - put up with
3K - laugh
3TK7 - if
ifoil - at last
^K7 - here
i«TH - fuel
3U7 - there
AOtn - mortar
(iHTH - announcement 3Tt?KT - rank, post
- spectacles KtTK - medicine
stsriM - pen
- bad
KKT - hot
Mini - incident
tixlri - unsteady
tJTlft - umbrella
KKTK - reply, answer
$I’I3I - quarrel
Ztsfift - basket
337 - stay
jJlfibKl - postman
<55-u - search
df&KT - pillow
KT^t - pat
K^K - dowry
- threat (xvii)
HTP - polite thri-n - bear fruit
XRH - downfall - calf iR
qixFTf - entreaty
■^RTT -money, rupee
ds*i - boy
UTTI - otherwise
7TTH - shame
th 41 - cold
- turmeric 3TPjfa^ - modem
$ch4fa - thirty-one
slMrin - cure
t»ch
chW
yiHR - bug
fenUm-n - flicker
^■budtn - misuse
8RSRTTT - tremble t4Hldlf^
failHIcjfaf - prospectus
tmiqifaefi - chemical
- youth
- horse-race njb'Krft - lizard
- animal
gldOZ - at once
- stare
dUldfl - packed
- faltering
d ch 411 - luck, fate
yfadR - police inspector
4Hch?I - fire engine
qdtsIZ - mischievous
xRf^TS - autumn
richdglfl - woodcutter - sunflower
fclxlHlfcffa - under consideration
- historian
34vjfl4^VR - museum 3qc£tfnFd - Vice-Chancellor
- cot
JHHUIW - very hot - ungrateful
sxHMdqH - bailor
- vessel
■jrrarft - flower garden
- labourer
- discrimination 4MI4IH - transport
WKH - frilled
- kindness
3T3TR - often
- confusion
mVWTHjZ
- enquiry
W<WT - feeling
iltfMH - employment - canopy
fam (Id - on the contrary
- promising, destiny
- to praise
34l
3^Rffartn - indifference - nisLoiiccu
licbdxM - singular 3tlqx||ftcFi - formal - beautiful
chelae’ll - puppeL ’JHHjyrd (- bathroom (xviii)
- glitter
«IHch
(xix)
Read and recognize
CONJUNCT LETTERS - teacher
The Hindi consonant letters do not indicate the consonant
- Indra
sounds only. They stand for the particular consonant +3T. Thus is k + a. When the consonant is to be expressed without the
owl
inherent 3T, a right-slanting stroke called ‘hal’ (t?cT) is put below the letter. Thus we have
, etc. So one may write kya (what)
3iist>HUi - invasion f?37 - god ^413 - collected
4 - wealth
- flower-bed
533 - moment
- expenditure
as However, the use of ‘hal’ is not in much vogue. It is used with
335T - good
While combining two letters:
73T3T -much
3T^?T7 - goblet
Remove the vertical stroke (perpendicular line) of the first letter,
3?3R - rock
hcoi
3T33T - resting place
Tjnr - good deed
r3THT - sacrifice
323 - diet
i.e. the first letter will become half. 21=’ST, zr+t5 = W, 2T=r2T 2.
If the first letter is formed in the stroke itself; then only half of that letter is joined to the second letter.
3 = 33,
i?ff - student
3= 33,
3P3 - birth 3.
- thirst
In the case of letters in which, the vertical stroke does not appear (^,55,~Z,3,'3,3,7,'?), separately
and fully, they retain
the ‘hal’ mark. 3 + 3 = 33, 7+ 3= 73 7 + 3= 7?
like 7,^,'7,etc., If 7 is the first letter, it is written above the second letter, ^ + 7=
5.
When it comes after a letter having a vertical stroke, it is written as a left slanting stroke below and to the left of the
7.
73 - love
W - bee
- honour
7TTJ - nation
quickly
- grammar
3737 - veneration
^cil<* - verse
33737 - problem
7773 - place
- tongue
■^75 - short
- fame
sK,^7 + l = ^,7 + T=3
3TT3T77 - pineapple
H«3 - civilized
PTT^t- ink
vertical stroke.
£3T3 - meditation
feTT - box, can, compartment
3r7T -
4.
- butter-milk
3TRU - office
However, till recently they were written one below the other,
6.
- ungrateful
3TTT - child
or in some Sanskrit words like
1.
U? - planet
373 - action 'etirii - cowherd
When combined as second letter to T5,3,3,3,3,3,7 it is written
337 - fever
a«si - cool
thus below: 7 + 7 = 3, 7+ T= 7
Miti - lovable
omimk
3TT3T - peaceful
335T - solid
3WT - week
73 - secret
Though ST,
are included in the alphabet itself, they are
nothing but conjuncts written in a special way. 3^ + 3 = SJ, 7 T=sT,H + 3T = 3T,
+
71+7 = 3 (xx)
(xxi)
- business
CONTENTS
27.
PAST PERFECT TENSE.................................................................. 83
28.
DOUBTFUL PRESENT TENSE ......................................................87
1.
BASIC SENTENCES........................................................................ 1
29.
DOUBTFUL PAST TENSE .............................................................. 89
2.
THE IMPERATIVE ............................................................................ 3
30.
PAST CONDITIONAL TENSE........................................................ 93
3.
PRESENT TENSE 'BE' VERB ...........................................................7
31.
HABITUAL TENSE .......................................................................... 96
4.
PRESENT INDEFINITE TENSE....................................................... 9
32.
SHOULD - MUST - OUGHT TO................................................... 100
5.
PRESENT CONTINUOUS TENSE..................................................13
33.
AUXILIARY VERB - PRESENT TENSE - HAVE TO............... 104
6.
GENDER ............................................................................................ 16
34.
AUXILIARY VERB - PAST TENSE - HAD TO.......................... 106
7.
NUMBER ............................................................................................21
35.
AUXILIARY VERB - FUTURE TENSE -WILL HAVE TO....... 108
8.
CASES .................................................................................................25
36.
AUXILIARY VERB'CAN' ............................................................... Ill
9.
POSSESSIVE CASE...........................................................................29
37.
AUXILIARY VERB 'FINISH'........................................................ 113
10.
PRONOUNS........................................................................................ 32
38.
AUXILIARY VERB'BEGIN'...........................................................116
11.
REFLEXIVE PRONOUN.................................................................. 35
39.
AUXILIARY VERB - ALLOW ................................................... 118
12.
ADJECTIVES......................................................................................37
40.
THE ABSOLUTIVE......................................................................... 120
13.
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES ................................................. 40
41.
PRESENT PARTICIPLE................................................................ 123
14.
ADVERBS............................................................................................43
42.
PAST PARTICIPLE........................................................................ 126
15.
VERBAL NOUNS / GERUNDS.........................................................46
43.
COMPOUND VERBS..................................................................... 129
16.
POST - POSITIONS........................................................................... 50
44.
CAUSATIVE VERBS ..................................................................... 134
17.
CONJUNCTIONS ..............................................................................54
45.
VOICE............................................................................................... 138
18.
INTERJECTIONS.............................................................................. 56
46.
CONNECTING THE SENTENCES.............................................. 142
19.
FUTURE TENSE................................................................................ 57
47.
THE USE OF fa AND Wn............................................................... 145
20.
FUTURE SUBJUNCTIVE................................................................. 61
48.
AGREEMENT OF SUBJECT WITH VERB................................ 149
21.
PAST TENSE 'BE' VERB.................................................................. 64
49.
SPECIAL FEATURES OF SOME CASES....................................152
22.
PAST IMPERFECT TENSE..............................................................66
50.
PARTING ADVICE..........................................................................157
23.
PAST CONTINUOUS TENSE...........................................................69
24.
PAST INDEFINITE TENSE..............................................................71
25.
PAST INDEFINITE TENSE-TRANSITIVE VERBS....... ............. 74
26.
PRESENT PERFECT TENSE........................................................ 79 (xxii)
APPENDIX
(xxiii)
1. Appendix - I Classified Vocabulary
1. 159 159 160 160 161 161 162 162 163 163 164 165 165 166 166 167 168 169 170 170 170 171 171 171 171 171 172 173 173 173
Fruits Flowers Trees and their Parts Vegetables Grains and Pulses Eatables Birds Animals Insects Parts of the Body Diseases Clothes Gems and Jewels Minerals Relatives Occupations Building and its Parts Household goods Tools Directions Colours Days of the Week Names of Months Names of Months (Indian) Seasons Time Numerals Special Numbers Fractions Devanagari Figures
«RTT%? If? % I What is this? This is (a) book.
2.
i What is that? That is (a) pen.
3. This is a temple. That is a notebook.
4. This is nose. That is ear.
5.
t?
6.
tR eRTT%?
%I
What is on the floor? The chair is on the floor
7. The pen is in the hand. There is ink in the pen.
8.
cbhiyi %? Hfft, 75Tf? mifTdO! | Is this a paper? No, it is plastic.
Is it a temple? Yes sir, that is a temple.
10. stoHM 3Tt? enitM ^(■’17^1 The pen and paper are on the table.
174 177 179 182 183 184 186
11. The clock also is on the wall. 12.
ncbdl 7? I Union is strength. VOCABULARY
- a, one - pen (xxiv)
I
Where is the book? The book is on the table.
Appendix - II Proverbs Designations Administrative Terms Prefixes Suffixes Direct Verbs List of Adjectives
BASIC SENTENCES
T’cRcIT* - unity ^TT - where
sfa - and <*>uiyi - paper
1
SJJg^S • Learn Hindi Through English
gyggS « Learn Hindi Through English - notebook
TH - ear
- clock, watch
- chair Tjft - no, not - book iff^X - temple ■JT? - this, it tff - yes
- strength ft - in,at - that, it ■?T2T - hand
4t - also
The Imperative denotes: command, order, request, warning, prohibition, entreaty, etc. Therefore the subject will always be in second
i.e.
thou,
you,
you-respect
(g,
gn,
3m).
Some-
limes the subject may not be mentioned.
PTT^t* - ink
gjs used in addressing god, servants or children and in affecllon for mother, sister, younger brother, etc., or for expressing strong feelings like contempt or anger.
t - is
1. Words with asterisk mark (*) denote that they are feminine nouns. Then the adjective and the verb qualifying that noun also will be in feminine. 2. oRTT means‘what’. But if mT comes as the first or the earliest word, then it is not translated. The sentence should be treated as interrogative (i.e. yes or no - type - question)
■JU is used in addressing family members, equals, servants and juniors. 3m is the polite and respectful form of address for all, both in singular and in plural. It is used in addressing strangers and superi ors. As there is only one ‘you’ in English for singular-plural-respect, 3m is translated as ‘you please’. When g is the subject, the verb remains in its root form. e.g.
%? What is your name? %? Is this your house?
person,
ffjf* - table
Note:
W
THE IMPERATIVE
■snffa* -floor, ground V7 - on,above
TRF* -nose
2.
f%ilT - book
Thou get out -
«n I
When is the subject, 3Jt (letter or sound) is appended to the root of the verb, e.g. You come - gR 3TT3TT I You read - gH (n^+ 3ft) When 3m is the subject, TT (letter or sound) is appended to the root of the verb. e.g. You (please) come - 3m 3TT^T’ I You (please) speak 3m cflfcnJ (^tcT+ ^l>) | You go - sleep - bring - eat - sit - write - play - see gn^TTSTT - TTt3Tt - rTT3ft - 73T3T) 3m 3JT^r -
- frR^t - T^cft - HW I
- <3i^ - 3f^l* - friftsn* - tsifrii' -
W 3TfspJ, etc., are also written as 3JT?ft, *n?tr, etc., but the former forms are preferable. More politeness or entreaty is expressed by adding ’TT to the verb already used. 2
3
SUg§,'S • Learn Hindi Through English
SUEZ'S » Learn Hindi Through English
3TTM 3H^
'1.
3MMTJH5 MW ilRii^li I You please send a letter. The negative or prohibitive form of the Imperative is obtained by placing MH or W immediately before the verb. Of the two, H is polite but weak. MH is emphatic but less polite. Miff (naheen) is never used in Imperative.
!).
HM H WfT3tt I Don’t go.
7.
nftrft MH ^TT, MH HTT, MTH M^HtftlYou ascetic (Krishna), don’t go, don’t go, I fall upon your feet. (Mirabai)
8.
9.
7JW + 3TT (letter / sound) rJM TTOft I TJMTtsit I 10.
The following verbs behave irregularly when 3Tt or Th is added:
do
11.
3" eft nt fa3Tt Mitt
3TTM
12.
rttfal’ 13. rftfstu
<JMIjn> <jchM oldl <>m4 W>MT3Jt I Open a shop and earn money.
■3M^T3jt3^TT3T^HT3ftl
15.
You go and bring a table.
7JM 5*1^11 tai'llMg-il I Always wear khadi clothes.
W 3 MTrHM Ht I
16.
Take (hold) the pen in the hand
3.
smTM'ifuH fatsu^i You please teach us mathematics.
MODEL SENTENCES
2.
3TT3TMjWMH I Please don’t stay here today.
14.
1.
3TTM OSl(d^l) Mi’ll MH JlRll' i You please don’t drink cold water.
Subject
* 4t MM
MTiJMmMTHI Please always speak in mother-tongue.
Exceptions
drink
3T1W if MH jsiORi' I You please don’t buy handkerchief in a shop.
3TTM + (letter / sound) 3TTM til^ I 3TTM MtfvTT* I
take
g4?il TTW <m)ril I W>MtTJWMH <Mld11 Always speak the truth. Never tell a lie.
+ verb root
give
feiMdi, G>«{1 TftHMT3ft I Vimala, sing a Hindi song.
Imperative
i
nat, mtm xnwfwsft I Mohan, get up, drink hot tea.
7JM M7 MH ^Wt I Don’t sit on the chair.
Verb root
Pbcil ■’t^WTT 3TRT Wt I Give one kilo wheat flour.
3TWWT?m-3*RMHHtitl Don’t run here and there often
HJrTM it MU'iyi Ml Pita I I Write on the paper with pen.
17.
3TTM it HSHK WM^ flctufdH I You please withdraw a thousand rupees from bank.
4
5
Stgffe « Learn Hindi Through English
gWji • Learn Hindi Through English
3. PRESENT TENSE BE’ VERB
VOCABULARY - often, frequently 3TF5T - today - here
TR - do
cEH - yesterday, tomorrow
ist-0^ - buy
ralr-i - open
RTR - hot
’’TT - sing
’fhr - song
wheat
TST - cold shop
I am
TB - get up cEKT - earn
- stay, wait Th? -run
Gbqi
Singular
3JTZT - flour
TSR - there
<jM>h* -
acfniMcpIct
3JT - come
Plural
3 it
We are
KRi?
You are ^R^t
You are
3TNIf
He\
TheseV
She \ is
Those fare
It/
They /
1>
Note: 1.
All plural have the same ending f I
2.
To indicate negative, use It comes before verb.
3.
Though 4 stands for I, while talking, a person may use 7HT.
Pi m>i ci - take out
^-letter
Particularly writers and people in power tend to use tHT in
RtrT - wear
Tpft - water
stead of W I
tft - drink
TTct* - matter,talk
■qr^Tm* - mother-tongue
Tiff - here
TTrl - truth
(moi -
4. 5.
3TTQ,4,^ denote singular also if they are used to point out to a respectable person. are also pronounced as eft I
teach MODEL SENTENCES
- thousand
5*^11 - always
1.
Note:-
f jHmim din
4 aruim*^!
I am Gopaldas. 1 am a teacher. In Imperative, even if the subject is not indicated or missing,
2.
one can guess it by looking at the verb. If it ends in 3Tt (letter or sound), then the subject is you (singular). If the verb ends in TR (letter
^R^ta^t?^ngn7nnft? Who are you? Are you Ram?
3.
or sound), then the subject is you (respect or plural).
'31? Tift
%I
He is not Kishore but Rakesh.
It she Kamala? No, she is Vimala. 5.
Mg qM> if I
I
This is (it is) a dog. The dog is a domestic animal. 6. 6
7TT TTOT I TyR KuIm I We all belong to India. We are Indians. 7
StggfS • Learn Hindi Through English
MJgf^S * Learn Hindi Through English____________________ 7.
I IH >11VM IHcfi ff? <1
4.
7| |
PRESENT INDEFINITE TENSE WUTI WI yJHM wr
Are you (respect) a lecturer? No, I am a doctor. 8.
The present indefinite tense, known as simple present tense. Indicates an action in the present, an action taking place now. e.g. I <jo, You come, It runs, She sings, They shout, etc.
if 3RR, 3rara7 3ftr 3TF^ft'f I They are Amar, Akbar and Antony.
9.
KT
1? I
In Hindi, the indefinite is formed by adding the suffix KT,ft or 7ft according to the gender and number of the subject.
That is a white paper. 10.
WRT T*K5 KTT 3Tft''JTHT 7f?T 11
Then the sentence is rounded off with Kt,ft,ft as shown in
India is a big and ancient country. 11.
’fraftTft'SRl, RK
I .esson - 3 to indicate present tense.
I
Subject
Verb root
Masculine suffix
Feminine suffix
ftt ftt ftt eft
There are 100 houses in the village - all very small. 12.
13.
KRTK?K7 lairfl
ft .
'KT
KT
Is this house not vacant?
3*
kt
ft
KT
KT
fwMcficfl The lizard is on the wall.
14.
15.
kt
3raft ft wsi God’s in His heaven All’s right with the world. (Robert Browning)
1. 2.
VOCABULARY
3U4li|cf5 - teacher
3JTf$ra> - lover
^TKT - dog
ft> - of
KfFt - who
isnrft - vacant
ftra - village
SR - house
fewft * - lizard
WZT - small
mIMcH
- animal
KFe -
* - world
tVT - country
- white
JtlliR - poet ftt - hundred
RK- all
3. 4. 5.
O.K. all right
TTTMIUK> - lecturer
- but
RTT - big
ft
6.
All masculine plural have the same suffix ft added to the verb root. All feminine subjects take the same suffix ftt added to the verb root. All plurals, both masculine and feminine, have the same present tense indicator ft. The negativeTftt will come before verb. When Kftt is used, tense, need not be shown, e.g. does not go - Hftt tjTTKt I But if the subject is feminine plural and if Rftf is used, then the verb takes a dot above, e.g. Girls do not jump - rTsfftraf Kftf Nowadays women increasingly use KR instead of ft for singu lar. When they use KR they end the sentence with masculine plural verb instead of feminine verb. Thus, instead of saying ft KTTeft ft, a modem woman will say KR Tift ft. For plural also they say KR Krft ft.
8
ft
Note :
I am no poet. I am not a lover either.
UIWRJ^- domestic, tame 'JTHT - old
t ftt
1
ftXPR KtHpft I ft 3JTf7ra fttXff I
Kt - of course, so
ft
Present tense
9
SW<S • Learn Hindi Through English
_________________________Sgflfe » Learn Hindi Through E nglish
MODEL SENTENCES: Masculine 1.
15.
i xTW'ftcTT il 16.
foucbl v? fcrtsia it?
Feminine
<MTXU «lni i?
1.
When does the baby sleep? 4.
cRTT^Ti?
5.
2.
3.
4.
5.
They never speak falsehood. nif I
6. 11
l{4»
oldi xt? XR 3<1
7
oidi i I
jR«ii
M*ri
3jra=j?Ti
«lf|dT Hii UfHrfl I
eRT,tjm^RTii ejtsit*,
nit
ti My mother works in a college.
afft rftnxRrfteiii
10.
XTRJ xRFTT?'i 3TRRTxR?ft i I
11.
wqifitcbl 3H3^RH^ftf I
The secretary thanks and the people return home. 14.
irtfa 3ftRt
Madam, what do you buy ?
The stars twinkle in the sky. 13.
iI
8. w, 3nq^nisrftc^fti?
irni I
The sun gives light to the world. 12.
^r
Hi? 3T5i5T UFTO4 ftlHdl %? Is good quality butter available here? 10
it tsiirfi i i
We, the students of the hostel, do not eat rice, we eat wheat only.
Sitting on the tree the parrot eats guava 11.
w?ft wnxrRfti7?7ftt 3ft73Tmi7?ftti
Poor women do not wear silk sarees.
Those labourers work in a factory. 10.
TRHT rfbl HTTOTf i 3Tei5T 4llrfl i I
That old woman sells fruits and flowers in the market street.
We do not sit on the floor. 9.
ftrft it?
The fish always lives in water and swims in it.
cEit Hit
tr
xr
Sarala sings well in three languages
3TTU yltMrt jt y*4iqi 5t> I You laugh more than necessary.
8.
gn eRlf
Why do you cry on every little thing ?
f| We go to the shop daily and buy milk.
7.
i w««d nit xftiti I do not drink juice in the evening
311d H'fld tilfsMI i?
Does this boy learn music nowadays?
6.
r£R TRR tt 7TTR ng,-er 4 nxn HRi it? What do you do from morning to evening at home?
Whom do you write the letter to ? 3.
^arrt i i
The horses run fast. The bullocks walk slowly.
I drink tea. 2.
iti ihf itei i i
The cow grazes in the pasture comfortably.
The lady teacher reads newspaper. 11
SUgj^S « Learn Hindi Through English
Learn Hindi Through English
5. PRESENT CONTINUOUS TENSE
VOCABULARY 3HsI417-
When a work has started and is continuing at present (e.g. I
34l
3rxt$l - good - nowadays
3TT7TR- comfort
- sky
jftTH *- woman
eK'rft'Tfr - never - factory - poor tR
dlcd»llcl dtfald BTcT
- guava
newspaper
am going), the process is indicated by inserting 7in/7f/7ft between verb root (e.g. 3JT) and the appropriate present tense indicator 1|,ft,f,if TTT is used if the subject is masculine singular
cEPT - work
if is used if the subject is masculine plural or a respected male.
eWife - because
7ft is used if the subject is feminine
■grra *- shine, twinkle
To denote negative, Tft is put before verb.
xHHII? *- pasture
- graze
Subject - hostel
‘jttMri *- need
srtllcH - much
?J3 - lie, falsehood
THTT - star
#7 - swim
ft
Masculine
Feminine
Present
-ing
-ing
tense
7?T
7ft 7ft
t ft
U-^cTR - thanks
ifg - tree
ycbl^T - light, shine
CRM - fruit
rgH - flower
stxctl - child
*- old woman
suyfR - market place UcHsH - butter
iTxl - sell
- labourer
*- fish - college
Wft - of silk
ft- cry, weep
ft?f - daily
cUefH - boy
rfte - return
Llffra - secretary
7TTft* - saree
/
3TT
Tf?T
7ft
t
W\ 3TT7 \
3TT
7f
7ft
t
:/ 1.
All masculine plurals have the same ending -7f f
2.
All feminine subjects take 7ft
3.
All feminine plurals have the same ending f
MODEL SENTENCES: Masculine 1.
ff I am going to Madras this night
2.
■fn - laugh
^7% ft? What are you seeing above ?
3. 12
3TT 3JT
- milk
ffn - parrot
- sun
Root
T5T3T *- girl student
nieirl - rice
ersfiR^rftcRff wm Why is that beggar continuously screaming? 13
« Learn Hindi Through English______________________ 4.
3>tii 4*3*7 m1*
Seeing a 5.
f^ft
%i
’). Th
thief this dog is barking 33 f?f73 7f f
fiiRtu fayn fcprraT^ 3 Ptaiti 377 7ft f i Sania Mirza is residing in Hyderabad.
srm^n
VOCABULARY
Why are 7.
TTft 37ft 3TT 7ft % I The train is coming just now.
10.
We are writing letters in Hindi. 6.
Slj^S « Learn Hindi Through English
you always laughing?
iMlJl
3rft - just now
37T7 - get down, descend 3737 - up, above
7337* - news
Tsimi -
fei&i - shout
xft7 - thief
75: - six
3^T - bathe
■He* - drama
•il*ti41 - servant maid
T75 - ask
«F5TT - strike (clock)
food
dPin - mathematics
These pilgrims are bathing in the Ganga. 8.
'ftf tttf tTF^FTn
w? 7t tth 7f f I
Those devotees are getting down from Tirumala hill. 9.
3Tt4im* ’ifiira HdlH 1J75 7% f I The teacher is asking questions in maths.
- serve «Kdd - vessel
37F - devotee
3FT - part, share
Feminine
f3ou(l - beggar
1.
37^^737177737^ fl
777T* - night
nd in it - continuously
I am listening to the news in the radio
7THK - clean
TFT - hear, listen
2.
jd 3
- bark
3lft - traveller
7E7 tfl ft I
You are worshipping in the temple 3.
oil'll Mtlti
4.
dWlfl <47dd
I
The servant-maid is cleaning vessels. 5.
WWT^TftTfttl We are drinking hot milk
6.
3i(q «ud dff tj'i tfl f I You are not listening to my talk
7.
3 41 dl TTSf^FTT diecb 3 'Mid 74 ttfl 1? I These two girls are taking part in the drama
8.
Trft75:’^jTTTft'f I The clock is striking six 14
15
ttdici - question
» Learn Hindi Through English
ggfft < Learn Hindi Through English
6.
4.
GENDER
Present tendency in Hindi is to use some nouns in the common gendere.g.ftsft, Fhs. Wind) 5O1
There are two genders in Hindi: i) Masculine
),
ii) Feminine (^ftfePT). The Hindi gender system is partly natural (based
5.
on sex) and partly grammatical (based on usage).
Among the collective nouns (names of groups), some of them are always used in masculine and some others are always used in feminine, dset,
In the case of living things, we can easily identify the gender of the word, e.g., boy, father, king, bullock brother, man, husband, etc., are naturally masculine.
ftft?, ftn, 6.
Similarly, girl, mother, queen, cow, sister, woman, wife are
ftftRT, crten, ftftn, ww, vaft, w^jatd'lyi
But the problem of determining the gender arises when the noun is a lifeless thing like house, wall, pen, mountain, potato, etc.
fftTJ, 4>ld 1, ftrapu - always masculine xraFTsft,
In the case of inanimate things, there are some general rules to determine the gender.
- always feminine.
1.
f ending denotes feminine :
By changing the final 3T/3TT into 4 ftZT-ftft, Ml s I - m! 41 ,^RT-^iftt
(According to a research, among the inanmimate things, the following words which end in 4 alone are masculine: VFft, fttrft)
2.
By changing the final 3T/3JT into TRT
3.
By adding
By imagination on the basis of meaning : W5, ft?, are
big,
Hlfeieh-mfelOd
WH, etc., are masculine as they hard,
terrible or powerful. eRTT,*lleii,Rra,etc.,
4. are
learn it from our mother. is feminine as it is worshipped as a goddess. Some nouns do not come under any rule. It is difficult to say why any of them is masculine or feminine. We can remember their gender only by practice. 4TR, Rift, HRH masculine
Tn-wfl, 5.
16
iO-ftarft
By adding R (last f becomes ? ) tftcft-fttfftR, ftrft-ftfeH, RTeft-ufteH
6.
By adding 3TT^H uf^d - m F4n
7.
feminine
By adding ftt/3TPft ¥ft-^lt*ft, -5>
feminine as they are soft or small. '4TTT is feminine as we
3.
Odefi, Weft,
Rules for formation of feminine from masculine
By form: to decide by the last letter of the word: 3TT ending denotes masculine :
2.
feminine
Though living things consist of males and females, some are always used in masculine and some others always in feminine.
feminine.
1.
Jeq, ftu, ^eT masculine
By changing vowel sound d|4|et>-’ 17
| ch |
SIJ^S • Learn Hindi Through English
SRfft • Learn Hindi Through English 8.
Some nouns have different forms in feminine
‘* fqdMHlg’i
cfff dCdclH f^isildl % I
Vinayamohan shows (exhibits) Tippu Sultan’s sword. 7^1, 9.
7T7J7-77HT, cT7-cP-{,
Sometimes masculine nouns are formed from feminine nouns by adding various suffixes : - she-buffalo
HI
I I TOTOT 31
This new newspaper gives fresh (latest) news.
'fcn - he-buffalo
7TS- widow
t§3TT- widower
TOT - husband’s sister
12.
- sister’s husband .
- mother’s sister
13.
14.
TOT 71 TOT TT TO i? I The new year begins from tomorrow
15.
I Today the wind is blowing slowly.
16.
TOT ?T TO4tfTO (TO) TOT I Water is flowing from the pipe.
17.
TO TO»t 3TTOH TOTift % I This clock often goes fast.
18.
TOTTOTTOTTOftt?
MODEL SENTENCES The cuckoo is black, the parrot is green and the sparrow is
2.
■gtrTT H 3^7 TOr iftST I The lemon is sour and the apple is sweet.
3.
4.
5.
I An aeroplane is flying in the sky.
Where does this road go (lead to )?
TsTTH'tf HI di ftridi t I Gold is available in the mine.
Why do you get angry?
19. 3TNchl TOf 3TOT% ?
H-Schtp rfld TT?ft ’Kdrl 1? I
How far is Mahabalipuram from Madras?
Three elephants move along on the road. 6.
G?"4i dl<^4 ^KIch^TH chfcfdlt’ f> I There are ten poems in the Hindi text-book. 18
i Sitting on the tree, the bird sings.
22.
TIT'TOT <*> i cfil Trft I This cow does not give enough milk.
8.
21.
<*i
7.
TO’TTrT $Hi
Wn - aunt’s husband
brown. f^tcTT stands for a general statement. It means ‘ happens to be’)
l c£ft 3TTOT3T 3lrhd 4)dl % I Sushila’s voice is very sweet.
TOdl^ - husband’s sister’s husband
cTTO - sister
TO xre T£T| I The bear is climbing up the tree.
TOTOft cT^%3^-»T^ I This lane is long and dirty too.
23.
3TM3T^nTOTOftt I The cat’s eyes shine in the dark.
24.
m^i41
TOTO^^TO^I
There are many springs on the hill. 19
Wi .fi .• • Learn Hindi Through English
♦ Learn Hindi Through English 25.
7. NUMBER
I The weavers weave clothes.
26.
rftt
era»r A noun denoting one person or one thing is said to be in the ■angular number. A noun denoting more than one person or thing is >«)id to be in the plural number.
i
The police is coming, run away (escape). 27.
itHRT
TsTTHf |
The plural number is also used as a polite and respectful form with reference to a single person, a superior.
The people of Tamilnadu eat only rice. 28.
I
The singular number is inherent in the base (fundamental) form
That old woman is cooking food.
of a noun. e.g. 3tgT,nsct>i 313,3333
VOCABULARY 3T^R - darkness - building
- voice, sound 33 -fly
chfcidi* - poem enough
But there are also a large number of nouns which look similar
- exercise
TT^T - dirty
Trfr* - lane, alley
RRT* - cow
f^R - fall
TfFFTT -anger
33 - climb
rtiyii - fresh
^3- fast
Words used directly from Sanskrit do not change, e.g. foHT, Wi.
a
few more unclassiffied nouns do not change in plural.
e.g.3RJ3JT, ^3T, ^7331, 3tFT, HTHT, - text book
Ui<^4
2.
- cat
All other masculine nouns remain unchanged in the plural. 31,«fc3,
bear
- sweet
HRT - tall
3^ - year
3.
RpTT - gold - aircraft
Feminine nouns ending in inherent 3T take 3 sound in the plural.
- begin
- road
33T5
letter do not change in the plural, e.g. *i'bl, 3TRT, RI3T, •ihi, RTRT.
P37F - to cook
- weave
IRHI-IRU, dltl-dff
Exception : Some nouns signifying a relationship with repetitive
- weaver
33 - flow
All masculine nouns ending in 3TT change the 3JT to l>. ulsi-ul^,
drtetit* - sword
-bird
Plurals are formed according to the following rules. 1.
3RTT -waterfall
- distant, far
e.g. 3l/3t31, 31/31tR, Rt3T «lci/*i)^ ^cd, si«$> Rlhdl %/si<^ Midtl $I
TsTR* - mine
fclfeill* - bird
In both singular and plural, e.g. 31, . In these cases, we can find out their number with the help of the context,
3JRsT-3TR^, 3Ttlcf-3lV(S, $t>tdH-?bcd*5,
- soldier ?3T* - air
4.
Feminine nouns ending in will end in in plural
KT3T - elephant
20
21
1T3-1T^, -"Il<4—■*UL*
• Learn Hindi Through English
Sgg^S • Learn Hindi Through English 5.
8.
Other feminine nouns take in plural, e.g.
9.
if ^TR '‘TRUT’ «rfMdl f I I know four languages.
10.
sif*gi Rieftqt/RSHTTTT't 1 The postman is bringing letters.
sign is and not if. 6.
Feminine words ending in ^TT take a chandrabindu in plural, e.g.
11.
I,1 -At I, fr( I - R| fsq |, I - «jR«<7
I
Ramakrishna is buying some books.
KMl-mmii, TFTT-^’iiy., ■Hirdi—■Hini'X, ^3-^3^. It is usual to write if for T*. But it form had better be avoided. The plural
tlHchwi ^5 jjt-aefi
«RRTd 3
fI
Mosquitoes sting much in rainy season. Note:
12.
The words cftn, 7TUT,^f,'3'^ (people, group, class) are appended to some masculine nouns to denote plurality but as a class : rTHT eTtn, 3Jl4 rftn, Uiechuui,
Bring two baskets. 13.
Among these, ’ThT takes
singular verb. As ^,^,3TTR are also used as singular to indicate respect,
14.
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
TTrT 3
2.
I The rainbow has seven colours.
3.
? How many ships are there in the harbour?
4.
U'di«i ifvra df^Aii f? 1 wft
7.
RTTT if TJcR 3^ Rgnrl If I Rarl f Beautiful flowers bloom in the garden.
16.
R Rt if I There are many shops on the sea-shore
17.
MtfRTR tfyt d^d I Bheemrao eats a lot of sweets daily.
18.
RTyTRif RsmI} 4ffiR#| I
19. tpjsifi>
1
Trrf^TRRSrRjRi^, ^RRRRRJ I In villages, agricultural fields are more and buildings less.
20.
I Many newspapers are published in Hindi.
21.
Fllf^<47I Kanchipuram silk sarees are famous.
Three sisters live in the hostel.
22.
if x4ci4| 1? I Boats move(sail) in the river.
■Jihn if I Animals live in the forest.
23.
R?TtyTTt 3Ttffrft| I This bird gives (lays) two eggs daily.
'*TRH if ftsRIT
'f I
Women in India wear bangles. 6.
I
Foreign toys also are available in the market place.
Five rivers flow in Punjab. All rivers fall into the sea. 5.
dWl41
15.
Tt^?t f I
Rats run here and there at night.
RT epf si^> 1? I There are many guns on the table. The servant maid is washing clothes.
cTFr is added to them to emphasize a plural sense : rftn, it TTFT, tTT cTFT ,3Tf riFT.
I
^nrrawif
I
22
23
I
SUgfifS « Learn Hindi Through English
SUgj0 » Learn Hindi Through English 24.
8.
I There are many countries in the world.
R®
25.
■snf^n I There are many religions, castes and languages in India.
26.
I There are a lot of factories in Jamshedpur.
27.
dRIui^l^*if^< ? How many temples are there in Varanasi?
Case is that form of a noun or pronoun which expresses its relation with some other word in the sentence. The relationship indicated is like subject, object, means, purpose, advantage, separation, origin, possession, material, composition, place, time, etc. There are eight case-endings in Hindi 1. ft This is added to the subje ct only in certain tenses of the past, when the verb has an object. TRTft <snq| I
VOCABULARY ‘ ra^bow
3T5T - egg eER - cut, sting
fctHHI - shore
ehMdl - cloth
fxieJl - letter
^T- rat
*PTH - forest
- ship
aletj) - basket
sifft>4l - postman
HT5* - boat
Sift - religion
ftt - wash
eiftRIR - harbour
«HHM* - rain
eTTH - garden
- foreign
fftcT - available
It is added to that noun which is also the object e.g. Call Rama :
«JRT3ft. Rft is not generally necessary when
the object is inanimate. See cinema : Ri-Ihi ftiai I Tri RT3ft I
- garden
ftftt - agricultural field
ftdif* - sweet
1.
ItaH - bloom
Ran mi - toy
- mosquito
CASES
fart, take ft not 'aft. 3. ft It is equivalent of by. It denotes the tool with which a thing is done. e.g. They went to Karachi by plane : ft ft c+Ri-cfl Rft | 1.
It stands for ‘to’. I give money to Sita : ft ftlai
fttTI
"C I It need not be added to the name of a place, e.g. I am going to Delhi: ft fftpft "5TT Tf?T I
hHH
- world
- sea
5. ft It means from, than. The monkey falls from the tree : ft'R
ft^R - beautiful
Bharat is older than Lakshman : ft’3rST%l 5. '®KT This connects two nouns. It stands for ‘of’ or’s. Use ^ET if the second noun is masculine singular. Use'll if the second noun is feminine. Use ft> if the second noun is masculine plural or respectable person. It is also used if the second noun is masculine and is followed by one more case. R>TR7, tIM ftft uiq, eft <*m4, ThT fti V?ftl 7. ft, TR in, at. Reft, ftT. -ismi (bathe) takes it not it. 3 ft, aft etc., Used to call some one. RT^TT ftft aftftftt (Q wretch !) 24
25
Hsef), %
Sgfft • Learn Hindi Through English
* Learn Hindi Through English
Note: 1. If there is a case symbol after a masculine noun ending in 3JT, then change that 3TT into 1?. =hHti + 'S =
6.
We see with the eyes. 7.
nsehi+fet=fet I This rule is not
applicable to masculine words shown as exceptions in the
8.
3.
9.
With feminine nouns ending in it is shortened to ? and Rt is
10.
I
ffranft gRraMHd £ fed li ht^ f i
Father brings books from the library.
When a case sign comes after a noun it is written separately, 12.
e.g.f^tir
RTJRTH
?> I
We learn many things from history.
If case sign comes after a pronoun, it is joined to the pronoun, e.g. <jn+fet=
But V7 is written separately for clarity.
13.
14.
MODEL SENTENCES:
RTH^t^TRRRRftt
I
There is hot water in the bucket. There is red ink in the ink pot.
e.g. 3TTQ+TR=3RR R7
1.
'i'll fetid*!
The Ganges starts from the Himalayas. 11.
5.
I Please give this book to Ravi.
TR, RIX’ - RTRtfet.
added in plural if followed by a case sign. e.g. nsfe«ii
4.
3JSRTWfet R f I The teacher gives the prize to Lakshmi.
If a case comes after a plural, add 3ff sound or letter. ^R-VTt it,
3FRRH R djtdi "XFi 'f I The officer goes to office by car.
previous lesson like THIT, fttfT. 2.
TR 3TR3f Tt ^<Sld 1? I
RRT7pjfetRtftRFt^r ? Do you sleep in the daytime also?
T^RfetRRSfR^ift I 15.
Send Rahim to market.
I There is an old temple on the mountain.
2.
3tM4>rl arsqnra
I
16.
Nowadays teachers do not cane the students. 3.
RRTR
fet RTiR fJfet
I
17.
Throw away the rotten fruits. Don’t cut with knife. 4.
RtRif fem^ I There are many books on the table. TTHR7TRfi fRrfetRfcrft| I A squirrel runs on the branch (of the tree).
18.
MMrHTt won tjldli? I
i The washerman’s donkey is grazing in the garden (park).
By effort, man becomes successful. 19. 5.
shci*4 FlRR feodl % I Sujatha writes letter with pen.
i Delhi is the capital of India.
20.
Tsrra
i
The people of Punjab are by nature heroic. 26
27
Sgg(S » Learn Hindi Through English
SR§(S « Learn Hindi Through English
21.
? What does Satish’s father do?
9. POSSESSIVE CASE
22.
tI We talk with (the help of) the tongue.
23.
3ft I You boy, don’t run there.
24.
chflM 3Tc^vT R7T % I Kareem is Abdul’s friend.
25.
Tftrn^^^TdlH <1441811 I Sita’s husband’s name is Ramnath.
The possessive case is denoted by the sign R7T (of, ’s). It denotes the relationship between a noun / pronoun and another noun. 1.
Mohan’s horse RTC4 tffeT Rama’s brother TTR R7T 41^ Sita’s dog TfUl R7T 2.
VOCABULARY - history - squirrel <5Wd<- office
If the next (second) noun in Hindi is masculine singular, R7T is used before it
larra - rotten
washerman
If the next (second) noun in Hindi is masculine plural, 37 is used before it. Boys of the school RfrT 3; rTgifc Mohan’s horses W 3? 33?
wr - donkey
- student
Sita’s house RTTT R7T 8R
Sita’s dogs 3> j>t)
‘STH* - tree branch
Trees of the forest Jiur-i 3; 3s
Houses of stone 3> Plays of Kalidasa
3>
- beat
J^H-chR - prize
RRF1 - attempt
- bucket
RTjR - outside
TTRRFft* - capital city M’hrl - successful
3.
If the second noun in masculine is followed by another case (^3,^,^71,^,’3t,3, V7) then the R7T before the second noun becomes 3>
7
in Gopal’s hand 7ftWT R7T RT«T 3=3)4 IM 3> ^T8T 3 from the neighbouring house «IIIM 47T tR 3= ^TIM 3> RT 3 to Sarla’s brother <4<MI R7T RTf r3 = TRcTT 3> RT? cf3 If the second noun in Hindi is feminine 33 is used before it. Gopal’s mare 33 3)3) |
Rahim’s sisters <£)
To Ram’s mother 7TR 3) RT 3) I
girls of the school 33
an assembly of women f33l3i RRT
distance of one mile 334 33 t3
paper boat 3) RTcT
produce of the field ^) ■id'Jl
28
29
» Learn Hindi Through English
5.
__________________________SU^S • Learn Hindi Through English
through your kindness
murder of woman
31 Im4>1 <£>MI 3
’tft33 grill
dining table 73133tt
love of mother RT MMdl
9.
3rt3>^3 ckthtr313^
10.
RRTRiT Hlfcich cbld % ? Who is the owner of the garden?
A peculiar use of 3> is met with in such sentences as : A king had three queens
trgt3)h <|Rmi 3t I 3t (3+30
I have one sister.
I
i The name of Prema’s dog is Nero.
11.
rrh 3 3T«r i*et>n 133 rtrrt % I The feeling of unity is now weak in India.
12.
rftHT 3i SR 3 f3tr3 RRR f ? How many rooms are there in Leela’s house?
This usage denotes just the existence of queens and sister to king and 1. ti'hl 33 33t
emphasis
is
on
possession.
333^5 3>
Where do Hindi books are available here? 14.
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
13. 'SRRTT (3>
R>T RTR RRT3 ?
VOCABULARY
What is the name of Govind’s school? 2.
^ni«i RtT ■'grt
cbHylh - weak
1? I
The rose flower is pretty. 3.
- rose
^333R7 3tRRt I
f3RRTT - rent, charge cflUR - ill
Hifri* - owner
I
Hari’s mother is ill. Hence she is in the hospital from day before yesterday. 4.
I There is no ink in Rajan’s pen.
5
^¥t3>sr3^R^Ht| ?
Who lives in Suresh’s house? 6
'rTrTT cFT■’Tpft *0<5i 1? I The water of the Ganges is sweet.
7.
i I do not know ( am not acquainted with ) Radha’s brother.
8.
RHT3 33TTRrf3RHT^l33tt ? How much milk does Prasad’s cow give (yield)?
30
- pretty
31
• Learn Hindi Through English
10.
Sgg(S « Learn Hindi Through English
PRONOUNS
fdhR^ft singular
dcfoilH
rTTr
A pronoun is a word used instead of a noun. It helps the speaker or writer to avoid clumsily repeating the name of a person every time. The Hindi pronouns are as follows. Singular:
fehU cfi
[^>•4*1
plural ft \ I n r\ I IchUlcb
Suppose after RJ, ^K,if,it ,RTt, R^R, RTtl? there is a noun and if
, KTtj (rJR is singular in usage)
Plural : KF, 34TR, it, tift, ^R, RTtf
fchdcEl Terr
there is also a case sign after that noun, then these pronouns change into JH,3H,JR,3R,ntH,ftH,fdm,iifR,fe7fT. e.g.
RTt who (relative); RTR who (question); RTti somebody, anybody
in which country - RfT RTT R - f^TR HTT R
In English when a case is added to a pronoun, the latter changes its form.e.g. to + I = to me, by + he = by him, etc., In Hindi also similar changes take place when case-endings are added to the pronouns, as shown below.
of that man — d34 R7T-TH 341i from this boy - RK ms*i - JH riKdil - JH H in these rooms - it RTRt R - JR Rmi R - JR di 144) R the name of our country 4>l <^l =hl- jn^7^?i 471 - gqft ^>1 R7T
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
RRTH (cJR+RTT) RIR Wl |? i)n '41M
fI
What is your name? My name is Varadaraj.
From whom do you learn Hindi? 3.
nit ($+^1)rjrt^ (3+e6t)fH7srnft|| My sister teaches me.
4.
Mlni'rfl ^*4*1 «pRTTjt t» I 'jtdRfTSTt I Mother is calling you. Go at once.
5.
KR TH gctild H xtTdcR jaOdcl f I We buy rice from that shop.
6.
JRHKTifTnjn^t I There are waterfalls on these mountains.
7.
f^TtftRTRUflHftjfnjf3TT^f I Owing to some reason, he comes here daily.
What is the name of your friend’s father? (HKrft - girl’s girl friend). 32
33
SUgt^S « Learn Hindi Through English
SggS ♦ Learn Hindi Through English 9.
11. REFLEXIVE PRONOUN
i Your sister Sheela is my student.
10.
3l 4
444 hie) Sf 5*4 Hi <'chZI7% I
Reflexive pronoun substitutes or refers to a noun or pronoun. If we say, ‘Rama does Rama’s work,’ it will sound clumsy. So we say, ‘Rama does his work’. ‘His’ reflects Rama.
We have a house in that village. 11.
'5'T w Tf 311 m4>1 «rSh -Tft 1? ? Among these cycles which.is yours?
12.
si<*e< <4i?«l, flO jflfl cjGsu', S?RTH I
Instead of saying Si SlTR7
Doctor, please look at (examine) my tongue and my teeth.
3TRHT gives the same meaning of RJT-^fc-3mdl has three forms :
Sft Wftjft Hldchl 3 ehtrfl f |
3tMdl-31U'|-3<M'fi
13.
In Hindi 3JRHT is used as reflexive pronoun in such cases.
My brother’s wife acts in dramas. 14.
jh
^df^d Rtflt ^rsff
Use 3TflS if the next noun is masculine plural or respectable person.
fI
Use 3Rpft if the next noun is feminine.
There are beautiful bangles in both the hands of the bride. 16.
Use 3JUR if the next noun is masculine and is followed by a
RTR7T RRTRflT
case sign.
What is your house (residential) address? 17.
RfRRIRRrRRRRRRnRt?
E.g. My name (is Ram) - Sfd-RTT RTF - Stt RTF
In which office does he work?
I (write) my name Si Si +RR din - Si SnRTF - S 34Mdl RTF
18.
Rif S Wtft % ?
(i.e. My reflects I)
In which class does Pavitra study? 19.
MODEL SENTENCES
? Where is the door of this fort (situated)?
20.
RTt SfeRf RtRHZit flff | One who barks does not bite. (Barking dogs seldom bite)
21.
id i we must say Si 3TflHTRt 'flidi I As
Use 3JRHT if the next noun is masculine singular
^544) r<{l irioit I
You write faster than me (than I do) 15.
ji
-^fr KTRH i TTt 7JTTR?T | I One who sleeps (much) loses.
VOCABULARY 3jfSfRR - acting Rlqd - rice
cfr>l
jftfl* - tongue
RRlf - class, grade
jdf^d* - bride
HTfl - name
- call
flTflt* - brother’s wife 34
1.
d\dId 3Ttpft Rift chHdi RR <^ni % I Nandalal gives his watch to Kamala.
2.
3TFRRRTtSRt^il Father sleeps in his room.
3.
Si 3m4l I write with my pen.
4.
3FTRTRT3 MddI % I Yogesh reads his lesson.
5.
3tmft siGH RTT 'JiMI % l Hari takes his sister to school.
6.
34g.1l R7 dffl I They do not sell their house.
fshdi - fort ^d{l - quickly RTR - tooth RKT - address
35
SUgj^S « Learn Hindi Through English
SjggfS » Learn Hindi Through English
7.
12. ADJECTIVES
3m J
it W
1? I
All people love their country. 8.
34m41 tr
i? i
An adjective is a word which qualifies a noun, a pronoun or .mother adjective. In ‘blue sky,’ ‘angry sea,’ blue and angry are adjectives. In the line, “The woods are lovely, dark and deep,” the words lovely, dark, deep are adjectives as they say something special about the noun ‘woods’.
Ramya sits on her chair. 9. I am popular in my office. 10.
7JR 3FT4 ■dlxlI'jTl eftt ^rfT3rt |
Generally an adjective says something about the quality (3i^«i,
You call your uncle. 11.
•I l<4 34'4’f
quantity
rjU % |
The cow gives milk to its calf. 12.
wrtft 3rt4
If e g.
did I tlH 3RRn^HH3m4i
I
Totaram gives his pay to his wife. 14.
lUehl
rftZFtf I
The labourers return to their homes in the evening. 15.
3m H TH (Rd) ^tVTdd^t -Jinn11
(ttTET),
state
or
condition
is attached to an adjective, it intensifies the idea, cblH,
jmvTI-Tft
ns4?l
According to the last letter of the word the adjectives in Hindi are of two kinds: 1.
those ending in 3T1-34,otsi,<*>iviI,wlai,
2.
those ending in other letters - RRT,
i
An adjective ending in 3TT can qualify only a masculine singular
Man does not know what is in his mind. 16.
number
(3^T,41MR) of a noun or merely points out
wi i i
The peon salutes his officer. 13.
(^|7T),
noun. If the noun is feminine, 3TT will become
TfhrT3n4^qi«ftT^t i
If the noun is masculine plural or a respectable person, then
Meera is washing her clothes.
3JT will become
17. Ahmed lives in his brother’s house in Allahabad Sim I M1 <5 <413 Tj?T T I
18.
If the masculine singular is followed by a case sign then also 3TT becomes However, the following adjectives ending in 3TT do not change at all: 7TRT, mRm1,
Jacob is memorizing his lesson. 19.
Mum witm 1R u i vi 3m-i i dmR'i J^<s( nd in 1I
20.
t|
Kalyanram celebrates his birthday every year very well. 3tMdl tJU cidd Tf ^RTT cfitrlI ^1
I deposit my full pay in the bank.
TR^T, 5^941
good boy - 3T6t5T ns*i
masculine singular
good girl - 3T^t
feminine singular
good girls - 3T6t31 visR>4T
feminine plural
good boys - 3T£t5 nsi
masculine plural
good leader - 3T€^HrTT
masculine respect
to the good boy - 3Tctj cHl
noun followed by case
VOCABULARY 31fym>id - officer chHti - room ■enxn - uncle Rvft* - wife ®R55T - calf - salary - in the evening 36
MMtitfl - peon WR - love TRdTR - salute
All other adjectives ending in any other letter do not change whether they qualify a masculine or feminine noun or a singular or plural noun. 37
SgffS • Learn Hindi Through English
Sgf^S • Learn Hindi Through English 437 eisctu - handsome boy - masculine singular iTPT ^TRT - hot tea - feminine singular
77173 Hf^TT 3rf4m |1 The rivers of south India are not very deep.
13. 14.
- ugly buildings - feminine plural 7TFT - poor people - masculine plural h4><1
Whose is this new house?
441 777773 TWI
15.
R7 - on white paper - noun followed by case 16.
77KT ni-jf 37% faritl % 1 Fresh eggs are available here in the morning.
17.
377
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
, tmT erg r 11 • Sudha is a little girl, but she is clever.
2.
Tj?
XT?T5
*xj| % |
% 77737 % 1
The minister always travels in the first class.
37T^4t 3TT VTT17 TERyTR %1
The body of that patient is weak. 18.
"37^ 7Tm •jF^cfici yl«
This mountain is high. 3.
3^4441 ^IRri'^UIdlrld t I That yellow building is the court.
19.
377>77777 % WlRa 413H Blrldl 11 Tasty food is available in that restaurant.
4.
'4773 m 7RR4% KT3 if I Towns in India are dirty.
20.
Tjm Arft <1)41 ms',hi % l Hamid wears a dirty cap.
5.
^gg^rtsiRi ur-fi chi j dffi ifidi i Nobody drinks the salty water of the sea.
21.
4141 t1 Gold is costlier than silver.
6.
^7? 37417 hG?cii ^>41m3 ehU^ Hlft UfHdl I That rich woman never wears torn clothes.
7.
Tftrn 4441 77141 -ft rrr?4r 11 Leela wants blue saree only.
8.
dfarH
ynxfci f i
There are many ancient temples in Tamilnadu. 9.
R’4i wnti Hindi is an easy language.
10.
4nTmTUi4177im3ft7nferti The water of the Ganges is clean and holy.
11. 12.
VOCABULARY 37477 - rich
34in 14 - easy
35377 - high, tall
o<±el - sour
7377T- salty
’TfRT - deep
xfr^t *- silver
377?!* - desire
yt«U4* - language
4141* - hat
41^ - lemon
•Beil - blue
•^Idlviy - court
nfcia - holy
d^cil - first
41<*f7- yellow
Mlxfl4 - ancient
m3T - tom
44777 - ill
41^4 - food
7747 - but
hGscH*-
- broken
4cTT
- dirty
woman
7TWH %> 4 ^41 77%t 11 <7? mil % I Ramdas has a broken watch in his hand. It is a foreign watch.
■gfWrf -difficult
777377* - travel
7J3R?*- morning
4^ - apple
77137 - gold
WlRa - tasty
7fa 4T3T mrT %, <4(4>4 4t^oeei met % I Apple is a sweet fruit but lemon is sour.
7147 - body
44^7377 - clever
38
39
• Learn Hindi Through English
13. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES
SlJggfS * Learn Hindi Through English 6.
The superlative degree is also expressed sometimes by the use of *t.
In English, the adjectives undergo certain changes in the comparative and superlative degrees, like, good-better-best, bigbigger-biggest. In Hindi, there is no such change in the form. 1.
In Hindi, the comparative degree (jtHIcH-STT) is formed by putting it (than) after the person or thing with which the
■jflTfh Hylsjd % I This is the strongest of these palaces.
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
Trivikram is the tallest boy in the class.
comparison is made.
Water of the river is the best for health.
My pen is better than your pen. 3.
it %1
In the place of it some times ^t 3rt3TT or ^t ^fa^Wd is used. The degree of comparison can be modified by putting before the adjective words like 31fs^,^idl,^R,«47>f,fagl4d
4.
The superlative degree (wiTraWT) is formed by putting watt (of all) before the adjective. ehHni M'Mtt
ns«fa % I
4.
6.
Twit‘flUld %I
ihii4I
1
The Ganges is the holiest of all the rivers. 9.
When the noun compared is not mentioned, the adjective is
10. 11.
the worst man
it sr^t't 1
IfllOficE
«kddH ijldlll
From physical point of view, man is stronger than woman. THT^t 3jit$nfilfai4R% I As compared to Ram, Rahim is cleverer.
the best man the heaviest stone
ih
Prevention is better than cure.
repeated, putting it between them, to express the superlative degree.
it
Swimming is the most beneficial exercise.
Radha is the tallest of all women.
Tt ■RrSR
MQini 751
Gopal is shorter in height than Ram.
8.
TTO7 THT sftwt it vhft 11
3Tc&it 313nq4)
I
it yJTcbC’i ^HT I can do even the toughest work.
Jiyaram is the worst student.
5.
*1 iqw ^t mil
5.
7.
1? I
'11^1 it HtI tin J) % |
An intelligent foe is better than a foolish friend.
Kamala is the most beautiful girl. falMUIH
Rfl '5>R
My car runs faster than your vehicle.
This room is larger than that room.
3.
’T^tw Ui41 4tih 51
2.
irft fhClH j^ld it % |
2.
w"<s|l
12.
^t srfarsra nfeT 141 n^d 11 Compared to the donkey, the horse is stronger.
the fattest cow 40
41
• Learn Hindi Through English
StJgl0 * Learn Hindi Through English
14. ADVERBS
13. til'll ft H^'ll I Gold is a lot costlier than silver. Home-made sweet is much sweeter than the sweet prepared in shop. 15.
i%'l Mlil ^75: <Jdl xrqi^l
An adverb is a word that modifies or qualifies a verb. In other words, it indicates how a verb (action) is done. An adverb may indicate the time or place or manner or degree (amount) of action, with reference to a verb.
Blood is six times thicker than water. 16.
Some examples:
chH7sl4fenil
Time : 3TFX, Tirf, ftyl, 'STS if, Tfift, 3T^, TT,
Village life is less expensive than town life. 17.
Place :
■Sf3Tcl^T^I^3T^^3T€^f^T3T^^ft?
3TT4, 1ft^, THT, ^7, mR"), ^Pf, 3717, TTP, <41^4
Manner : Jiwich, 4t£Ri, 'dvil, tfft,
1 am an old man now. Where are my best days now?
^ff, stPiyi,
3dcl,^77, $flHi Adverbs do not undergo any change when used in a sentence. Whether a verb is in masculine or feminine, in singular or plural, the adverb qualifying it does not change. e g. ThTrft 31WT 7Tpft i? (Gomathi sings well). 37^751 islnl f? (The players play well).
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
chicn if 37T777 Tpft «Htlrtl % I It rains often in Kerala.
2.
Hldl4) 37«ftfrit^777
3.
3n'Jict>n fenjdisff 37^t T75Tiff TTHI Nowadays students do not read well.
4.
^RiIhi \fmic;i 1>
I ^7? They see films much. This is not at all good.
5.
TRT T14t TTTlfl Tift itrn I Ramesh never drinks coffee.
42
43
SU^ffS • Learn Hindi Through English
SUggS • Learn Hindi Through English
6.
M vjilrfi % I My sister goes to cinema only sometimes.
I have only headache. That too is one sided.
7.
=F>T ^rft % ? Why does that cow give less milk?
The naughty boys are ringing the bell loudly.
8.
I Go away from here quickly.
9.
^0? Pidgin % I This is perfectly all right.
10.
22. Where are you going? I am just going (for no reason).
VOCABULARY
3JT^7sTT^f | The people of North India eat potato daily.
daftl* - progress
- less
oci’iiMeb - villain
^7^- late
Horses are running fast in the ground. 12.
3^- potato
yfa - loudly
I
11.
3Tsff* - petition
I
Ramprakash gives rent late every month.
- sleep - just, thus
TfR - north fihtiMi - rent
tsitJl * - cough TjTrf - at once - slowly - to rain - headache
Our villages are making progress gradually. 14.
'5J3 qlnrfl % | This servant-maid always tells lies.
15.
4,HUI 7Td *47 Htfl 3
Due to cough, I do not get sleep throughout night. 16.
Rlci^R The squirrel runs here and there.
17.
si'jHi %? Where does Anjana stay in Delhi?
18.
tsicHHcb yihfr-gwlI In films the villain laughs loudly.
19.
TpT ept 7J7HTT3H 3Tyft fwo'l I You write an application to the officer immediately.
20.
11
i»cbd
44
45
- bell ^TR - ready Heise - naughty - completely - at all
Sg^S • Learn Hindi Through English
• Learn Hindi Through English
15. VERBAL NOUNS / GERUNDS finite In the expression, “ Seeing is believing,” seeing and believing are nouns. As they are formed from verbs, they are called verbal nouns. In Hindi, verbal noun is formed by adding HT to the root of the
/.
By seeing cinema we get headache. 8.
344314
9.
>-j3trnrfa CMI514 mwi -sffaa % I It is not proper to celebrate festivals with pomp.
As the verbal nouns end in 3TT, this 3JT will change into TJ
10.
by eating out +^-TTHTt for reading
11.
«,ci4i'fl H
12.
‘IMtfl <*>4dl *4^«4 «hl
Devraj does not know reading and writing.
'fan’ - 339 3? fvH’
for saying <*>5'4i+3jt -
37t
13.
5C«4I Q?4dl3T3%, 3tj^3fafa^T^3fa 3fa BHHI fa)4dl %l
14.
tfaTT37farm ^f^3>rlf I
in going
Murder is a sin but to kill enemies in war is heroism.
on return rfli'ii+37 - nle-) Hl
It is difficult to get such a house.
MODEL SENTENCES ^5 ^infl aa-n 3T5UT % I
-2-
Getting up early in the morning is good.
The infinitive (to + verb) also is expressed by verbal nouns.
rflrll HMdl 'dMrfil I
It is good to walk, walking is good - both should be translated as <J5tddl 3TEUT % I
Leela knows dancing. *i444<1m 3T^t 3333 % I
1.
Doing exercise is a good habit. 4.
373H7 ’’fru 3tt % i
2.
443 3lrl^'43brldl farlrflt I
33 fa *4^*3
331 333 ei^M Cbldl 'Hud f> ? Do you know how to type?
3.
By speaking truth we get success. 6.
fawnfafalrHI xll^dl ~ti I want to speak in the meeting.
Drinking coffee often is bad. 5.
I 8T3T 3>
To err is human, to forgive divine.
of coming 3THT+37T - 3TT93>T
3.
HcfK cbtdi 34144H 31ft fa I
It is not easy to ride a horse.
sound if it is followed by a case-ending (311,^,33,etc.)
2.
fa 5*4333 en 11? I
Our knowledge increases by reading newspaper.
verb. e.g.
1.
ffa fa *4I ^4S4 fa 1444^^5 5^411 % I
«Hdl % I
A man becomes famous by giving alms.
46
fa 4>H 3MUI 'BHdl I I do not know how to drive a car.
4.
31? 34 in til ns«t»i 4<j>n
31?t
i' |
That lazy boy does not want to go to school. 47
SUgg^S « Learn Hindi Through English_____________________________
__________________________ SjJj^S « Learn Hindi Through English
5.
4.
'J’T 3 cRT
"iff?
311-01
What do you want to become in the future? 6.
FIT J’-Slfl FTK7 <3Hl «MMI Mti<; chicfl % ?
iff 'q? (=Ff) 3THT I
Please do come to my house this evening 5.
3T6^^w43jnn-4fi5T^^n i
Does your sister like to cook?
Do not hesitate in doing a good deed.
-3The word, ‘for’ in expressions like for coming, for going, for reading, etc., are translated by fch’. Though is not a case
-5The case-ending is often dropped after a verbal noun if soon followed by another verb. The verbal noun retains the T* form.
ending here, it is nevertheless a case symbol. Therefore when Tfhn nff ^<s*l (4> frTT») ^TTrff if I Sita goes to see Gopal.
fcTT’ occurs, the verbal noun will end in T* sound, e.g. for going 1.
fhft «Ff
% fen’. It also means to go.
4 3ra FTt4 (nff) ouch l?l Now I go to sleep (bed).
trH’ si*i< 3JTF? if I
4 ipf M'Si’l (^jf) 3TT4 if I He comes daily to teach me.
The doctor is coming for seeing the patient (to see) 2.
n4f
Htff «h
What does not man do for filling his stomach nowdays? 3.
infill Lalitha goes for bathing in the Cauvery.
4.
VOCABULARY 3FRH* - habit
31ln
TTFTcff - mistake
ylW - surely
SJWTH* - pomp
FTP - sin
ifz - stomach
ranff - stale
WT - fill
Rmh
4 - regularly
yfflcjSr - famous
3TRTn>TFjmn4 TETif ^u c)4l
- future
- war
fhft - one who is ill
Today’s younger generation is not ready to get married at an
early age.
FHTT*- meeting
-4Verbal nouns are also used to denote order. But they are milder in tone. They sound more like an advice. It is less strong than the prohibitive FH. It is not generally used if the person addressed is older in years. 1.
«ntfl fl
2.
chcl «4f? «t rel="nofollow">IH ’hVIl I
Finish this work tomorrow. 3.
flyi Pln I Read daily regularly. 48
49
FraTF - ride
» Learn Hindi Through English________
SggiS ♦ Learn Hindi Through Englluli
16. POST - POSITIONS
- instead of
mTm - equal
m^ - after - in spite of
In English what we call preposition is understood as post position in Hindi. It indicates a relation between a noun/pronoun and another noun, pronoun or verb. e.g. a book for you, under the tree, come with me, he lives opposite this house.
fen - without
fexfe - in the middle
fem - within
fet - on account of
«iik)
case-sign
is
sometimes
omitted,
e.g.
fet
TH
-
across the river. Even though as attached to post-position have no meaning, yet they are case symbols. They will affect the previous
Inside the room -
3t^TTR - according to
31fe - beyond,ahead
34- around
3m - above, upon
ehKui - due to
mfe - through
gRT - through
- near
FTRfe - in front of
fem, Rfe<4 - except
KW - through
3fe - towards
sifted - in comparison to
isnffe - for the sake of
mmt- concerning
mr? - in the place of
fefe - like
Hit? - like, similar to
*4in - through
before (also ) W outside (also fe) ^far d.
For the sake of style or emphasis, fe may be omitted. For the same reason fen/fe/fem may precede the noun/ pronoun. e g. feug dR 3Tfer (darkness under lamp), femmfe, fe femfe
e.
fefe below, under
When 3fe comes after a number, it will take fe not fet as in fe mil 3fe, RTfe 4)di 3TR
Mgrl - before
mt - across
MODEL SENTENCES
feW - toward
mtt - near, with (to have)
1.
tffe - behind
<M'Ai«4 - instead of 50
- like
c. The following post-positions have a it
a. The following post-positions are used with
34cti=i i - besides
«hh
W - with
Opposite your house - 7JR +mr+'m+it> Mint - tfedN-i
34Mfeb - besides,moreover
ffefld - contrary to
fetm - in comparison to shield - due to
10. e.g. if+mfeipi
afe - within
- for
b. The following post-positions begin with feT
noun if it is masculine and ends in 3TT sound. (Please see Lessons 8 and 9). How they affect the pronouns has been tabulated in Lesson
Outside the big room - «TST+'t>»HI
fen* - for
- against
have cfit before them (fe 3fe towards). Very rarely it is used instead The
fe - worthy
rrram - worthy
Generally post-positions take m before them (ifc HI4). Some (Ffe).
W - outside
- at the place of
In Hindi, for, under, with, opposite, etc., are placed after the noun/pronoun. Therefore they are known as post-positions.
of
mt tt - about
i A crow is flying above the house. 51
«ll7'4,
SUggfS • Learn Hindi Through English________________________
SlJgg£s • Learn Hindi Through English
2.
ercf 3RT tat I Don’t sit under a tree during rain.
19.
3.
TTjR W X^> %I There is a factory outside this town.
20.
4.
3jf£<ebl(l qH 3JT^i? I Officer comes to the office after ten o’ clock.
5.
3Td?HT 3i«^ci i<% I Compared to Rahim, Abdul is clever.
6.
34i'd«bM TRTR 3JR?Rfa <*>l*4 <*>
7.
qRt R str? Trt Ttn i? i The child is sleeping inside the room.
Today there is a feast at my friend’s place (house).
10.
Pit'niMt R dtd (PR'il R ’’ftd) There is a garden behind the church.
wn«ft^TrtTnsT3n
All the above sentences make it clear indicators come only after a noun/pronoun in Hindi.
They go just now towards the mosque. 9.
3Ttm R qTR % qR TTmTH 1) I
%|
3mffc RRTWT 4t RTT T I Uma has not even a rupee (with her).
12.
f^^) Mjj’ii ini'll} q? % 1 Delhi is on the banks of the Yamuna river.
13.
I Narendra is going to market with his mother.
14.
3TT^ 3TSqTqq> fell’I I buy medicine for my teacher.
15.
-dlHfh
16.
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
Clean this room after the tourist leaves. qidl
Mllft eFTt I
2.
I read this novel before you read.
3.
Mother sleeps after we have all slept.
Mdai
R «tl<^ HIUI'JI wldl T I
4.
He helps others in spite of being poor.
5.
Write the essay according to the teacher’s instruction.
VOCABULARY
Joseph does not drink tea without sugar.
PRUTT - novel
H7TTRT rPT (^> WH) uidl % I Lakshmi sings like Lata.
f'lt'nmt - church
? What do you know about Akbar?
18.
5H
Pldl xIN dldl I
17.
i Kareem does not sleep before eleven o’ clock at night. 52
post-position
Hence, if in any special construction some other word precedes a post-position, that word should be converted into a noun. e.g. after Ram has spoken’ ‘After’ is the post position. It comes before the noun in English. But when translated into Hindi, ‘has spoken’ precedes ‘after’.Therefore has spoken - a verb - has to be changed into a noun, i.e. a verbal noun, i.e. «?)ci4i . The translation will be TR RT «i) n d 1 +^> qT^-TR q> it lrnJ R qTT
Ud’l Mgr) There is a tailor’s shop in front of my house.
that
Tyff - tailor * - feast qiftxTT - garden - mosque
RtSTT - crow - sugar qqi* - medicine qter - friend Rqq* - help qqf* - rain 53
• Learn Hindi Through English
Sg^S » Learn Hindi Through English
17. CONJUNCTIONS
6. 7.
7511?, 7ft Mt M HHii I It is raining, yet they go to office. T5 4>W <*Rd t, fM^Mt^TH^MTR^ft |
8.
This work is tough, still Kumar is doing it. Hyi 4sdi1ftT47^Mt-^Mt5TTM>t I
Mt£I75, ill'lld> Conjunctions are words which link or connect words, sentences or parts of a sentence, e.g. mother and child, good or bad; I came but you had left; You said that you would come; The servant will wait until you are ready. Put two and two together. Some of the important Hindi conjunctions are given below. i.
3fh, 7f2TT, T - and.
ii.
11.
I think that today is holiday. Otherwise you go to office. '*!«! Mt Mt mihiJI 3ttM it Trar it> fan’ M Rarity
12.
Whenever my uncle comes, he surely brings toys for children. M31M djl dgldl 441fa? I
9.
m, 3JSITT, cTT - or. fe - or (colloquial). TT eft... 7fT - either...or. H...H... - neither...nor. cfT is archaic, TfH ... 7R - when ... then.
iii.
10.
The more the medicine given the more the disease increased. (Remedy is worse than disease). H^fa ttffa *J$lMTnMT5ft7frMtT5Tntl Even though Rahim is elder to me in age, yet he is polite. ^7Ttri|dl^f^3mi t IT^fTftTpTT’FR '5fT3tt I
has restricted use ‘as well as’.
The use of T is becoming obsolete.
HL,
- but. Mr^d,
- but also,
besides, but, on the other hand. TH is now obsolete. iv.
$ufrn’,
3f7f:, TTt - therefore, hence, consequently.
v.
ewlf^ - because.
13.
- so that, for the purpose that. 14.
- as, because. vi.
3Hn/irf^...7ft - if...then.
- although. 7ft Mt,ft* Mt, - yet,
even so, still, 4 44 fa ... TtsnfM - though...yet.
vii.
fa>- (said) that, whether.
16.
that is, i.e. (id est) 17.
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
15.
- even
though, qMt-*Mt - the more. 3td«trdi - however, nevertheless.
18.
2.
3TF3f TJfT ^fft^ff^ I Today is Sunday. Hence the students do not go to school.
19.
3.
Mt M 141 d I 1 Jfaid ebl MI JI ,igi % I There is a tank near my house, but its water is dirty.
4.
TT^tTMt'^TTft t, ■’HTT 5«chl TUT % I This watch is of course beautiful but its price is much, fisltdllb Hd ddl 4^1 41547 | As he is my friend I do not want to vote against him.
1 do not take bath today because I am unwell. S’O^i it faf ^5 'diddi i? HTHift I Ask Harish whether he knows Hindi or not. qigd Cbfjdl 34X»I it | Mohan says that the climate is good. Mtr %fa?tMHittfaqrfr i qr^5% The thief thinks that nobody sees him. But he is a fool. 7ftt7?3JT5’ftMitranHMT7ftMqr't3M7H^77ft I In the house of the poor man there is neither table nor chair. 4<J4fa ^chldi M xlldri 47ft MtH5dMIlMfaHdllt I
MtfaTRT 755771 Tiff t I Srinivas says that he is not hungry. 3TT77T^^Mmq 3n7nt7ftTqTT777f q^Tf T7qf5t7T7E?nt ? If Winter comes, can Spring be far behind? (Shelley)
"vocabulary" TH* - age
'turn «ii»ik - black market
Mt7 - thief
Met'f'Jt? - fool
^7H* - hunger
HTf - vote
ntaq - climate 54
tttM
Even though there is no rice (available) in shops, yet it is available in the black market.
«t>itPl 41?) Mtm xuq ? Do you drink coffee or tea in the morning?
5.
mi41
- polite 55
if i
StjggS • Learn Hindi Through English
SU^S « Learn Hindi Through Engligh
18. INTERJECTIONS
19. FUTURE TENSE
An interjection is a word expressing some emotion like pain, pleasure, anger, surprise, dislike, disgust, etc. e.g. Oh, Ah, Alas!
The future tense represents an action or a state as yet to take place or to come into being. Sentences to indicate the future tense can be formed by adding appropriate suffix to the verb root. The suffix that is added will depend upon the noun: masculine-feminine, singular-plural, I person, II person and III person.
The interjection has an independent existence and has no grammatical relation with any other word in the sentence. But it may be prefixed to (placed before) a noun while addressing, e.g. Oh God! The following are the important interjections in Hindi. 1.
Surprise
2.
Applause
3.
Sorrow
- KTft ^T, 3tft, ftft, 3Tft>, 3TK,
4.
Joy
- 3ftT, 3TftT, RT^-Rft I
5.
Disgust
-ft:,
6.
Shyness
7.
Distress
-
8.
Rebuke
- RH !
9.
Sympathy
-ttr! ttr!
1^1,7^, sfs, <wi
i
krt-kri rrt
Verb root
ir
^5TT
Future suffix masculine
Future suffix feminine ftft jftft
! TRTT
I
RT7 7 RRT 1
ft Kt ?
tnft Vft
Note: 1.
All subjects in plural have the same end in masculine - tft.
2.
If 'f sound is added to masculine suffix, we get the feminine forms.
3.
If the verb root is like with future suffix.
Some interjections can be used as nouns.
1.
Subject
Why are you kicking up a row? 2.
the 3T sound at the end merges
I will read - RS+
You will write - rJR
fcHsfii) I
Women will listen - ftRTT + tftt - fetlT I 4.
(live), ft (drink) are first shortened to ft and ft and then the future tense suffixes are added as shown in the table above. (touch) is shortened to tg for future tense.
5.
56
The following three verb roots take different forms when the future tense suffixes are added. These verbs are exceptions to the rule shown in the table. 57
StJgg*S » Learn Hindi Through English
S*Jg^5 » Learn Hindi Through English
Masculine Subject
tn
?Tn ot.ot?
vfFt
pt^t
ptOT
^OT
OTt
OTP PHIUl^l 3fpOT OT^OTOT3POTT?
1)
OTiP PTTOTT % fOT 3Tnt POT 1PPT?
In which inn will you stay in Banaras?
it
pt
H
Who knows what will happen in the future? 10.
inn int
OTOT ^t OTrft vftP yshcd< TOT POT POT I Perhaps those travellers will reach here by Friday night.
11.
frpnft otot ot ? Will your father drink sherbat or milk ?
For the above verbs, the feminine forms are obtained by ending
12.
them with ’ft.
OTPft'JlAHTHHOT^ITOTOTsi’II Jfld 4IH»ft I Vani Jayaram will sing a prayer song at the meeting.
^-^ft, rffrft, OTft
13.
P)dlv4) OT^OThftOTtOT^tf^OT^^^ fiH’lJ-Tiff I
My father will never send members of the family to see cinema.
it - fft, itft, ifrft, ifrft 14.
Note:
OTOT1 OTPyi OTP fepftOTt 4^1 ^111 Being a big miser he will not give anything to anybody.
It is common practice to write 3u«td I, OTOTH, 3OTht, and so on using P. But the regular, and therefore preferable, forms are those with tr andT’-34n'OT, OT^OT, 3JT^t, I
Will Mohan get any prize in the annual day function?
MODEL SENTENCES 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
16.
^OTT TJOT POTOTTPTJTOTT^OT 3Thfpp OTuh I
17.
OTOT-OTOTP T^OT 3ftr
Subhash will finish this work in an hour and then he will take rest.
i it otot i it <4*111 I too shall learn Hindi from tomorrow.
When will the post office open and at what time it will close?
3TF5T Jj>ll*4ehl pp OTTPPt^*t I (OT is the usage.) This evening we shall listen to the news in the radio.
18.
OTrf ■‘i'1-Hrft I Tomorrow morning Gomati will go to her father-in-law’s house.
19.
«iqi M^'fl OTfifehOTnftpt I Sushma will always wear simple dress because she is poor.
AftOTinT fcT^OTP <s»'iuf4n I My mother will make (prepare) tea for us all. 58
3ft? OTTOT OTH 3 OTOT TpWt I
exchange. 20. I
That wicked fellow will not listen to anybody’s advice. He will repent in the future. 7.
OTP OTP ot? 3
The villagers will sell jaggery in the town and will buy sugar in
^lOT^tOTtOT^ftpff i OTiA*l fchtil iit «ni5 4ffl ^-hii 3^7
nsi^OTtp 'rfitbii 3^TP^P pAui? Who will win in this war and who will suffer defeat?
We shall never forget Mrs. Indira Gandhi. 6.
OTiftOT?
dtpit
3T^ft dlRpd OTT^cf OTTOT I
The servant will bring coconut oil from the shop just now. 21.
ttiitjsu")POT^POTc'i'iJhl I The labourers will return from the factory after six o’clock.
22.
TftOT^T HIH $*OTM I Geeta will sit (for) the examination this year. 59
gUgflrS » Learn Hindi Through English
SUg^S * Learn Hindi Through English
20. FUTURE SUBJUNCTIVE
VOCABULARY - examination
- miser
U? - jaggery M»dHi - repent
47T - oil
W' labourer
*n4t - traveller
- dress
- father-in-law’s house
HXToZI uRlWIf^ The subjunctive indicates how to express a purpose, condition, wish, permission, advice, order, expectation, doubt and guess pertaining to future time. It is a form of verb which represents the action not as a reality but as a wish, hope, possibility, etc. To construct a sentence in future subjunctive, all the rules concerning future tense (given in the previous lesson) are to be followed except that the last letter of the verb is to be omitted. Future tense - 3iK'ui 1 4
I
Future subjunctive - T? 3TH’, 4 ^TT3> (If he will come, If I go) To express purpose, the future subjunctive is preceded by f^!7T4, f47T4 or dif* Examples 1.
tjesfl 774 I May God keep you happy! (hope, wish)
2.
4 xiigrti 4tt sTtet «l4 I wish that my son turns out to be a doctor, (wish)
3.
HfeHTt '*>5!
4.
c<5 T
4 yPHq>)
? Shall I go to see film this evening?
(permission) !>.
7^7 TTvl 7sTT3ft ^7774
7^t I Eat fresh
fruits daily so that you will remain healthy, (purpose) (>. TTT^ 37T57 7T77 efft VFft ^Jt4 I Perhaps it may rain this night, (possibility)
60
/.
3HT77ftrTT '3TTT* eft77?f^rTR' cilei I If Sita happens to go to library, let her return this book, (condition)
8.
% 7=57 4 m«j4 ? How shall I sing when my voice is not sweet? (doubt, interrogation)
9.
xn% 7517 5773ft xnit 4 57737, 4t4f 4t ^t?t % 1 Whether you go or I go, both are the same. 61
______ SUgg> » Learn Hindi Through EtigHnll
SU^S » Learn Hindi Through English
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
2. 3.
3TH7f^snft 4fcr-qTrr TTift^^TT I
3i< cjh
fit an
31 ra '4>IHsll4 4 ^ddlH t, ^rrflT^3T^H'3nii I
19.
ddd
20.
i Let God make this auspicious day come again and again. Many happy returns of the daiy.
21.
3TTT^t^-?T^T31l4dM^ 3Thu^^lHKt I Let this tour of yours be pleasant and safe. eni
H enf I
UHiutftif uniu41H3jnr i May you go safely, may you return safely.
23.
^Hdl ? Shall I compare thee to a summer’s day? (Shakespeare)
- use
12. 'd«i den if hih H Jjenit> ehl^ ch*<4 3T
62
chlMdlcfi - success
Tpff* - summer
rJHdl* - comparison
Tjtrf - at once, immediately
iftar?* - alms
ynfdiH - possible - old man
■f^WT* - widow i
It is not possible that I’ll forget you. My heart remains here1 wherever I may live.
^4 1
VOCABULARY
Let no student use cell phone in the class-room.
13.
i *inaT^t3
22.
3tm 4)41 ehi <jNr4 4leH h
^STT if eh)^
cbmdicO
Let success be with you! Let success kiss your feet.
Wish you both a prosperous wedded life for ever.
11.
^??i<2U ^'spn ? Let that fellow live or die, what do I care?
En’■<,«{) if OTT* I
Let some one like you enter my life.
10.
18.
tA Ri<«snTT^ i Let every student read Gandhiji’s autobiography. 3TTQ 4 t-tl
i
I
Today there is strike in the factory, let no labourer go inside.
9.
'5ft
If you (will) recommend, that young woman will get job.
8.
16.
17.
If the beggar will beg then only give money.
7.
3TT?T, 3tn41 ITT^^fiT frnr 3Tp4 siflcH 'SET I Come on, let us sacrifice our life for the sake of our motherland.
|3ff Mil Hlccm ? How shall we console those widows?
6.
15. ?
Whether the servant can go home now or stay for some time
5.
^THrT^t '4IU I Let the problems of India vanish soon.
? May I do this work at once?
4.
14.
HUUUI* - problem
Wrllhrfi* - welfare, protection - recommendation
UIccHT* - consolation
63
• Learn Hindi Through English
21.
SUj^S » Learn Hindi Through English
PAST TENSE BE’ VERB
/ TTmf^TtRRf^^ aft.aRTRR^faft I
‘gfar fczn
Radha was at the temple the whole day. She was not at home.
Singular
Mas
Fem
Plural
I was
Wan
Waft
We were
^nft
■^naff
You were
$*ft
gnaft
You were
3TTR ft
3KR aft
He,She,It
R?an
R^aft
They
Wat
Waff
That, This
n?an
-R?aft
ThosX
ftft
Waff
1
These/
was
Mas
Fem
W) lift5, 3u<;,ft an I
H ft
I was a poor man in the beginning. ')
aft | The tea was cold and so it was tasteless.
10.
RTrT an, WR 3tM 'Rf? 4!mR % I Ramprakash was all right yesterday, but today he is ill.
1 1.
were /
ft> TRRT3H dinft ft Rftn-Rftn ft ? During the earthquake who were there in the those rooms?
Note: 1.
All feminine singular verbs end in aft
2.
All masculine plural verbs end in ft.
3.
All feminine plural verbs end in aff.
12.
f4d 1-41 4>rl 3RRrnHRW8t ? <*UI
d<4)dd 4Udtft aft?
Why was your father in the hospital yesterday? Was his health not good? 1 3. chn 41m?S< iHdii «pSTR ®TT 3Tftft ft I
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
Yesterday noon he had fever and he was restless.
RRTgR^T^W^RRftft ?
14. snaft^RT^nftR^nfftaft i
Were you at the office at ten o’ clock? 2.
There was calm after the storm everywhere.
RirT TTTRRtt IRTHRW ft |
15.
We all were at the harbour yesterday evening. 3.
3nR
16.
Where were you in Mumbai last year? ft RRTT ’STRi-XR W ft |
5.
RKR’TftftRRftftaft |
jideil W4aucft ft W4 3FJ
"vocabulary"
They were at the post-office day before yesterday noon. aft I
- finger ring
3jfcft* - storm
RTrft* - finger
Igjft* - holiday
d41
TT7TRR - administration
TRTR RRH fttWRTI^Rfftft I
44 dH - tasteless, vapid
ai
Dr. Rajendra Prasad was the first President of India.
WftT - restless, agitated
Yesterday was Gandhiji’s birthday. So it was holiday for the school. 6.
3Tfira>Tft-gnRM
That IAS officer was younger than all of us.
lj<3^ RTSH ?
4.
^RHcftd
- earthquake
TTTfa* - peace, calm 64
65
* Learn Hindi Through English
22.
12^5
PAST IMPERFECT TENSE
* Learn Hindi Through English
8.
ejqfMMt-nfrratMTjTTaian i The beggar was wandering in the lanes even in rain.
This is a peculiar construction, not easily translatable. It is] neither simple or definite past (e.g. went), nor a continuous action ini the past (was going), nor a habit in the full sense (used to go). It is] somewhat mild in indicating a habit in the past or a repeated past] action.
9.
R^f^Mta3rrfksn7rasKnMTraitt^R?nsn i
A sentence in this tense is formed by adding HT/ft/tft to the root of the verb according to the gender and number of the subject as in Lesson 4 and then adding the appropriate past tense symbol
11.
«n/M/sft/sff as shown in the previous lesson, e g. RTrTT 8TT, RTft st,
12.
3Pjyf ^dcPTcH (?)
When Vinod was rich, he used to move about in a car. 10.
That bachelor used to hate women before marriage. ^^wMtMnfas^sFt^ttjg^ntst i We used to get up at five o’ clock itself during our youth. R7 TTRT
'SBTrft sft I
Mother-in-law used to quarrel with daughter-in-law for each and everything.
sft, 'nidi sft.
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
?iit t^uil «h
13.
IN
3d <*>««< MxiiH RTOTR? gejiHri «htc) ft | Akbar was ruling (ruled) India for fifty years.
That wrestler was doing (used to do) exercise daily. 14. 2.. | Before becoming a minister, he was living (used to live) in a hut.
3RR vftt Rinft ft RRRRR
15. TTfMtit (Mi)
tflrtHiH gldca ft taMI <siidi sn I
Before marriage, Sitaram used to take meals in hotel. When we were living in South India, we were eating (used tc eat) rice only. 4.
TFftMM
Rift sftHTT Mt RTR ft I
yMcfl Mi ehRUi R tR Mt
18.
ft RFT rlrl ft I
7.
ftR^ftcHsFRiftsn I TRI ft sn I Previously I was in Lucknow. At that time I was learning Urdu dictdl ftRift) <^cim R’HitdMftn hhi ft I The doctor was prohibiting the patients from smoking. 66
ft^ra-gRRMtefift i My relatives used to meet me often when we were neighbours. 13^M^rnn^i Before my marriage my mother used to cook food. Now I prepare it.
Due to threat, shop keepers took part in the strike unwillingly 6.
ft ft^ «hi? ^<smi SJT I I used to see cinema every week during childhood.
17.
When there was no scarcity of water, people were taking batt twice. 5.
16.
19.
RRTHT^ftftftifMn’Rcntftrft sft | 3TRR?MtfMnn cftcft t I Kamala was taking (drinking) medicine for cough. Now she takes tablets.
67
• Learn Hindi Through English
SURgfS » Learn Hindi Through English 20.
(clinch g^^llftlft 3TTtn?n I
23.
et>^di 2ir(^>aHft>'’TRrV^t
PAST CONTINUOUS TENSE 3njyf (?)
ft) I This clerk always used to come late. On enquiry, he used to say that he had no watch. Note: A special form of the habitual past is obtained by omitting
zn-ft-ft)-ftf It is used in narrating a repeated act of the past. e.g. TOT ’ftftl Tift) 1ft ^ift aftl 1TTH
I We would (used to)
go there every morning and return in the evening.
The past continuous tense indicates an action that was going on in the past at a particular time. The completion of that action, however, is not known for sure. Sentences in past continuous tense are formed by adding T^TX%-Tift to the root of the verb (see Lesson no:5, present continous tense ) according to the gender and number of the subject and then by adding the appropriate past tense indicator 2IT-ft-ftt-ft) as shown in Lesson no.21. e.g. 3TTT?T 8TT, ft, 3JT7tft ft), 3JTTift ft).
VOCABULARY (jhea* - scarcity
^HT* - hatred
'fldiJl* - youth - threat MCCjciM - wrestler
1.
ft vTrTT ftf|?|ch<l J|mi
2.
I was listening to Lata Mangeshkar’s song. ^^cHHftcRTTTsTft^Tt ft ?
- hut, cottage
vftft) - neighbour
- clerk
S’fe*1'1* " rule
8JT I
What were buying in the shop?
RHT prohibit
- relative
RHT? - week
MODEL SENTENCES
3.
^n^ict>< tra^ftKHT^T an ? Why was Harishankar laughing at that time?
4.
ft)cbftftifrniirg; 311^^4 I Madhav was filling up an application form for job (employment).
5.
ft) i Cool breeze was blowing slowly (gently).
6.
«rftft
ttrt
tkt sit
i
It was raining continuously from seven o’clock yesterday. 7.
Afftni^wr^TnT^fttrgiTT^nftftftnT^t ft) i
8.
Urmila was speaking at a meeting yesterday evening. Traftjft ft Heft TR’3RTjft ft) | The boat was crossing the river fast.
9.
ftf^sft'gftTzrRft^TTfft ft) I Mother was kissing the child with love. 10. I The cow was grazing the grass along with the calf. 11. IpT Tra Lip ft) ft> ft >*fti(* 1RT sftfr ft I We were all sleeping soundly because we were very tired.
68
69
gggjs • Learn Hindi Through English 12.
Sgg’5 • Learn Hindi Through English
3TTqVltf^f xfll^ftlt ?
24.
PAST INDEFINITE TENSE
Why were you crying so loudly? 13.
JilHW JjTraTcT
eptlHf VI (Ulftim) ffv (^) it I An action mentioned as done in the past without any definite reference to the time or its condition is said to be in past indefinite lense, e.g. I came, I saw, I conquered (veni, vidi, vici, - Julius Caesar)
Dogs were barking throughout the night. 14.
33lt I Aero planes were flying in the sky.
15.
Wf
3JTVT, flVT, 'jAoi. To form the simple past tense. VI
(a)
Farmers were sowing the seeds after the rains. 16.
form masculine singular, and change it into I* for masculine
if vtti wtTift iff I
plural. In feminine singular it becomes'f and in pluralf (frioi,
Girls were making noise in the class. 17.
19.
If the verb root ends in 3IT/3Tt, VT is added (3TTVT, iftVT) which becomes if in masculine plural iff in feminine singular and iff in
WH chiRf m-i ifvfiit VR VHTit st I
avoided using only the vowel form. Hence 3TT^,3nf,3TTf are
Narain Karthikeyan was driving the sports car fast.
preferred instead of 3TTV, 3Jirft,3JT?ft
feminine plural. But where the use of VT is optional, it may be
I Children were playing ball in the playground.
21.
7^ ^ftiH VIJvftVVift ft I In the shade of a banyan tree an old woman was selling fish. Ad Ultl fcfixi it I
The bullocks were pulling the cart. 23.
(b)
? To whom were you writing the letter?
20.
22.
ftnt, fcRsft, ftnff)
i Sudhir was working in the museum last year.
18.
If the root of the verb ends in silent 3T, lengthen it to 3TT to
V?
flHeETTMlt ®t I
That philosopher was thinking for a long time. 24.
I Trees and plants were drowning in the flood.
(c)
Root ending in 37 first shortens its vowel. ^-^3JT. Root ending in f first becomes ift-favT, ft-ftvT
vs
VST
vt
flsT lit
flVT HTVT
Tth’
it
ftVT
ih?
- to kiss
- philosopher VTV* - boat VWT - calf
35T - cool -AehA* - job
W? - banyan tree VT?* - flood
KVT* - wind 70
Singular
Plural
vft
vff
^isfr
flsff
frf
The following verbs are exceptions to the above rules and their past tense is formed as follows: Feminine
Masculine
3TVTW VI - museum 3TT^T - application VRT* - grass tj
Plural
Verb root
"vocabulary" 4ni - to graze
Feminine
Masculine Singular
Verb root
Singular
it
fciMi ftvr
3 W ft VT
Plural
ffv. 1^
If
wt
71
Singular
Plural
vft
Iff
' ft ft it ”t
ft ft
Sg^S « Learn Hindi Through English
SUgj^S » Learn Hindi Through English
At this juncture, we are expected to know that verbs are of two kinds - transitive and intransitive. A transitive verb has certainly an object, e.g. She wrote a letter. Here ‘wrote’ is the transitive verb because it has ‘letter’ as its object. However, the object may be understood sometimes and not expressed openly, e.g. 1 ate. Herej ‘ate’ is a transitive verb even though the object has not been stated.: I must have eaten something. That is enough explanation.
7.
qq 3JF5T dtH mjsw, ^1144 ehM 3m>
8.
jhiRin cti
9.
i The servant brought four eggs from the shop.
10.
<14I Rama lived in the forest for 14 years. After that he returned to Ayodhya.
11.
3TTqTU ? Where did you stay in Kolkata during holidays?
12.
wttM
13.
Mggl qfi h<4 i M Mt 4H<*>1 ni They did not forget me. I also did not forget them.
14.
<41 ■h 41^ •*<{) M I The travellers took bath in the Yamuna river behind the Taj
On the other hand, the intransitive verb does not admit of an object, e.g. He died suddenly. An object is a person or a thing that is affected by the action of the verb. To find out whether there is an object, we should put the question what/who to the verb.e.g. Saw - saw what, saw whom. There will be answer, expressed or understood. Hence ‘saw’ is a transitive verb. Died-died what, died whom. There cannot be any answer. Hence ‘died’ is an intransitive verb. In the present lesson, we shall have only intransitive verbs in the model sentences. Sentences in the past tense with transitive verbs are constructed in a different manner. This will be explained in the next lesson.
15.
1.
3TF5T <*>f>1 Mt Pl <41 I Today cardamom was not available anywhere.
2.
ar-anTO M Ml <41 Pl <*><41 i Suddenly the bullet emerged from the gun.
3.
i Because of headache I slept only four hours yesterday night.
4.
6.
c-ini
<41
Mahal.
MODEL SENTENCES
5.
41<m 3<»>m
I
What happened to mother? Why was she crying? 16.
72
ddfeqiit(dq^)fMvfti
4)<*>0M^3*^i 4
In that job I got a good pay.
4
The train stopped just for a minute. Therefore I got down quickly (in haste) <J>T? When did you return from abroad? <*>
MI
17.
4>(tai<4 1 Some peddlers sat under the tree.
18.
^t^^R 3JnTftT^vf7^vn I The school opened only today after the holidays.
VOCABULARY $ <*11 <4 Ml* - cardamom
'■Hurt - forest
4> (tan'll - peddler
pay, salary
4* - rifle, gun
- suddenly 73
• Learn Hindi Through English
25.
Learn Hindi Through English
PAST INDEFINITE TENSE
Here jafHl is in masculine singular, not because the subject, Ram, is masculine singular but because the object, a horse, is masculine singular.
TRANSITIVE VERBS TTFTFZT
f^RPT
As mentioned in the previous lesson, a verb is called transitive only if it has an object, whether expressed or implicit. In other words, the object is the most important aspect in a sentence having a transitive verb. Therefore the verb will be in masculine or feminine gender and in singular or plural number according to the object in such sentences.
2.
TTPTT I The object, two horses,is masculine plural. So we have the verb 73 (I J1
3.
I'M I Though the subject is masculine, the object is in feminine singular and hence the verb is formed according to it.
4.
This rule is applicable only in the following four tenses:
TnT'4'TT
1.
Past Indefinite - e.g. I ate.
verb iaOdl I
2.
Present Perfect - e.g. I have eaten.
3.
Past Perfect - e.g. I had eaten
4.
Past Doubtful - e.g. I might have eaten.
(1)
5.
TTtrTTft T’Pifrudl I Though the subject is feminine, the verb is in masculine singular because of the masculine singular object, one letter.
If a sentence falls under one of the above four tenses and if there is an object (mentioned or understood), then the following steps become necessary. This procedure is known as ‘ne’ rule.
6.
tflai 3TPTon* I The object, two mangoes, is in masculine plural. So we have
i)
Add to the subject. is the symbol of the first case, (see Lesson 8 ).
7.
ii)
Put the verb in masculine/feminine gender and singular/plural number according to the object.
iii)
If the object is not mentioned or if it is followed by then the verb will always be in masculine singular.
iv)
The following verbs, though transitive, are exceptions. That is, they will be formed according to the subject: The
auxiliary
verbs
(can),
1.
i
74
TTP ft tflfli Mil I Here the object is Sita (feminine singular). Yet the verb is in masculine singular because the object is followed by ^ft
8.
KPH | The object has not been mentioned. It may be mango (masculine) or roti (feminine). The number or quantity too is not known. It may be one mango/one roti or it may be more. As the object has not been mentioned, the verb remains in masculine singular. (2)
*£35
(finish) and rPT (begin) also do not come under this rule, but will be formed according to the subject. Examples
the verb 73TT’ though the subject is a female.
In the case of exceptions — cTT,^trT,^rI,fpH the verb will be in its normal form, i.e., according to the subject. 1.
dldRpft TTT^ I The servant maid brought vegetables.
2.
fldl4)
«WI 31^1 ? What did the leader say in the meeting?
75
3L<S » Learn Hindi Through English Sgg^S « Learn Hindi Through English 7. 3.
TThftjft 441 ?J3
4.
THT
5.
? Why did Gandhiji not utter a lie?
HH ■’RTTI Ram forgot that story.
8.
ftftqpftftgmfl «hzft^>fenjKriiiii.fl fidrfP i My wife bought Japanese toys for our daughter.
9.
3mft7ftrTfti^Hftt7TTftfttftf?
TTI^«I Tt 1J4f! I We met the minister this morning
(3) When more than one noun is the subject of a transitive verb in the past tense, is added only to the last noun. TTR,
How many cows did you see in the field? 10.
tlrlcd «*>) I Ram, Krishna and Gopal made
the mistake.
11.
12.
^ngnft3Hsr^Rft^i3F?fl«i
?
Did you read that strange advertisement in the newspaper?
exhibition yesterday. 13.
(4)
14.
1 rift, Tuftft
rTST (They fought the case). Both are correct, wi TPTjn? (Did you understand?) Both are correct.
'^TTfftn’ftft
I
^n^fttftft-^ft7T^<M'f)ift^5'4dift«TFTfftnn I All political parties, small and big, participated in the election.
<*4i <14-1 (He chattered ),
3TT5T
Today is new moon day. Hence I did not shave.
In the case of some verbs, ft is sometimes used and sometimes omitted. Both usages are permitted. ft
15.
ftsni mRcikftft^rftft Rl ft>ffth 3jft^ chltjisift <si)rl I The Birla family opened (started) many industries for the
TTtft cfu ^JT (He talked a lot of nonsense). Both are O.K.
progress of the country.
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
3ft -TlchO ft> frH’ftft I I sent many applications for job.
2.
^41^1
4^11 ^>40 MI4I I
16.
?
cfftftftftftt^TT ^IPId fft^TT 3^734^1 ITTHI I People welcomed the minister and garlanded him.
17.
41ft cfit ft l
That traveller brought a costly camera from Singapore. 18.
I She did not show her new cycle to anybody.
Why did you insult me? 4.
TTT§uc4>Hft 3Tfi
5.
ft ftlft 4iH I>' I Abdullah ate five bananas day before yesterday.
6.
gft^HiftRftanftTmnTftft^fft^n I Kanchana passed the examination in first class.
to all the pronouns. 3ft, 3ftl 3Tft 4wT MdVf'Tl ^^1 I, you and he saw the
Tlt^pftTTftftt^^RftftjfftTiiblRiyi^t I The Government tried to remove poverty.
But if the subjects are pronouns (I,You, etc.), then is added
3.
xiW4ftfaspiral i
The watchman woke me up at five o’clock.
?
19.
gnft sUcHfechd
441 eh^ZsTtf^TT?
Where did you place the postal stamp? Did you lose it somewhere? 20.
ftftg^Hft3T4ftg4ftt Rhdl^ftftf | 1 sold my old books in the shop.
Where did you buy this mirror? 76
77
SUg^S » Learn Hindi Through English
Siggfe • Learn Hindi Through English_______________________ 21.
26. PRESENT PERFECT TENSE
Rd^rf^TT I The Kauravas fought with the Pandavas for 18 days.
22.
(dldjdd)f^n I
The present perfect tense is, in fact, a tense of the past. It
The secretary signed the order.
represents a completed act, the effect of which is still present. It
23.
brings a past act into relation with the present. In other words, it
rft |
denotes an action concluded recently.e.g. I have eaten. ‘Eaten’ shows
That ascetic drank neither coffee nor tea. 24.
cHI 4>gl
that the action was over in the past. ‘Have’ indicates that it is recent
cH|| dTitf^n ?
What did the shopkeeper tell you and what reply did you give?
VOCABULARY 3F?fter - strange
3i i^m i - mirror
chrii - banana
- poverty
- difficult *fTT5T- election
past. So we have to use both past tense and present tense symbols. 1.
Write the sentence in the past indefinite tense, (see Lesson 24)
2.
Add present tense symbols
3.
‘I according to the subject.
If the verb is transitive, then it will be according to the object.(see Lesson 25)
■cilcfldH - watchman, guard
si Mi ftehe - postal stamp
TH - party, group qwiian - signature
M^ii -
Him* - garland Hciim -
question
- advertisement TRTT8R - signature
costly
4.
Then add or according to the number of the object.
5. - secretary
will be added to subject.
Examples 1.
■dipiql 3TRT%| (The servant has come). 3JRTT is past tense and % is present tense. Hence it is present perfect tense. We use t because it stands for 3rd person.
2.
Tf(
I
have
never
gone
there).
7nn
is
past
tense, It is present tense. is used because the subject is . 3.
n<*> et>5i4l PusDi? (Ram has written a story). This sentence has transitive verb ‘write’. Hence the verb will be according to the object et>gi41 which is feminine singular. So the sentence ends in fcHtdl % I
4.
rTR 3JnT73Tt’i I (Usha has eaten four mangoes). Usha is feminine singular. But the verb is in masculine plural. It is because eat is a transitive verb and the object RTt 3TTR is masculine plural.
5.
TTEJ RTT % ( He has read ). The verb is in masculine singular because the object has not been mentioned.
78
79
SURgS « Learn Hindi Through English
SUj^S * Learn Hindi Through English
6.
8.
7t^^> 3T«ft-3nft ■wi’M1I After crying much, the child has just now slept.
9.
3n?i)et> «i!+d< '^"’TfTT f*wc Th cilil % I
yml cKT M
7.
In the case of verbs to the subject as they are exceptions.
the verb will be according
Ashok has returned from office just five minutes back. 10.
Note:
Snuetu *75 3Tnt tft filed I % I Your letter has become available (has reached) only today.
In referring to historical facts, it is customary to use present perfect tense instead of simple past tense. 1.
TFT 'jvic'I 4 xAqg TTTrT7^ f I Ram has lived in the forest for 14 years.
2.
^1 Mai
(Transitive verbs) (Verb according to object) 1.
I Columbus has discovered
I have heard Nehru’s speech.
America.
MODEL
SENTENCES
(intransitive
verbs)
(verb
according
to
2.
2.
3.
i I have come here many times.
'5*71
iach i % 7
Have you seen the play Harishchandra?
subject) 1.
CM X||C(U| 7JHT % I
377
37ciHTfl 3«sfl 1? I
That writer has kept a lot of books in the cupboard.
^TT rJH T7 ? Have you ever flown in an aeroplane?
4.
3Tfi| cd)Jil it
I
The majority of people have not read the Ramayana after childhood.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
^5 nflyt ^7 «l<4< I That patient has slept for a long time.
5.
'37T 3<
6.
I Razia has spoken in Hindi in the meeting.
7.
7^ 3^7 I The guest has brought apples and guavas.
8.
TyT? h^d^n trg, tHH it 1? I The bridegroom’s relatives have stayed in an inn.
*7735^7^1 I On my child’s birthday my friends have sent gifts. 37«TTq^;^T^^T7^7rr7^iTTnt i The teacher has hit me once severely. s7
fem ci i<s1 7njit ff I
The Birla family has given (donated) lakhs of rupees for temples. 9.
h#hy
(14111
Krishnakumar has bought a new motor cycle. 80
81
Stag's » Learn Hindi Through English
SggS • Learn Hindi Through English 10.
27.
■’fhr 4)TpTT% i
PAST PERFECT TENSE
We have heard this song earlier also.
tjyf 3JrR8TcT
hi41
11.
i
The past perfect tense indicates the form of the verb that
My grandmother has not eaten anything during the fast. 12.
expresses an action completed before a particular point in the past. It is formed in English with ‘had’ and the past participle (like ‘gone’).
i
The stress is on completion of an act, once for all, and it need not
Anita has driven her car herself. 13.
3J^7T3i 3TTR '3KT
necessarily be connected with remote past.
Hlft fWJT 1? I
In every way, the past perfect resembles the present perfect
Till now I have not drunk (tasted) pomegranate juice. 14.
except in the final (‘be’) verb. That is, instead of
%I The labourers have made (built) this long road.
15.
Present Perfect = past + present
I
Past Perfect = past + past
Every person has written at least one poem during youth. 16.
vftt i My father has taken leave for two weeks to go on pilgrimage.
VOCABULARY
Therefore the past perfect tense is formed by adding to the past
tense
?n,4,4t,4f
according
to
the
subject,
if
the
verb
is
intransitive. If the verb is transitive (having object), then the verb will be
- guava
3FTH - pomegranate
the past
tense forms ®TT,4,41,41 will be used. In other words:
formed according to the gender and number of the object. 4 will be 14 I * - pilgrimage
- gift <jy?i - bridegroom
added to the subject. TTI, 4tvT, far! are exceptions.
TFft* - grandmother (mother’s mother)
MODEL
- gift, award
«J4Hi - to save
subject)
4NU| - lecture, speech
oyfrt> - person
1.
TH - fast,vow
4
SENTENCES
(intransitive
verbs)
(verb
according
4TTT 44*4 K4 mi<41 an I
I had brought five Hindi novels from the library. 2.
TTtr’ 4 I Yesterday you had slept soon (early).
3.
TTKt eh^4)< TTZt4TpftTTTT TT I It had rained in Kashmir valley the day before yesterday.
4.
MOetKl (mom IS I) Tfft 4 I The President had stayed in Hyderabad for a fortnight.
82
83
to
Sgg(S • Learn Hindi Through English 5.
__________________________ SlJg^S » Learn Hindi Through English
Medi efit <nsl 47744 R<*>cfl ®ft I
7.
The Patna train had started at four o’ clock. 6.
Trf^ran^hrrarft4>thtt4?t an? eft i
8.
Radhika had come here during Deepavali time. 7.
(mwv)
$ddHfttfTIT P'lt'JiiMt 47t4T ®ft I
9.
47ftft47^hMdRft 3tW) fe>7n 44 47374 ft^n an i
10.
377 ft
On demand, the shopkeeper had sent a fine variety of rice.
TT^ft^ft m!g< ftft?T jpj & |
11.
dltMI'il qlngt 44t CIIMM Hlft 3TT? ?ft I
4T I
ftftpft
*1 <7l$nr4>i
The bank had called computer literate youngmen for interview.
The servant maid had not returned till noon. 10.
31 jcnq
That scholar had translated the Rig veda.
Gandhiji had been born in Porbander. 9.
tf.3ftftg^7ft4fft77ft^t^4fftftjfftn’7i4ftfft747 4T i Dr. Ambedkar had struggled for the progress of the dalits.
My mother had gone to the church last Sunday. 8.
ftl^U7<41ilft ft 477447 37lshMU| 1^47 47 I
Mohammed Ghouri had invaded India.
12.
447 3774 3TT4 ■g4? 474 4Tftr ft 4?tt’ft ?
?4ft
4ft c(^i>ft7ftt eft |
We had seen a variety of things in the exhibition.
Had you taken bath (bathed) in hot water this morning? 13.
ftft37Mdl H4sh
447 47,^77^ 37^47437 477757^ I
I had not studied my lesson. So the teacher became angry.
Transitive verbs (verbs according to object) 1.
14.
We had listened to this song again and again on the radio.
ftft4?niii mTciftift^ftiaft^sft I I had bought this cow in the village fair.
2.
7J4ft 44 ft
15.
iJ-flM
16.
?4ft ift47fft4f ft ft! fftt4 ^^4 ft 474 fftT47 37 I
3rRicbi(l it? snft 47 44777ftft■gia
17.
away.
4T7?3^rr4 4ft ft i 18.
My brother had read all the twelve novels of Premchand. 5.
377 4^7437434? ft 7ftft47H^fteftt 447747 I barked. ftfr
disappeared. 19.
^fftT77 ft 7733)71^43737 37 I
20.
ftt?4 ft 37?ft3; 377^1(1 fayNI 4T I
The police had caught all the thieves.
»qftfftqft i
My father had given me fifty rupees for pocket expenses.
ftftfftdl41ft37T37ft^4ft77ftft | ft 77743 ?t4Ti I My father had put (kept) money in the table drawer. It
4<5I I
That mischievous boy had awakened the sleeping dog. So it 6.
3ftr’ft3t^7 47fttf447 37 I 43 4? T? 447 I The crow had drunk the water of the pitcher. Then it flew
once. ftft^ft
34 ^IlTH 47 I
Our soldiers too had taken part in the world war.
<sTim stt i
When the officer entered, the peon had opened the door at 4.
ft 477447 did 7ft
The Mogul rulers ruled over India for 331 years.
47ft feKsH eft |
You had written useless things in the letter. 3.
?4ftftQ
Mohan had taught maths to Ashok. 84
85
SUggfS » Learn Hindi Through English
StJt^S « Learn Hindi Through English 21.
28.
I
DOUBTFUL PRESENT TENSE
The farmers had sown seeds in the fields.
dQiJf dcfnioi
22. The Governor had hoisted the flag. 23.
I The washerman had not washed the clothes properly.
24.
I The child had thrown away all the toys.
25.
chilxlirtdlI The employees had shown black flags against the minister.
This tense is used to indicate the doubtful nature of an action. That is, we are not sure whether an action is taking place at the time of speaking, e.g. may be writing, may be cooking. Only in the future, as we enquire, we come to know whether the action (e.g. writing) is really taking place. So this tense is formed by the combination of present indefinite tense + ‘be’ verb of future. This ‘be’ verb in future, i.e. 1ft takes the following forms ^TT, ^tft, ift^t, iffaft, ifht, iffrft according to the subject. ‘May be going’ will take the following forms.________________________________________________ Masculine Feminine ■ft srfldl l^n 1
VOCABULARY -translation
lft*t 1
3tisftHui - attack, invasion 34^141 - novel
eh4-Mi(l - employee
chicii - black
fsKTU* - kind, variety
13Rf - expenditure
^T3T - pot, pitcher
tinft* - valley
- pocket MtgciKi - fortnight - throw
^TST - flag
- table drawer
KtHT - to be bom Mil'll - hoist (flag) ijHT - fair
Hmf - stuggle
■git 3TH7
jnai 5Y111 if,
'tffft 1
T?
|
£
'Jllrfi 6^0 1 3TN
1
As we add ‘ing’ to the verb ( he may be reading), we may also use the continuous form. This form has been explained in Lesson 5. So we may translate ‘may be doing’ in two ways. i)
using present indefinite form - i ifhTT (masculine), <*>
ii)
using present continuous tense - ITT TW (masculine), UftffWt (feminine)
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
hI^'I
'iiiai gbii I
2.
Mohan may be going to office. TT ■gftTFT ifVt I
3.
That multi-millionaire may be giving alms to poor people. ffrft it | felflqai iftm I
4.
The patient may be buying medicine from the dispensary. VrT itTTTFT 3TTifhTT I
5.
himi
Goods may be coming by train. sidlrfi Ethfl I
Maya may be drawing a picture. 86
1
87
SUgl^S « Learn Hindi Through English
Sgf^S • Learn Hindi Through English 6.
29.
cSt iffajff eRTKcT SritH’Tl (ntiai ih’TT I
DOUBTFUL PAST TENSE
Kerosene may be easily available in the ration shop. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.
14. 15. 16. 17. 18.
^TTnf^TT KhTT I Amarchand may be selling silk sarees. PiiK>TTT3T rh'H I The church bell may be ringing (tolling). sjra ^in if*
STrffsTft - last
(would) have come for the marriage. In a way it indicates presumption or inferred certainty. In this lesson also we have to check whether the verb is intransitive or transitive. We have first to form the past tense (see Lesson 24). Then add ihn, ihft, KFT, KPfr, Kbf, Khft as shown in the previous lesson according to the subject, if the verb is intransitive. But if the verb is transitive, it will be formed according to the object. Then to indicate doubt, we have to add KfrTT, according to the gender and number of the object. will be added to the subject. <=TT, KtcT, «^T, ftrT are exceptions. They will be formed according to the subject.
MODEL SENTENCES (intransitive verbs) (verb according to subject) 1.
KTrT'jpr
I
Yesterday you might have slept early (would have). 2.
41hi0 K7KTc^Kt’t
3. aiflusi* - date
KPT - playing cards KPT - price
EJ3TT - smoke
wft* - brother’s wife KT?T - goods
KTT - kerosene - time
really taken place or had been completed in the past.e.g. Gopal might
’ERT - big bell
xiirticCl* - trick,craftiness a«=0<* - picture
aqrd - attempt
An action which might have taken place in the past is said to be in Doubtful Past Tense. We are not sure whether the action had
I
The expert might have talked about this disease.
"vocabulary" 3i*iri - famine
IjTTWT
««n -cheap
fcicrflHT4TKhTT I The postman might have brought a letter for you.
4.
*Acii mI
KhftI
Sita might have lived in Sri Lanka for a year. 5.
t5TK KfcT 1ft ^fif I The students of the hostel might have got up at five o’clock itself.
TSiimi* - establishment 88
89
SUjgS « Learn Hindi Through English
__________________________ StJgl^S « Learn Hindi Through English
6.
6.
hivjh
Rift fcfc 3TRT vftnRTT Ft 3TTT’ifft RTRift I
It is not known (we do not know) whether the Aryans had come from somewhere or not. 7.
15011 441I
mhPi^i*m4Ht
|
8.
More than 500 persons would have died due to earthquake in 10.
vdlldR ct>Hui tg<141 vft ifrrft I Manorama would have taken leave due to chronic cough.
11.
f«l($l TTRTRTTRRTRmi 41*l> • The cat might have drunk the whole lot of milk.
12.
rW
13.
itn J2M in It, ^t 3TR RR>REvdRTT Mg''’ 4f*1 I My idea is (I think), he (they) would have reached Kolkata by now.
$HHrtl R7 fRt tff’t I In the course of the war, bombs would have fallen on the buildings.
11.
Rif
R^f «Tin i 4bn i
fRRFTRR $4*1 SI RRT?T% rt-Mlfch '’ERR> Ullrich f^HIMI RRTT 41*11 I The tenant is quarrelling because the house owner might have demanded rent.
«hi
10.
folw^RRlMHRft"^ f4*41 4 «4gd-Tft ch^lRdT fcKsf) 4i’fl 1 Vishnu Prabhakar would have written many stories in Hindi.
9.
Iran.
^ofRRTt Rfed m-iHimih RRR3 Rmi 41*ii I imprisonment to the thief.
In olden days our ancestors would have gone to foreign countries across the sea.
My brother would not have told a lie.
Transitive verbs (Verb according to object)
ifrft I The servant might have bought wheat and sugar.
14. 1.
TJIpt rtl-JIH^n 41*n I
rrr
4>r«ir
3 foddi «r cmjhii kftt ?
15.
How much money would you have earned in business? 3.
16.
The cook might have prepared food. flirt 1-41 3JRR
R>t Rldl^-f4*idU| KtRT I
relatives. m<£1
vTSR^RRTR 331^4^ I The boys would have flown kites.
vocabulary"
vi RR1? <5'K4 PhtHtl ddiMi Rift 41'ii I
■JvfTt* - vomiting
*k«ii<
Mmiditi - imprisonment
Pmimi -
The advocate would not have told this secret to anyone. 90
avii? I
34isi<MK^ Mil 3«sld HHIOIH MSI ^1*11 I
Raju’s father might have sent wedding invitation to all his
5.
'tft'ft,
Rekha might have read the tragic news of the accident in the neswpaper.
m~l$4l^<siMl tl<4H I 4lJll I
4.
*SKid
The guest might have eaten some spoilt sweet. See, he is vomiting.
You would have seen the Taj Mahal. 2.
Rtt rt^sdsbirt fni* ^m4i 5V11 I
The judge might have given the punishment of rigorous
It might have rained somewhere nearby because the air is cool. 8.
RR
The police inspector would have called the rowdy for enquiry. 7.
Rpff SntiMiti *t MlJl i 41*ii
9.
;jfn«
91
- business rent
gUg^S « Learn Hindi Through EngliBh
gUgffi « Learn Hindi Through English - tenant sdMRl - age, period - tragic ^fen* - accident
d^cPsbld* - enquiry, investigation rRr
- specialist
- in the course of, during
PlMdUl - invitation - bomb
- ancestors sldMItfl -rowdy
30. PAST CONDITIONAL TENSE
tSHraiH - hostel
RRR - secret
It is a kind of past tense. It denotes that if a certain condition had been fulfilled in the past, certain action would have resulted out of it. It, of course, means that neither the condition was fulfilled nor the resultant action took place. The past conditional tense is formed in the following manner. i)
TRST - strict, harsh
The conditional part (clause) of the sentence will begin with 3RR/Rpt. There is no harm if it is omitted.
ii)
The second part (main clause) will begin with rft.
iii)
In both the parts, to the verb root cn-ft-cft-cff will be added according to the gender and number of the subject. It is almost like Present Indefinite Tense (Lesson 4) except that there feminine plural will end in rft (and rff only in negative sentence and the final % is dropped as in Tj?t 'didl). e.g. I
mi«
sic) if I We read. We pass - Present Indefinite
Tense. 3RR ToR eft (1RT) RRT KTH I If we had studied, we would have passed - Past Conditional
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
3RR <1*4 HPIdldt^RR cFsfifWT I If Ram had asked, I would have given him loan.
2.
<1^ tfltsidi i
If a teacher had been available, I would have learnt Sanskrit. 3.
MIW
cit ASSlilqai I
If I had got money, 1 would have bought some essential books. 4.
3i’it cig
«ixnai eft 41’iiMt dleni«i if
I
If that swimmer had not saved (her), Meenakshi would have drowned in the tank. 5.
3TTFt'5^ Mqlaici ftncfl, eft if c)dd qidi I If I had got promotion, I would have got more pay.
92
93
SUjj^S » Learn Hindi Through English__________________ ___________
__________________________ 5Ugg(5 » Learn Hindi Through Engllwh
6.
3JR7 stHled RuRcft UMui R7TRTtS Hiwi? If Sri Ram had not gone to the forest who would have killed Ravana?
17.
3FRRT«ff5ftR^R WdSdl (3tMljl) ftdrfi I If there had been no Gandhiji, we would have got freedom late.
18.
7.
8.
3FRRtfhdl^fl^t ddldd^hERrftRt^^g^^^ I If my father’s health had been all right, he would not have taken leave.
9.
rR
Hteil RRT Midi rft ^*ih RRtRcTT I If Sarala had drunk (taken) medicine, (her) cold would have become less.
10. 3TTT xii^dl eftW Wl/l U^ddl I If Padma had liked (wanted), she would have worn silk saree. 11.
12.
13.
3RP ?7T R i<*m sheft eft t?R aafrt RtR I If there had been unity in the country, we would have made progress. o<nsl
41dd I
If Vivek Oberoi had stood in the election in Tamilnadu, he would have certainly won. 14.
3FR OiHM 3fR RxtJRRift Rft eft <M-n=ll TTrT Rt -IfH itdl I If there had not been bugs and mosquitoes, the child would not have cried throughout the night. 3TRt 3TRtTtft Hi»R mud I rtf RES RT^R 3ft tftS I If the guilty person had apologized (asked for' pardon) the judge would have released him.
19.
3FT7 7JR 'dcRl 3dd eft SJR^SJ^Rtt I If you had got up earlier, you would have seen the comet.
Note: In some grammar books, it has been advised to add to the subject and put the verb in past tense and according to the object, if the verb is transitive, e.g. 1.
If he had read 3TRt 3tR R£T RPTT I
2.
If she had bought the pen rR 3RR *tiH ISTfRt Reft
3.
Had you written a letter rR tpR RS fvRRT KtST
4.
If I had taken the medicine rR fR TST Rt Rt Reft I
5.
If I had called you 3RR fR ^mui RfTT
As the above construction is laborious, it is not followed by most people. The native speakers would prefer the following form in the place of the above: ?.3JRT R?> Mem ?. rR RK *nu jgfRd'l ?.rR 7JR RS fcKSirl
3RR TR fRf tRR eft 7RT-R TtR I If we had taken(eaten) banana daily, we would have been healthy.
15.
3JR7 ni^l <^41 R?ft rtf m?* *m^ HR I If the laundry had been opened, the customers would have brought clothes.
16.
VOCABULARY 3TTisRt* - freedom
i»d>dl* - unity
Rvf - loan
tsldtsldldl - knock at the door tii^di -customer
tsIdHel - bug
3TR7 flgHH 3tR eft *uf if 3TRTRft I
^*ih
If guests had come, they would have stayed in this room comfortably.
«{R^3- comet
MqluR
urt5< - mosquito
yr* - country, nation
94
rlei* - swimmer
- cold trouble
95
*-
promotion
Learn Hindi Through English
SW.glS • Learn Hindi Through English
31.
HABITUAL TENSE
3.
gjrpfcn
Qicdcii atei® The habitual tense represents an action as habitually or regularly done in the past or being done in the present or to be done in the future. It is different from a particular act of the past, present or future. It refers to a general fact. Yesterday he went to Mumbai a particular act, simple past tense. He used to go to Mumbai once every month—habitual act, Habitual Past.
Write the sentence in past indefinite tense (Lesson 24). But do
Mas.sing. Future
MODEL SENTENCES (Habitual Present) 1.
'Si TT^T
Piq I 1? I
I am in the habit of drinking tea daily in the morning. 2.
tjh
frr i tit ?
Why are you in the (having the) habit of sleeping during daytime? 3.
not add to the subject. ii)
+ cet +
Past Tense
The following is the procedure to form a habitual tense: i)
He would habitually drink,
H?l«41 QXfll 1? I Prakash is in (has) the habit of bathing in the river.
Whatever be the subject, write the past tense verb in masculine
4.
singular only like 3TFTT, TtsTT. But for *TT, instead of TRIT, use
TOTTTHT^Et3TRTT cbtrfl % I Uma is in (has) the habit of coming here in the evening.
'flIMI. iii)
Then put and add
according to the gender and
The people of India are in (have) the habit of celebrating some
number of the subject, i.e. «t>
festival every month.
Finally add: according to the subject in habitual present (Lesson 3)
6. n(hi eifri t?^u Afri fi The poor people have the habit of always wearing dirty clothes.
STT-st- eft-eff according to the subject in habitual past (Lesson
Habitual Past
21)
1.
In the case of habitual future, itself will change according to the subject. Wrft,
(Lesson 19)
Examples
Past Tense
3.
Past Tense
Hfrldl Hfqt'»1I<4I sftl 'nidi I Lalita used to go to temple. Now she does not go.
+
Mas.sing
«TT Mas.sing. Past tense
I am in the habit of reading newspaper ■4 3t
cEtH I 3T^^nj|3JT? You used to study well formerly. Now what happened?
Ram used to eat an egg. tin 3TST <su
2.
After drinking tea, I used to read newspaper. 2.
^EE?TT/^jft,
1.
xTET ’’fft ‘STR 3i$si«m M
+ ch
+
Mas. sing 96
4.
cHTft £ I My father has got diabetes. So he used to take walk (stroll) in the morning.
I' Mas. sing. Present tense 97
SUg^S * Learn Hindi Through English
StJggfS » Learn Hindi Through English 5.
6.
i
Habitual Imperative
When that actor was rich he used to go to Kashmir every year.
1.
IFTR ’jjta «1^1 '41 CM Ria IM i TO st I
2.
^*Ull TT^THT ft din I 4?l Rll rel="nofollow"> I Please (you) make it a habit to always speak in mother-tongue.
3.
yftlR’i ydgttttttttttttTift i
You make it a habit to come here often/be coming here often.
Our ancestors used to lead simple life. 7.
T> JflifM M>|M if R^Stt? *J«MHM ^Ilf4 T (3T*H-ft ) T?T cbtcl st I
Make it a habit to read (do read) newspaper daily in the morning.
During the period of Akbar’s rule, Hindus and Muslims used to live in peace. 8.
9.
10.
(2)
A special form of the habitual past is obtained by omitting TR
?fhft^ThRftT^^^3iisiich<Jl sft i
and the auxiliaries (final verbs) sn,st,sft,sff. It is used for narrating a
The Jhansi passenger train used to come two hours late.
repeated act of the past. The main verb will be in form f.
■g^ttpft 3JTi? &KI ^<S|i)^t Rim ch<4) ?ft I
1.
TTOt) I
qifadl
We would (we used to) go there in the morning itself and return
cMrft sft I
Mgrl TH tshdl M>
12.
Tft TTt TH7RH 3TtT^TT ff st I Charan Singh used to reply to letters certainly and at once.
Habitual Future 1.
HlpH 3TT5Tit 31 it ^4) til<91 chi’ll I Mohan will make it a habit to learn English from today.
2.
TT cftT TTO ft Tff TO ('Jimi TiTO ) 3TR TOT Tit eii
I used to get old age pension through money order.
in the evening.
Sania Mirza used to play tennis from childhood itself. 11.
7JT 3<<w< T^T 3TTTT Tift I
2.
3ft (Hi'H >jft flyi ’i’li ft a514 I Sri Ramanand used to bathe in the Ganges daily.
"vocabulary" 3TffHTT - actor
STH-TOT - peace & tranquillity
e^Mai - stroll, take a walk
r41gi< - festival
UT>HI - to cook
T^T - diabetes
mm - celebrate
Am - dirty
TTTTI 3TH it mmumi d>iJD I Hereafter Sarala will make it a habit to cook.
3.
qui^i Mfc|W| if 3TTt cbT^ 3^ yl4T thiu'l I Ganesh will make it a habit to wash his clothes himself in the future.
98
99
• Learn Hindi Through English
32.
Learn Hindi Through English
SHOULD - MUST - OUGHT TO
7.
^1?
The servant-maid should grind flour.
To indicate that something must be done or should not be done or something is desired by somebody, is added at the end of a sentence, e.g. You ought to read. He must go now. They
8.
should wait. What do you want? When
9.
i.
add^ft to the subject. (Lesson 10)
ii.
add HI to verb root - 3THT,
iii.
is added to the sentence:
7t «l«t>i
ui^l Tiff x<wi41 Tupfi* |
One should not drive a vehicle after drinking liquor. 10.
I.
ribll
If there is an object, the above TT will change into 4f if the object is feminine and 4 if it is masculine plural
iv.
4)ehtl4lHrt3tldl 41LHI |
11.
sFrT cFT^nH3TT5T^t 3Tf7 3TFST'FT 'ETH 3TiftHHHTHTf^t’ I
Should read book (Fem. Sing.) - hki* m
We must do tomorrow’s work today itself and today’s work
Must buy horses (Mas. Pl.) -
now itself.
xuGii' I 12.
If there is no object or if the object is followed only HI is to
^T'snafti
be added to verb root.
You must pass the examination this time. Otherwise forget
The patient must sleep - ffrft TftTT rnfffi* I
marriage.
We must call that servant-maid back - TH
H7T
13.
Tit MCt) tlHM H^HI M^ddl |
Old people must wear spectacles while reading. 14.
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
We should not believe in rumours.
13^-37 rfid-ll | It is getting late. I must go back home
2.
AiRih
15. Tell the washerman that he should bring the clothes today.
141 -i^i dtjtdi 1
A guest should not stay anywhere for more than three days. 3.
T7ft 7T7?
-141 414)
16.
|
Similarly a medicine should not be taken for more than three days. 4.
i4i
("4) 41
f^'-Muf) frits 4) xijf^lJ 1
1 if^ii l
6.
TTrt^ 7TlHT 37^7 7pt?
h(1^4)
Htfeista Ht 'THT 3Tt7 ^<|ch fpft
I
To preserve health, we should sleep early in the night and get up early in the morning. 18.
(One) should not bathe in dirty water.
H7 <5*1 Ct>t41 I
17. add 1
Irdfuct3H Hinrl
m
^dtlH 'hl
Man must take pity on dumb animals.
The clerk should immediately write a note (on) about this matter. 5.
7$ 3i!hc< 15I Mt fa^diti chwI'Mitsui
544rvil41^fi t£e4^nin'7t <*>*< MR? f*ne m?<4 Mtpm xiif^l We must reach the station at least 15 minutes before the
|
One should give medicine and diet to the patients at the correct time. 100
departure of the train. 101
Learn Hindi Through English
gyggj^S » Learn Hindi Through English 19.
ic41 (<*iill
% I 31dl*c| TtfttJTT *1^ H <=*->1*4
*
i^^tftriT^rHTxiTftqi
3.
'ipt SHUTT f^nt^nr invitations, (object Mas. Pl.)
4.
31IU*1 ^Tj> hwi* mg-D xiif^ii sft | You should have read this book, (object Feminine Sing.)
5.
Today’s children sit before TV. They should play daily. 21.
wHI cFTT 3TTft’hrd^t 78JT ifcfvTl’ tgvfl T^Tft
23.
24.
’’traffic ?iusu <sAn4) xiiGjij I
(3) Then there is the simple use of xjif^ii to denote what one wants or needs.
The State Bank should open a branch in every village.
Examples
t?4 STTTTTT eEt (ft) *4*11 xuf^i« I
1.
3iim*I *m
We must love our country.
2.
*^$1 g>» xuf^ii | 1 need some money.
TFlft^TT3jt cEt li04t T>feTt*FTEnt *4di I
3.
3TSf *1 *ui xiif^ii, 4t 3TR^ I What does a blind man want, two eyes.
4.
’■mi*) sflsi
5.
xlWlft =FT T^> TJtrnt =Et tj<±4) ri (f^i> | The peon needs leave for a week.
Our leaders should struggle to eradicate poverty. 25.
jjh*1
34S?f*l frt* I
You must memorise Abraham Lincoln’s speech. 26.
41*4 ^ftTTT^ft ri 4* i Rx-iT ei i4l x||f^i> sft | The servant should have brought fresh vegetables.
xiif^ii I
Old people should walk in open air to protect their health. 22.
st I I should have sent more
^441 *IC1<4 3T31 f*41 xfjt adflxfld Hlft *441 x||f^(J |
xiTift? What do you want, sir?
TTFft | The thirsty person needs some water.
Nobody should talk (engage in conversation) inside the library.
(4)
(2) In constructions like you should have, he should have, etc., the same procedure as shown above is followed. Then add: i.
SIT if there is no object or if the object is masculine singular.
ii.
«t if the object is masculine plural.
iii.
sft if the object is feminine singular.
iv.
sff if the object is feminine plural.
Another special usage is connected with style. 1.
He must come - a) 3TToF?t 3TRT xuf^i> | (simple statement) b) 444*1 xuf^vi fgt 3TTT( I ( style)
2.
Soldiers must obey their superiors. a.
^tt 3jRl*l(4«4i =FT (|d*| *4Hd| x||f^l« |
b.
^ft xiiii 3lfi|*ift4i
"vocabulary"
Examples: 1.
2.
I
urflM 'gin 3TRT ■aiRi' SIT I Salim should have come at once, (no object)
SIT I The cook should have prepared
3ii«cu5* - rumour
3TT2T - flour
f^'-Mufl* - note, remark tftHdf - grind yiltsu* - branch
■WI4-&4 - health
meals, (object Mas. Sing.) 102
103
Js^leb* - diet TFT* - pity
gggS « Learn Hindi Through English_______________________________
33.
AUXILIARY VERB - PRESENT TENSE
__________________________ SUK0 * Learn Hindi Through English 5.
HAVE TO fifelT, ‘ft, M3’
iff 4T14 Ml
We have to talk in Hindi in North India. 6.
To indicate necessity, requirement or obligation, ft is used.
iid«i cdhil chi
The poor people have to live in lanes.
To indicate force or compulsion, M3 is used. 7. While ft is mild, M3 is strong, ft indicates voluntary action.
places stress on the doer. He/She cannot avoid the work. But people use M3 at most places.
i3ftMMlftffnM3cnt I
There are so much of bugs in the cot that we have to sleep on the floor only.
M3 is more forcible than ft. ft places stress on the action - that it has to be performed. There is no choice regarding the action. M3
IsliMrl
Transitive verbs 1.
ftMlft f> chuui th fedeh cjf ^^
When ft/M3 is used:
2.
1.
add Mf to subject. (Lesson 10)
2.
add MT to the verb root.
3.
If there is an object, the above MT will be for masculine singular 4.
5.
M37TT according to the object. Then add f to indicate present 6.
MODEL SENTENCES (Intransitive verbs) Mddlf I
7.
sT'+dt ci hd 3F>t TT3 f fl ddi i
RlCdl8ft?T Mtt Mlxl elf ft 3641 fid I % I
8.
*4(fR f 'dMI fl ch % I
Bharat has to go to Bangalore next month. 104
ITMMdf 3lftftMMMdl^M 4,^ ftf f | Raghav has to type three letters just now.
9.
The Collector has to get up at five o’ clock itself. Mid chi 34 < |
^1 gil if Hchld f> fcdl* Ri
We have to give much rent for a house in towns.
Doctors have to keep awake till late in the night.
4.
cl O chi chi \if|q4 Ml «4J5d fcKSIdl 4 Sri I f I Writers have to write a lot throughout life.
I have to go home early.
3.
ggMTMflTMTf whTTTfld <1141 M3dlf I Pushpa has to sing prayer song in the meeting.
tense.
2.
MyVjd df Rd Ml MiTM 4>
Then put ftcfT f/M33T f. But if the verb is transitive put ft3T/
1.
Mft^l Mf 3lMf MiMf ftf M3f f I Manohar has to wash his clothes himself.
object is masculine plural. 4.
I
I have to sell the watch for my expenses. 3.
object. It will become ft if the object is feminine and f if the
■gf TsFcf
(xilcich) flyi chlfi M3cftf I The driver has to clean the vehicle daily.
10.
C4cf>|ci1 di) chKdI chl<5 Mgddl MSdl f I
The advocates have to wear black coat.
105
Learn Hindi Through English
SggfS * Learn Hindi Through English______________________ ________
34.
AUXILIARY VERB - PAST TENSE
5.
dtftsgil Miiedi R’ST I
6.
qqT
The woodcutter had to cut the tree.
HAD TO d£l4d> fifrziT ‘W’ To indicate that some action had to be performed in the past as a matter of duty whether one liked it or not: add to subject (Lesson 10)
2.
add HI to the verb root.
3.
If there is an object, and if it is masculine singular, adding HI to
Due to rain we had to get drenched (we were drenched). 7. 8.
to It will change to if the object is masculine plural.
inTS.
4.
I had to go - 'UMi Usi I (no object)
11.
arrft4qft i
^=0 <*>) Ri tniH'l 3iMdi qR-q ycfte ctitdi qSTI
12.
I had to write letter - ^5^ qq fcRsmqqT I (object Mas. Sing.) I had to write three letters - cfht qq Irnst-l q^l(object Mas. Pl.) I had to sell this cow -T5 -u
^q| I I had to pay Rs.50 to repair the watch.
13.
qq^?ftq7T?qTq^T i Due to illness my brother had to resign.
m/1
I (Object Feminine.
14.
TT^T^t3Tqdtq^r^;fcnTq^q<Jn
I
Rajesh had to buy this costly saree for his sister.
1 had to sell two cows - TptqtqFt q^T I (Object Fem.Pl.)
iptqtcf
sjrfsfai ct>i
Due to economic reason, Harish had to give up his studies in the middle (halfway).
15.
fcPr qitqRcbR qjnrT^TTqgT . Rakesh had to take a loan from the government to buy a car.
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
Kunti Devi had to reveal her secret in the presence of Kama (to Kama).
Sing.) 5.
^qT^TTq^T I
I had to eat fish daily in Lakshadweep. 10.
Examples
3.
?fta>-WTT4
9.
End the sentence with TST if there is no object. If there is an object, it will be RTt for the object in feminine singular and q^f in plural. If the object is in masculine plural, end the sentence
2.
At the condolence meeting, all had to remain silent.
verb root is enough. If the object is feminine, this TT will change
1.
urmu i
Babar had to fight with the Rajputs.
1.
4.
kr
HJIH UPTT MSI I
I had to go to Madras suddenly yesterday.
'Jii’ini SIT I
2.
rt/W qUFT 3TU|IHeh Ttqqf filriHI q^T? Why had you to meet the headmaster?
I had talk to him in Telugu only because he did not know any other language. _____________________
3.
sj'nq'l qft ERifc 3l<«< ift pci’ll MSI I
VOCABULARY
Children had to play inside the house only. 4.
did I qit nf^cii wiaic4i« afUHi m^I I Sita had to stay in ladies hostel. 106
3TTf2fq> - economic, financial *hu|
- resignation
■ debt, loan
i d i, ^Tl < i d i - become wet
WRH* - repair
-woodcutter 107
5tgg)S • Learn Hindi Through English SUg^S » Learn Hindi Through English
35.
AUXILIARY VERB - FUTURE TENSE WILL HAVE TO
6.
m 3lHict>i(l feTH H7ferFH 3Tt7fefe rldl fen I The top officer will have to think over this matter and decide.
7.
ftrnsftfe ft
agi4d> fen ‘fen, 'fen'
fe^7 cm-ii qfel I
The leaders will have to remove/eradicate superstitions from
To indicate that a certain action will have to be performed in the future, this form is used. It indicates obligation and not compulsion fellfe). The procedure is the same as explained in the two previous
society. 8.
^TTOT 'flu!
ckcin ft id 'M’fl m^(1 I
lessons.
If you happen to go to north India, then (you) will have to talk
i)
add fe to subject
in Hindi only.
ii)
add HT to verb root
iii)
If there is an object change TT into or if necessary.
iv)
Finally to indicate future add ufei/fen if there is no object. If there is an object, change ufel/fen into nfe, fet, nfeft; fet, feft, feft as required.
9.
Students will have to accept (obey) the advice of teachers. 10. unemployment. 11.
You will have to go now. jnebl 3mufei I
2.
You will have to buy a watch,
3.
You will have to bring some fruits, rjnfe ^75 rfe fet I
country’s benefit. 12.
71 (N
ifahftfefefi fei fen) I
We will have to give (grant) scholarship to poor students.
fet 3TT5Tfe sniHI m^’ii I
13.
Today I will have to go to office early. 2.
ferfe nnfe ft> ffej ftni 3ift nfeft fe ftfen fen I We will have to connect the Ganges and the Cauvery for the
fef fefeft I
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
Rfemchiifenft etiKisii’l fect’l fel I The Government will have to open new factories to remove
Examples: 1.
Tjfefe 3jw
3tHIH et>
eRT Ari nidi M^il I You will have to bring kerosene from shop.
14.
nm?n ^th fe nr fefen i ft> smft sfe ft wim^I ’feft I We will have to print this poem of Kamala Das in the next
3.
eO
P)
issue of the magazine.
We will have to control population for the country’s progress. 4.
fefe 31 MH I diMtl
15.
I
^Rfefe^u^ffeftTnan^wn^nfeni For improving knowledge, one will have to read newspaper
Shekhar will have to keep his room neat and clean.
daily. 5.
qft^n ft nTH nfe % fe ^?T iigdd cht-ft ufei I We will have to work hard to pass in the examination.
Wil 16.
nfe ft> ffer gft sthht n? fern nfen I I will have to sell my house to settle loan. 109
108
Sgj^S » Learn Hindi Through English
SJgf0 • Learn Hindi Through English 17.
36.
i
AUXILIARY VERB CAN’ (sb <11 <10’
The trader will have to send (despatch) goods at once. 18.
fe(c
To express the possibility of performing of an action,
~s<m u^'ii I
The bridegroom and the bride will have to get up early in the morning of the wedding day.
(can) is used. This is added to the root of the verb, to convey the idea ‘be able to,’ ‘can’ ‘may’. The root of the verb does not undergo any change. But will change according to the tense and the gender
19.
ft fit
Rrn Tra
et><41
/ Tra yrau cavil
number of the subject.
fhTT I Subject
I alone have to make all arrangement for birthday feast.
Past Tense
Present Tense Mas
Fem
VOCABULARY 3ra> - issue of magazine - advice wim-ii
- to print
Mas
■Hehl
Traft
W"
«MWii - population
fauiq - decision
il'iR* - progress
Reference
- hard work
- increase
- scholarship
Lesson 24
Lesson 4
Lesson 19
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
U - arrangement
- unemployment
•HcMil
TT57T
t-iehc/1 1
- arrangement - bride
f ^tft gUcft f TFFrnfl 1 can give you money only tomorrow.
2.
’^TT
f ftvT Ft cad ft ?
Can you talk in Sanskrit? 3.
tiHi'd - society
IpTTT'JIT^Ttt
tichdi % I
Subhash can do this work quickly. 4.
I Meena can swim even in a deep river.
5.
i The bear can climb the tree.
6.
VMlfl ^t,
f gtl C!l<3 ^t RxjHA'ftH I
A drop of ink can make ten lakhs think. 7.
3l!'d<*>H ft f> 3id< '*>< tt<*dI % I Nowadays anybody can enter the temples.
8.
^TTf 3Tdl3TTTF5ftl[? May I come in?
110
Fem
rr£t
7T55T
widcflri - scholarship
- feast, banquet - control
Fem
siifq^ctiFt - superstition
flsdi - to connect
Future Tense
Mas
Ill
TfSTfi
Sg^S • Learn Hindi Through English 9. 10.
gjjggjs « Learn Hindi Through English
37.
tj?) 3hm^> f^Tl* Hjff HR 1 I regret that I could not do anything for you. 3K ftrff 7^75qfijft 7377T37T I That patient could not eat anything.
«Ft^ 4t
11.
To express the sense of finish or completion of an action,
fI
We can see any film this Sunday.
12. 3373> 3>l
tJ3> is used. This is added to the root of the verb. As per meaning, the sentences will be in the past tense only — past indefinite, present perfect and past perfect.e.g. I finished eating, I have finished eating, 1 had finished eating.
13. Ml11
14.
Cl «J id ehl J iff «H$i 4 Ji tlcfii | Nobody could understand that mad man’s talk.
15.
3^f ^smn aft I ^mi(| I There was a strike yesterday. So the traders could not send goods.
fl
17.
? When will you be able to go to Chennai?
18.
341 chei ’Ts^r^t >41x1 ik ("rdL* 3JT? Will Sarla be able to come for blood test tomorrow ?
19.
M3>s I The detective police will be able to catch the murderer soon.
20.
I That labourer will not be able to finish this work by this evening.
21.
'Si <jh<4?I ■’fra' HtTn3rr3> 1 I will be able to give you loan up to Rs.500 only.
22.
3)^^3?l4M <£1) -iixi aft<4 Jf ticbui I Man will never be able to sing like the cuckoo and he will not be able to dance like the peacock also.
112
Fem
Mas
■gefteft
K^t
u? 2TT
sff
3TH *3
L.
Reference
Lesson -26
Lesson - 24
Lesson - 27
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
'ffRK Rif 317373^33 I I finished seeing this film many times.
2.
R3T
*0<$l Kt ?
Have you finished learning Hindi by now? 3.
31737 3T3 3K ^33 37 I Ahmed had completed reading the lesson.
4.
TH ndyi 37t flR I The doctor finished seeing that old patient
5.
arnftn 3^1737737^7% i Aameena has finished singing Urdu poems.
7^3 -blood 3nR*-test, investigation
Fem
^nen
38
VOCABULARY jsjfsud 1 - detective Mi'in - mad Ht7 - peacock
Mas
K9’1
3”
n«f|ein Jl’l Ri «uqTTTWft TjftajTT frio I After her health becomes all right, Madhavi will be able to write examination.
4?l3cd* - cuckoo 73T3 - regret KT?T.- bear
Fem
Mas
Past Perfect
Present Perfect
Past Indefinite
Subject
Could you buy that house?
16.
AUXILIARY VERB FINISH’
6.
K3
3>4 J
st I
We had finished washing clothes in the morning itself.
113
StjggfS * Learn Hindi Through English_____________________________ 7.
^n3TTtr3THT^R^xr^ ?
Learn Hindi Through English 21.
Did you finish selling your house? 8.
T3K 1? I The boys have finished playing cricket.
9.
C'lo* ch^l’Tl fcnsi st I
13.
a-i<£| ^l*KKKKft r[^t I Due to debt his property was (had been) confiscated.
His lecture was finished.
It is possible to extend the meaning of ^>T to future tense also, then it will mean ‘would have’ e.g. ‘When would you have your studies finished?’
i All the guests have finished eating.
ft. Please refer to lesson 19 under exceptions. In short, ^TT, ^ft,
(W*r)ft^FT |
10.
12.
22. Note:
The writer had finished writing the story.
11.
if I I had finished swimming in the tank.
sff I The women of the family had finished bathing at five o’clock itself.
If we wish to use in future, we have to add the forms of fVt, ftrft, ftm, fftt,ftrft
it 3T9 TTT
reaching there.
14.
W TTH THE 3 Tjff Hthr xjcRT t I Your telegram has finished reaching here in an hour.
reply.
15.
| The cat had finished drinking the entire milk.
16.
? Did the Prime Minister finish speaking in the meeting?
17.
? Have you finished taking rest?
18.
tthk
3nf .ttjtr. Trftgnnnr^R^JTen i
19.
i The boys finished memorising their lessons.
20.
3TK?T fI On doctor’s advice my friend has given up the habit of drinking liquor. 114
be the termination depending upon the
subject.
"S qfl'l %TT8TTT tHHIf. ft 3TqHTErm TsTcf K7 | I finished spending my full pay in the first week of the month itself.
Prasad had finished passing IAS examination.
wiH
ftf | They would have finished singing by now.
txizft HTTH TR rpEt ftrft IThe letter would have finished it
mH|s|
fHTT ^t> ftf I They would have finished writing the
SWfi.s • Learn Hindi Through English
38.
__________________________ SUgR*S • Learn Hindi Through English
AUXILIARY VERB BEGIN’
7.
<16I<4O> O’<41 "cW’
37?
7f)13 hT'|4 7737I
He is poor. So he started begging.
To indicate that an action has started or has started just now or will start soon, this form of verb is used.
8.
mi<4 UuiMfrl 37^ 7737773 7[3 337 3154 377 37) ? When Ganapati began to sing, then why did you go out?
1.
The main verb will end in (33^, 313)
9.
2.
773 will change according to the tense and according ot the subject.
<*>ih ri'fl I Revati started working with enthusiasm.
10.
I The river started flowing from the mountain.
11.
5*4 M'liaitllFFt 77*1 I We began to laugh continuously.
12.
371ft vfUn^fTTTi 334 77ft i They started reading for the examination just now.
13.
3m4R(1
14.
Tpffc3TiTif ci'iidit 31^1-1 7737 I Sudheer started speaking continuously in anger.
15.
374 7
Subject
Present Tense
ft
3?, 3? , 34IM
Past Tense
Fem
Mas
rival if
M'lrf) 7^
rt'la Ijt
irfl ift
Future Tense
Mas
Fem
Mas
Fem
run
73ft
n<j
n4
Wt
<=rft
ci'il'l
d'lVft
rival
7737ft
vFTT
Hrft
n'l'ii
77341
773^?
rl'lcfl 1?
vl
vFTf
m
rFtrft
Reference
Lesson 4
Lesson 24
,7337 31, Note: It is possible to use perfect, past perfect and past doubtful respectively.
Lesson 19
to indicate present
34 Mirii'l n*il % I The peon has started burning old papers of the office.
afp 374T 3777 7741 2ft I
The guard showed (waved) green flag and the train had started
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
moving.
7)77375; 3^717733? 177734 tttttt it i
16.
3T373T sft5T-2ft5T «*4${4 7741? I Now we have started understanding Hindi a little.
17.
33t
I begin to write lesson every day from six o’clock. 2.
7^77 ^5 77^17173 3Tt
773^ I
The school boys begin to play tip-cat (game) in the evening. 3. 4.
chMtd 377^ nuif 7? I The soldiers begin to do exercise after getting up.
18.
33J77T7T 23)33(7^7737 ? 341<+>ri if
3^73)7 •uti} tn<~l I
Clouds began to spread in the sky and peacocks began to dance. 6.
^5rfT 7737 37l<) xft7 35)^737 | The dog started barking because it saw the thief. 116
33Kt4 7741 I
33774413ft ^7 313314 (37t) rliftl The Prime Minister will start meeting the President every Monday.
Why did the child begin crying in the night? 5.
33773
Due to rain, shops began to be closed.
19.
7373? Qiltui 333773 MVI5 evfl I Due to fast wind, fire started spreading everywhere.
20.
337 777377 fTTT’ f3773174 773 I Children began insisting on seeing the circus.
117
Stgt^S « Learn Hindi Through English
39.
S®^S • Learn Hindi Through English
AUXILIARY VERB - ALLOW
4.
t4‘*nR3J^5?dR'|TRdcr%Adi ehl cRdifl Rmi I The Speaker of Lok Sabha did not permit the leader of the opposition party to interfere in the proceedings.
5.
l41 RURR-ntf dtfi Rai I I The university did not permit some students to appear for the examination.
6.
AgHn'ld?A Rmi I The mosquitoes did not allow the guests to sleep throughout the night.
7.
RftRfRlRl 3T«1 RRl cR (TFTRd, RRR) RaTT I The minister permitted me to take a photo of him.
Put the root of the main verb in ending form ■3rR,AT^,
ii)
Use 3 according to the gender and number of the subject and according to the tense.
iii)
If the sentence is in past tense and if it has an object, add to the subject and use according to the object, (see Lesson 25)
iv)
8.
If the sentence is in the past tense but without an object,
Future Tense
will end in Ratt I
1.
AT£ STTHT IJWeb AT«R Rtt % I
2.
Some teachers do not allow the students to play.
4.
2.
5HlA 3jfi|et>l(l Rid I Our officer will not permit us to make phone calls from office.
3.
sTcteA tugn ermuR-R ? Will the doctor allow the patient to drink tea?
4.
di^^ «4
i
<JUe{>l
RditTfR ^41 I
His(her) mother does not allow him(her) to sleep during daytime.
Imperative
41hk «wi 3rrftKTRt
1.
RfRaRuRdR I Live and let live.
2.
<$cfi eR 414) R CUHH 4dlR Tt I Allow the porter to unload the luggage from the cart.
3.
'5?) 3hm41 ^Td eh?A I Please allow me to speak my matter.
4.
3H iidd Hd ARii’, 3R7 3tR RRrn Please don’t obstruct that poor man. Please allow(him) to come in.
5.
$pr3<5HqddRtRRRd 3Td4ddp eft I Allow Ahmed to stay in your room just for two days.
<3HieTTPtdRRtTI
The sick child does not let its mother to cook food. Past Tense 1.
I The teacher did not allow me to read story-book in the class.
2.
'Amici
chA ^hi^i
Gopal did not permit his brother to go to see the exhibition. 3.
Rdi R) tRI RRhi A/siA dRRt | My father will not allow me to see cinema often.
He allows (lets) me read his book.
3.
Raii i
The watchman did not let the thief to run away (escape).
MODEL SENTENCES Present Tense 1.
cumi
<*JR7T
Ri^RiaA Rt
cbujaiA isAcR Rn I
The Government of India did not permit foreigners to open factories. 118
119
___________ • Learn Hindi Through English
* Learn Hindi Through English
40.
THE ABSOLUTIVE
9.
S^fcis chid
Ril'd I Mt Tf 3<sd i % I
David sits in the church wearing coat.
'jcfcpilcicp 0>4l <J>7’ To denote doing a work after finishing/doing some other work
10.
Descending from the Himalayas, the Ganges river flows towards
earlier, is used. That is, it stands for ‘having done’, e.g. I go to
the sea.
office after eating food. The actual work is ‘going the office’. The work done earlier is eating. The will be added to eat tsilcM. i.e. 3 '•nidi + Idwi I i.e., WXsIMi
11.
M sKjcb rise) fj I Taking up the guns in the hand, the soldiers fight.
there are two actions, is added to the first in time.
RMTR^t F^HinM 3d
dfcbtl41 cftM^ Mlcht iffMR
I
The servant maid will go home only after washing the clothes. i)
Therefore, in constructions like the above, is added to the
13.
TFTit i*i)< tjdcht tpT T3 I
14.
MT? 4h=T HHIMR ^FTT chMIdl t I
15.
itf-clf^cii <M-1cb{ 34l>n141 it asdi cll^dl 7? I
root of the verb (^TT,^,7Tt) ii)
Hearing a noise in the night, we all got up.
If there is already a (as in
TPIcT MR ), totally there
will be one . i.e. MR + MR = MTM
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
I want to fly freely becoming a bird.
MVt^ MRM MR! I 16.
Do any work after thinking. 2.
RTMR ri/MMR M’xll 7?3TT 3TRMfeMR 3TTMT I Seeing the mother, the child became happy and came running.
3.
He earns money by begging alms.
^Hl
^>rfl I
Swimming in the flood, we reached the shore. 17.
tifd M tuM M?t TRI ^iui’1 MRt |
18.
ift
19.
MSftTJMT-l^MT cieRctH that'll SMIC1I % I
3nMMft^T^xrmMR^MMTM^t ?
The bird builds nest after collecting each straw. 20.
What will you do after passing the examination? 6.
TRTMR
HTR |
3HTZMRd<slctR3nft3TT7?T'^|
^>tI
chi
^midi ■cupi'crPPh dg
22.
Ultfl chbn I 4^i^t33?n ?
Does not your blood become hot (boil) on seeing the bad
J^4
I
Seeing a dog you should not flee because it will chase you.
I am coming just now after seeing the drama. 8.
MGCbl RTM
Reading the question paper, the students became bewildered. 21.
They sleep after reading the Bhagvadgita in the night. 7.
'flichl m!« isihdl I
Going to the post-office I bought post card.
Seeing a snake on the path, we started running away. 5.
MMR ifi ^<slct>{ dlPhciT 'M'dl'tit 5til I Seeing the monkey, the child laughed clapping the hands.
Emerging from the flowers, the fragrance spread. 4.
TRTMTM'ff Pb'llf MR Mgcl TT* I
23.
condition of the country? MTOT% RTtM #MMR MMVTM MR^T KMM MS ? I Indians waste (their) time sitting here and there gossipping.
120
121
Suggs • Learn Hindi Through English
« Learn Hindi Through English
41. PRESENT PARTICIPLE
24. 3TUT HifcHch«4<45hit 3TW5S thct><’iWfi »ls I Dissatisfied with the behaviour of his master, Suresh gave up the job.
A participle is a kind of adjective. It qualifies a noun or verb.
VOCABULARY * - fragrance ylttcdl - nest
MsitMi - to be perplexed rtirfi othi - applaud
But it is formed from a verb and it retains some properties of the verb. So it may be called verbal adjective, e.g. i)
- question paper
fdWT - straw
- noise
celt'll - collect
The present participle is formed by appending 7TT to the bare root - x<eidl,3TMT,'Hiai.
ii)
- fragrance
FTHT - snake
- a moving
train. hhtcii
mobile library.
Being an adjective ending in 3TT sound, the present participle will change according to the gender and number of the noun it qualifies, e.g. dgui '’TFft, ftavtcl
iii)
ui4l• (see Lesson 12)
For the sake of clarity, j?3TT may be added after the present participle. This jpTT will change into
where necessary,
d^dl ^3JT VFft TTHKKtrTT% I Flowing water is clean. xiridl i|f TTrft Tt iHT Rshd fi iv)
| Do not board a running train.
chi Md dW) Do not pluck the just-blossoming flowers.
The present participle may be used as adverb also, indicating how the verb (action) is done. Then it will come before the verb. It will agree with the subject. uImici y-cftidi T3TT '■nidi % I Gopal goes smiling. 3TT^ f I Boys come running. I Sita moves out wearing a newsaree.
{fidl v)
If there is an object and if comes after it, the participle will be in form. I I see (find) Gomathi singing. cd^cbl 7TH H'cllti f I The teacher finds the students making noise.
vi)
If the present participle is followed by preceded by W at the time of Gopal’s going. W at the time of his/her sleeping. jftrTT ■’TT# 7TJT4 at the time of Sita’s singing.
122
123
it will be
SMEW'S » Learn Hindi Through Eugl lull
SWfi a • Learn Hindi Through English vii)
If the present participle is doubled for effect or style, it will take ft form.
10.
ftft thvtt
11.
I have never seen him playing. Vrft 3ftr^vftfttftV^rT ft? VT?T 311^1
ftft-ftft ftt 'Jiini % I The child sleeps while weeping.. With 1ft, the present participle ( ft form) denotes immediately after or as soon as.
12.
ft frits!Ghori SEHWI 34 worm ftft GusHI -flift I 1 became tired writing continuously. Nevertheless I continued writing.
13.
PlMril <Jlrfft-fttrfftftftHfttl Vimala began to weep while talking.
14.
TNIT T^ VFT ftft-ftrT Vftv ftt Vtr I Giving alms continuously King Raghu became a pauper.
15.
vvft-vrftftft 34 nd (i
16.
ftt fttv vft vr vr jtt’KR 3^<si Tn* i We became bored hearing the same song again and again.
^jfrRJ ft> 3JTft ftt fttt VFTTI As soon as the police came, the thief fled. 3TTQ 1ft VS sifci^lI I As soon as you reach, please drop a letter. ix)
A present participle can be used as a noun. ^vft vft V7T I A drowning man catches at a straw. V? ftftt vft ftwidl ft I He makes the crying persons laugh.
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
ft Vrlft-fftRft
VH ft I
1 am a member of a mobile library. 2.
17. xRRRft cfft ybltft -'JVTRft 3rfftwft ItR VTT I The officer became frustrated calling the peon again and again.
'jirtrfl l|ft 3TFT ft and I Sita descended into burning fire.
3.
ftftt^fvsft »4
What thing a dying man would not desire? 5.
^5 cfftT fttft-TTtft ft I Some people talk while sleeping.
19.
34id'* rel="nofollow">i ’’ER^sft ■gt’'5^ °
20.
Vlftt fti V^ft-V^ft VrVT ft) fVTT ^TTrTT ft I
*4^1 qisai-^’hdi ^3JTV?T 3TTVT I Mahesh came here running and panting.
6.
18. I
Seeing a crying girl I became sad. 4.
TSCHIMcb 5tin I K3JT
I
Even a stone wears out by the continuous flow of water. 21.
fttft
^ft vft ftVVrT Sift I vftt ftt V?
8.
VT WT I The monkey climbed the tree by jumping.
9.
"vocabulary"
rtsGhm HTxTrft VTrft ft I Girls sing while dancing.
V^VIMrl fulfil tpTTVfe?nft I That mad fellow runs screaming. 124
ViTftnT I
Don’t disturb a sleeping dog. Otherwise it will bite you.
The villain spoke smilingly. 7.
vftr fttvT ft i
Leaving (his) wife and son sleeping Siddharth came out of the palace.
TFTftt 'jildl ft I While looking on, the night falls. viii)
vpft ftfrrft
34m«1tii -
however
- to be bored TsrFTVTW - villain
^Tfft «smi - continue
fvTFTT - wear out, rub
SIVFTT - to be tired
^TT - to ache
Sim - to be defeated 125
- search ftfwr - to pant
Learn Hindi Through English
SUKjgTS • Learn Hindi Through English
42.
MODEL SENTENCES
PAST PARTICIPLE
1.
7t5T RFTTR3TT Mgdl I Wear washed dress (cloth) daily.
In the famous line by John Keats “Heard melodies are sweet,
2.
but those unheard are sweeter," heard and unheard are examples
«FTT'STFTftrlrfl 7>? Is dry wood available in the timber-yard?
of past participle. The past participle is formed just like past indefinite (See Lesson 24). Let us recollect those rules briefly here and apply
mf?faRTR3TRt cfit gfuFFt’
3.
Forget what has gone before, think about the future. (Let
them to past participle.
bygones be bygones.) i.
The past participle is formed by appending 3TT to the root 4.
WT,w,^n, ii.
Root ending in shortens its vowel.
Don’t pluck flowers from plants. Bring fallen flowers.
Root ending in i 5.
also shortens its vowel and take ^TT. iii.
Root ending in 3JT/3Jt also takes RT. 3TFTT, Khn.
iv.
Exceptions have been indicated in Lesson 24.
i.
6.
8.
RFR f I
TFft^Tn^fTpnl ?ctrrrtff^
i
R«u(^3TT) qiMtr
rtal mim% I
9.
Rgrl () TgFT fRHfFFF tTs
It can be used as a noun.
Seeing the flowers that have blossomed, butterflies started
TFT TTRT I Do not strike those already dead.
hovering around.
XHo-irHsI dj FTFJ tf) i 1(51* I The educated should be civilized
iii.
R
It is a sin to take back the donation (gift) given.
Fpit frp 7^ 1? I Dry (dried) leaves are falling.
ii.
TFTTR TRI
chair.
ends in 3TT, it will change according to the subject.
IFF tht j|3TT 7TTQ TRsITI I saw a dead snake.
TFTRRt I
What is a minister’s throne after all? It is just like a broken
A past participle can be used as an adjective. If the participle
t^
RFT FT
We perform annual ceremony for dead relatives. 7.
also can be added depending upon the subject.
Tpft
Don’t believe in what you only heard (hearsay).
Briefly, the past tense form itself is used as past participle. Usage
rfttfi TgcT TFT ulsl I frft IF* TJpFT TTOTl I
10.
^.cf)
3T^3JTRT I
^sld>< tJ1<
also.
Seeing the open window, the thief entered into the house
When it is used as adverb, it takes I* form.
through it.
cd^<=Gl
(Tn) 3TT^ I The girl came wearing yellow
saree.
11.
RRT x^Mxliq
RftH aft ?
Who was the girl who sat here silently? 3FFftRFFR cicidK FR TFJ
I The emperor sat with
a sword tied around his waist. RTF! RFF if H 3TFTT I Don’t come inside the room with the shoes on. 126
127
SUgflfS » Learn Hindi Through English_____________________________
SiJ^S * Learn Hindi Through English
(2)
43.
COMPOUND VERBS
If there is a noun or pronoun before a past participle, then add
to that noun or pronoun. Which one to add depends
on the number and gender of the noun that comes after the past participle.
The book I bought was lost somewhere. 2.
~
feitsft
%?
A compound verb is a combination of two verbs. This combi nation helps in emphasizing or intensifying the meaning, e.g. went away, fell down. A verb is rendered intensive by adding another suitable verb to its root. The root of the verb will remain unchanged whereas the additional verb undergoes changes due to tense, gender, number. e.g. KR sivm - to kill outright, HRT - to throw down, RTH
Have you read the Ramayana written by Tulsidas? 3.
3nq^tlTFft^f
Rldnfl I
acdi- to speak out, sivm - give away, Rsft ^TT - to lose definitely In the examples cited, sivHI, ^TT, 33TT have been used as the
The saree you asked for is not available nowadays. 4.
dtlHIH uRl^uf I All the novels written by Premchand are famous. (3) If there is RR after the object, the past participle will be in
form. TRTRtft R7T Kt’ Ttai I I saw Saraswati sitting there.
(4)
additional verbs. But they do not retain their original meaning. They only strengthen or develop the meaning of the main (first) verb. are some of the verbs used as the second verbs of the compound verbs. These verbs occur in earlier lessons also in different contexts. There they have a meaning of their own. Here none. The procedure is: i.
Put the main (first) verb in its root form (Tft.Tt, fcl(H)
ii.
Add the second verb according the tense and the subject.
iii.
If the sentence is in past tense and if there is an object, the second verb will be formed according to the'object’s gender
The past participle can be doubled. Tf
and number. Add to the subject in such cases.
?T5> Tm I I got tired of (continuously) sitting. iv.
The main verb does not undergo any change. But xRH is an exception. In past tense, it will also change along with the second verb, ■dvt i TRT,
v.
th*,
xtcf) T?, xirfl T?
Compound verb is generally not used in negative sentences.
155TT: It is used to express completeness or finality. is not to be used when is used as last verb. duinftefttgrrTRT i Ram ate up all the bread. TTRTT RTd 128
’’TT TT? I
Sarala slept away at nine o’ clock yesterday. 129
SUgf0 • Learn Hindi Through English
fa fan fa fa wt fa i
___________________ Sgg> » Learn Hindi Through English nr arfat ■gnfa ifart i4j fa^ fa f faff i
What happened once, that happened for ever. 3TV MiSnia fat W fxif^«
She will give away her old books only to me. yd (fan I Hearing the news I started out at once. rmhh
4.STrT: It gives the idea of completion or thoroughness, with vehemence and within a short time. The idea of throwing also is suggested.
tnsft antii41 fa fafa fas sinm % I The cat will drink off the entire milk. fafa
cf TRTT I
falT^fafaRH STH I I
The washerman took away the clothes.
Hanuman killed the demons (in full).
2. fa It indicates doing a thing for one’s own sake. Further, it emphasizes the meaning of the main verb.
mifam ris4> fa Gasfa mfafan rfa sidi I
fa id41-1 tfar4t I
A mischievous boy broke the glass pane of the window.
MmH anfatfa 3jfa
mis sfa I
The money-lender confiscated the peasant’s land.
The mad fellow tore away his clothes.
W ^*14 $a41 -Jifal TsTT friMi ? What! Did you finish eating so quickly?
c-imsfa fafavm sidl I The woodcutter cut away the tree.
3TTV
% ffa( ^5 Tfa fa falffa> I
You please take (away) some money for expenses.
5 .VS: It signifies the suddenness of an action. It is also added to verbs which signify some act of consciousness for emphasis.
3Ts§rf Snufa WT RFT fan I
It also denotes chance, happening. 3TT MSdi means to befall,
Abdul will certainly accept your matter.
to happen to come.
44
sfafa fafaifafafa^fa naw frwfan fafa i
fa
I had (finally) purchased that house. 3.
The elephant breaks up the tree easily.
It signifies doing a thing for someone else. It also emphasizes the meaning of the main verb. ati 3jfal4 3TPRT HKI Wfatfa4 «iie 1 I That rich man distributed all his wealth among the poor. ffanfaf fafafarfasnffaT i
Hearing the news of the death of Smt. Indira Gandhi people burst into tears. M^ilm tjdmt'mfajfa I Hearing the jokes of the jester, we burst into laughter.
farfafa^sfa I The monkeys jumped from the tree (suddenly). far W rilu hi fa I Hearing the noise all people woke up.
Shivaji defeated Aurangazeb.
timm 4 anfa 141 yfl 4y fa I Ramdas sold out his old watch. 130
^7 V7 m^is fafa VST I At a distance, a mountain came into view. 131
gJteS’a • Learn Hindi Through English
__________________________ SUggS » Learn Hindi Through English
MR F5T means to be possible.
^R^TFlRFT it_____________ fSirtI’M frits Flft I You have completed writing such a big book within such a short time!
I did whatever I could. 6.33 : ‘to arise, to get up’ indicates (suddenly) start to... It also has the force of unexpectedness.
9. F3: It implies the idea of doing a thing beforehand (priority,
chlMni f^gji 3^t I Seeing (having) a bad dream, Komala screamed. gJeHi
jjfrTF cwt Fit <^HI FRT I The police inspector gave a blow to the rowdy.
precedence) or keeping safely.
'hTT'f^rt'5ifQ33T I The minister has kept the resignation letter ready.
Seeing the accident my heart trembled.
ihiRt33it When Socrates was giving a lecture, his wife shouted.
MF^TTyTRFRR 3> frT^33? ttsil % I
I have instructed the servant to wait for the guest. 3tRRft f^7T3> 33 FFRT FFTi FR F3T I The peon has kept the director’s room cleaned (already).
^3 33311 ? Why does Ahmed speak in the middle? 7. ^3: It gives the idea of finality, suddenness, haste, doing a thing without forethought or in desperation or doing forcibly. 3F MI'ld 33 TFT M3 FRt, Fj?t 3t MR 3i'll I Do not tease that mad man. Otherwise, he will strike.
oTTTRTft^’jfrrF37trfWt^tFWHT^tT337^F^ aft I The business man had (already) given the news to the police about the possibility of a theft. 10. t5tS: It indicates completion after effort. ftft $ wisi I I worked so hard that I got through the examination.
Without thinking about the consequence what (awful) thing have I done!
Fit f?C|ch< w)si I I managed to drive the enemy back.
TTERRTi? ■J? 3FFt TFTT >£t TTlft RTFT3T3 T3T ^3T I The careless son lost the entire property of his father. s7<*<J{ ^3 f^TRTH 3?
TfHTnftTPT C15 4M-qiM ^|RRR wlsi I 1 read throughout the night and finished that novel.
iWt WpF TR 33 ^3T I
The patient sat up in his bed against the doctor’s instructions. ^1 g'JIl<
MR ^3T I
The prince became the king after killing his brothers. 8. MF: It gives the idea of impropriety or foolishness. 3HR fWTF MT TJR> TF3 frR3 RTF I He dashed off a full article on this subject.
132
133
Uggs • Learn Hindi Through English
44.
Learn Hindi Through English
CAUSATIVE VERBS
(b)
jhu||jfgp ||J
If the first vowel of the root is long, shorten it. T* and 3TT change into and 3. and remain unchanged.
An action can be carried out in one of the following three ways: The subject himself does the work.e.g. The car goes.
2.
A second person gets the work done. e.g. The driver drives the car. A third person makes the second person get the work done, e.g. The owner asks the driver drive the car.
A verb whose subject does not function directly but another agent is called causal verb. When there is only getting the work done, it is called first causal. When there person who makes the first person get the work done, second causal.
acts through one person is a second it is called
Since, ‘causing something to be done’ is an action which must be directed towards somebody, all causative verbs are invariably transitive. The first causative verb is obtained by adding 3TT to the root. The second causal is made by adding RT to the root. e.g. 1.
RTCt R>R drtcfi T I (Action done by the subject)
2.
§i$d< RiR detin111 (First causal done by one agent)
3.
TtRR deididi % I (Second causal with two agents)
Similarly we can form Msdi (to read), M
Formation of causal verbs (a)
^RTRT - awaken wimi - cause to awaken
'jflddi -conquer Riaidi -help to conquer Rirididi -cause to be conquered
1.
3.
PM I - wake
Roots ending in consonant and having the first vowel short take 3TT and RT.
<*ddi - do tjddi - listen
d>
*whi -
cause to get done ^jddidi - cause to listen
aodi - rise
R3TRT - raise
aodidi - get raised
TRT^RTT - understand «H$iidi - explain
tidsididi - cause to explain
RRTT - die
*<
HHdi - kill 134
yididi-cause to rotate
tjMdi - go around
^hhi -
Radi - lie down
Riaidi - to place
tliodi - learn
Rita id i - teach
dieidl - speak ■^RTT - float 3->
rotate
- call tkidi - set afloat - spread
Rlddldl - cause to be placed - cause to teach sjcddHI - cause to call JWHI - cause to set afloat ^xddidi - cause to spread
dflddl - run
qlsidi - to race
qlsdidi - cause to race
^<sidi - see
Ro id i - show
Rod id I - cause to show
Note: R^gcdldl (for RtsiHi) and RiocdMI (for Rioidi) are colloquial, oidi has exceptional forms: fociMI (feed), focididi (cause to feed). (c)
Roots ending in long vowel shorten it and append HT in the first causal and HRT in the second causal.
nhn - sew - drink
Rhdidi - get sewn
Rieicildl - cause to get sewn
Reiidi - cause to drink
Rrididi - cause to give to drink
Rn - give Rcdidi - make to give Rcididi - cause another to give HTTT - sleep
^cdidi - put to sleep
UTTI - wash
^eiidl - get washed
0,1,11
Sjrididi -cause to get washed
ftn - weep hei id i - make cry held id i - cause to weep (d)
' cause to put to sleep
The following forms may be noted
Rididi - to be sold siddi - to sell RididHi - cause to sell dddl - is made ddidi - make dddidl - cause to make <^eidi - opens iaietdi - to open <^rididl - cause to open 135
5IJgg(s » Learn Hindi Through English
Sjjgjsff * Learn Hindi Through English leave a place
wis-n - give up
^^141 - liberate
- sit
f«toMi - to sit
Piocihi -
^•ii - break itself
ids’ll - to break
j^cihi
'£><>11 - burst
'his’ii - to crack
4>e-ii - get torn
Mils'll - tear
■S'b’ii - stop, stay
’ii - to stop
12.
cause to seat
- cause to break
13. The child drinks milk.
yseudi - cause to burst 4>scn-n -cause to tear <>et>cini - cause to stop
The mother feeds the child with milk (makes to drink, suckles). 15.
16.
«1TX|| tlidl t I
4'l«Mi’d ebl icfl % I The maid-servant puts the child to sleep.
3.
18.
-ilw^IdtMi % I
19.
The servant fells the tree. •debtds Pi
The owner gets the tree felled by the servant. 7.
20.
37U|lMch
trHsl4l f^tslld t I
21.
The teacher teaches the students (how) to write. 22. The head-master causes the teacher to teach the students to write. 10.
4H^4 «F5crf 4>l4st>4 3 4|4ld f I They make listen (tell) stories in the children’s programme in television.
4l
dk8ft, bdhdl ftdl I
The vehicle (car) was moving fast, I caused (somebody) to stop it.
i^^m«fffcHs(4l idtsldl I The students learn to write.
8.
i As I do not have money, I will not be able to get my cycle repaired.
The tree falls.
hiItk*
3ST4141farTT^ sftlRani^n I Make me drink (supply me with) cold water and feed me with roti.
4.
6.
31Hd>l Tra 91414 ’WRrefi 3TT4^pTsrai^TT I I shall cause (arrange) to send all your luggage to your house through the peon.
17.
4T 4ld>U’d^^^t <jridltdt I The mother gets the child put to sleep by the maid-servant.
5.
bridled % I
m
The mother causes the nurse to feed the child with milk.
The child sleeps 2.
fd riled % I
14.
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
eMdl3ft I Cause (somebody) to get this work done (by somebody else).
^d>IHd>d I
ftTTff TT«T Ririiai ^1 I get all my clothes sewn by the tailor. 43tFft■gsjtTt?T4T5T'fluid 1? I My neighbour awakens me everyday at five o’ clock.
23.
dddld'l I Shahjahan caused (had) the Taj Mahal built in marble.
Do this work (yourself). 11.
^cfirn ch<|3Tt I Have this work done (by somebody). 136
137
5ygg> * Learn Hindi Through English
45.
» Learn Hindi Through English
VOICE
As an object is necessary for an action to affect, the verb of the Passive Voice can be transitive only. The verb will be according to the object, e.g. A mango was eaten; Two mangoes were eaten. In Hindi the verb should agree with the number and gender of object.
STTRl The form of the verb indicating the relation of the subject to the action is called Voice. In other words, it is the form of a verb that shows whether the subject of a sentence performs the action or is affected by it. Hindi has three voices: Active Voice, Passive Voice
ftftnft'mE oNi 'nidi % I
(Object Mas. Sing.)
and Impersonal Voice. 1. The Active Voice <=
?T§%ft
(Object Fem. Pl.) ft afl'd I
something or is or is becoming something. The subject is the doer. tIM -jI Id I % I Mtii Pio I ^ni<4i I 3ft In these sentences THT,
ft sudd ftfft I
The Passive Voice
(Object Fem. Sing.) 6.
represents the subject as acted
upon. Hence the subject is not the doer. The object behaves like the subject and is directly related to the verb. e.g. The enemy was killed; I was called. Here, enemy and I are not the doers. On whom the result of the action (killed, called) fell assumes more importance than who killed or called.
The Impersonal Voice is always in the neutral construction. The verb will always be in masculine third person singular because only the action denoted by the verb is important. Though it sounds unnatural, a sentence will be like, ‘Sleeping is done by Rama / Sita / boys / girls.’ The intransitive verbs of the Active Voice undergo change in Impersonal Voice, e.g. I go (A.V.) - Going is done by me (I.V.). In Hindi: Tnrft/tllai ft/d^cbl ft/rl^f^>41 ft ftlqi ^idi % I
The result of an action will always fall on the object - the affected thing. Hence the Passive Voice is restricted to transitive
3.
'niqi 'flicti % I
verbs (verbs having objects) only. However, the Passive Voice
The Passive Voice is formed by:
is not much used in Hindi.
a.
In the Impersonal Voice there will be no object and so the verb will be intransitive. Sometimes it does not even have a
Combining the verb ^TFTT to the main verb changed in to past tense, e.g. XsTRn mini, 'Umi, f^TT tSTFTT.
b.
This compound verb will agree with the object in gender and number.
subject. If a subject is mentioned, it will be shown as able to or unable to do something. However, it is mostly used to express
c.
The tense of the Active Voice is to be maintained.
inability.
d.
The subject will be followed by ft.
subject. The action denoted by the verb itself serves as the
4.
(Object Mas. Pl.)
are the doers
of the acts denoted by the verbs. 2.
(Object Mas. Pl.)
The verb of Active Voice can be instransitive (TTR fttcTT ftfaT
Active Voice
Passive Voice
ftf) or transitive (THT Mguiftlai <su
TW xTRT ftftl % I
TTH ft rTRlftt infill ft 1 I
fthnft 138
ftftn ft 139
■nt’i
SUgj^S » Learn Hindi Through English
Sg^S • Learn Hindi Through English 8.
Active Voice: Subject + Verb according to subject in gender and number
13.
Being1 weak, he is not able to walk. 14.
Passive Voice: Subject + ft + verb according to object in gender and number Impersonal Voice: Subject + it + Verb always in third person masculine singular form
MODEL SENTENCES
1.
37^^1^1x4141 fl ohi
3.
Was the patient given medicine? STMl
'{HT d"bil it ^>75 R’le ^ft xjm’ciN aft xnioi I We people are unable to sit quietly even for a few minutes.
15.
c<4hh
16.
Oilfd^ltl <4<<-ha ebfq Hl-I 'dlcl I Kalidas was considered the greatest poet in Sanskrit.
4^41if rtHditi 44 hmYi d JI faim 'dim I Swords are not used in modem wars.
17. . 45lft-4>*ft 34I44HM 47 ^-ctSd Tift Jtsl I Comets have been seen in the sky sometimes. 18.
Rice is eaten much in South India. 2.
4>HyiU JP ^37471 4t4l 4
19.
47?T 'dial %f4> xlRHl 47fts-4tif 4ft f I It is said that there are no trees and plants in the moon. 44I
fa'41 -34 III ,frft (47471 ft % I
What can be done, my luck itself is bad.
Wheat is produced much in Punjab. 4.
4? TjtcT ^ftnf I This news was sent to him at once.
5.
I Hindi is taught in all Kendriya Vidyalayas.
6. 7.
‘IKtl «ich(i 4iT ^4 44T ^4 HId (^><41 xfllrtl f I Goat’s milk is used as medicine in villages.
ci5
it hhi 441 I
That Naxalite was killed by bullet.
8.
4TfTsTT 'fliai f 'Rfc4ft4777 ^44ft xTTt^4ft ftrft % I
9.
34ixflch<4 ftTE 4ft?TT ^t
It is seen that the very thing which we do not like takes place. 774 fcHd Mcu»4nf f I
Nowadays all subjects are taught from the point of view of examination only. 10.
^iHi'l if 7TT3-44f m fcitsfl «i^ I In olden days, books were written on palm leaves.
11.
^77
^ft x»1l«
In this climate even one step cannot be taken by me. 12.
177 «ii<, 4<si d JI 'dial I After eating stomachful I am unable to get up. 140
141
SJJ^S • Learn Hindi Through English
9URg> » Learn Hindi Through English_____________________________
46.
CONNECTING THE SENTENCES
Let us see in this lesson how to combine sentences like: He is my friend. He lives in this house. It will be combined as follows: One who lives in this house is my friend. In Hindi we use jTT for this purpose,
9.
I Those whom you consider holy persons are, in fact, frauds.
10.
11.
5*4i^ <,4>i'if'i^ }di 1> fci»5R 3iMi41'^>’frn’
is a pronoun. Hence it will change if followed by a case. This has been dealt with in Lesson 10. In brief, it will change as follows: ^ft singular -
endured imprisonment for the sake of freedom. (2)
,01^/f^
Now we shall see how to combine sentences like: 1 went to 'Srt piurai -
, RM*i/Rid^i
fil, Fin , Fji h m I
the office. No one was there. It will become one sentence like: When I went to the office, (then) no one was there. In Hindi, we have the following expressions:
MODEL SENTENCES
When ... then
3^-7^
1.
Where ... there
jTFn-'STt
How much ... so much
Riddi-addi
I
TTrTT % <Tij ifU ql^ci % I
The person who lives in this house is my friend. 2.
'STt uttsTT
How ... similarly
«hinid< UtTJT y im 1? I
One who cheats others gets cheated in course of time.
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
All people respect one who has money. 4.
2.
3T^KR7^ f I
incarnation.
TS (311<^) cftnyuiqi 1?3TJ 3TTHpftTt d"l<4i(l 4^1 fudcfl/ 3.
dfH fueim I
W cHHT7TKlTT t TO
Whenever there is a decline in morality, then God takes an
In which country the Ganges flows, it is Bharat.
>vii<
3T3T Tjpft «4<44’1 dFTT Tra iffa dl’U'l rPTT I When it started raining, the peacock began to dance.
RfTTH7T'’tm |% ^TOT I
5.
■^rn-itrn/ThTi
■'Sra T3R R <*ct>di % rra 7T3> TR fl <|d1l*4 d^f «l44 I We will not become slaves of anybody as long as there is unity
One whose age is above 30 does not get a job easily.
in the country. 6.
I One who has given us stomach will also give us (provide us with) food.
4.
Where the storm blows there trees and plants fall down. 5.
7.
LdU’l <45 4>h
4usn
One who has made this room dirty, let him also clean this. 8.
|| All that glitters is not gold. 142
3f|f3fhft3Tnftt xll^l ^nsft I Rlddl xil^l W3Tt I Go wherever you like. Eat as much as you want.
6.
'd'15 % ^Ti?T THT 3^7 5j*4id & I This the (very) place where Rama and Hanuman had met. 143
• Learn Hindi Through English_____________________________ 7.
gg§fs « Learn Hindi Through English
'dl?l ^li41 'fliil t? , ClVl 4*1 «hl fdt4(1 ch I
47.
THE USE OF AND RTiRT
Wherever wisemen go, people welcome them. 8.
'flfSI (1«*i 3tl I cl
d HI cl/ld 4<5I *1^1 *ri *M->H i I
As far as I am concerned, I cannot lift so much weight. 9.
d^l
ft 1.
fJTcTHlff Hehl I
I looked for him here and there (everywhere) but could not meet him. 10.
speaker are reproduced with D& (that). Therefore, the two sentences, The boy said, ‘I will go to college,’ and 'The boy said that he would go to college' would be the same in Hindi:
(TO> KRT W 3TTTT I As long as there is life, there is hope.
11.
cis3> 3 RiRTDeif chim'd 'di-Xdi I There is no harm if the English
rrrgf advert 1
pattern with inverted commas is followed, i.e., 7TS%3r>RT, ‘it
Take as much fruits as you like from this basket. 12.
For reporting a speech, there is only one form in Hindi, namely, the direct narration. There is no such thing as indirect speech in Hindi. To report somebody’s words, the same words of the
fatFTTRR3rl41 fxl^dl I
speech as found in English. ns3> RiRT De RR *1(4^ RTRRT I
As much money, so much worry. 13.
Sft Hl
14.
1?R f^Hicici RT Dln-ii 4>xi( xiisrl |f 4d41 <Jd4>
2.
is used as conjunction.
I am not so much rich as Shri Narayanamurthy.
15.
%l
The higher we climb the Himalayas, the cooler it is.
if sdMdl ^fRi RR TTeH URRTT|1
Did 41 ^4-dd> T^Ri cltsich RTO f 3R41 TTRi3TtlM4< ifc RTH sft RfhRTRf I
I know that he is a glutton.
Even a professor does not have (possess) as many books as a writer does (has). 16.
It is a very nice thing that you have come,
Dld4 '■jvi
3l44chl
3.
fR> is used in the sense of or / whether. (JH 'J1l3il3 D> dffl?
Mltl 3d4 RT7R RRT Riff Rr3 I
Won’t you go or not?
India does not have so many war ships as America has. 17.
Did4 Dd
4
f^R "^TT AgHM
Is it not so?
You become my guest for as many days as you will stay in this town. 18.
3m 3ei 1
We cannot say whether it will rain or not.
Like father like son. 19.
4.
4IH 3«l I
4 RFRT fR> RR R^ RTR I
rtmi
^RTRJR(t) 3Ml RIM (t) I As is the work so is the name (fame).
21.
fR> is also used as infinitive (to). 41
Tell the servant that he go home (Tell the servant to go home).
As is the pay so is the work. 20.
RRRRRiffRiR «<»>tl fRtRFft ««4bllf^iR??f I
(JR^TT«ftaftTt, 3m
341 RRftl
As you sow so shall you reap. 144
The most popular and multi-purpose suffix qim is joined to noun, verb and adverb and thereby give meanings such as owner, doer or as belonging to a place. 145
Learn Hindi Through English
gLRj^S » Learn Hindi Through English l.With Noun a.
about to close - gl^cucii
When =uni is appended to a noun, it denotes: one who sells, one who deals in, one who is concerned with, etc. If
the train is about to start - ui^l
%I
the speaker - sTIm^cucii
the noun is masculine with 3JT end, the 3JT will become T?.
3. With adverbs
T’PTT+c| IM I-iM i.
that which is above - Joucmm
4iMe|IMl - fruit seller
fcMcflcllMI - electrician
34&HRcirMT - paper boy
H-syflcITcn - vegetable seller
- made of stone
the house below - 41x|cHMi *fchld
fiUl^ciiMl - vendor of sweets
wall that is behind - At^Trft <{lclH 4. qiwi may indicate futurity.
Mi^dicni - cartman
- milkman
A cFHMilkmen I I am going to Mumbai tomorrow.
^fcl y c| | M | - policeman
dliflciiMl - one wearing cap
MchMciiMI - house owner
*j
MODEL SENTENCES b. The masculine plural form will end
1.
in '3TH and the feminine
form will be cucfl.
Will you (feminine) go to Delhi or Jaipur? 2.
fadl4)At^fA^MIdl4) cftl Father said that you take money from mother.
3.
cT?3jf^Jl d$ 'dHcfl I That actress says that she does not know dancing.
4.
TJ^t'^t %fA rel="nofollow">A 3TFT ciW Aft 1KT I
moneyed persons - Wclirl sellers of bananas - cl cur) a book with binding - Fiicqctirfl fchnici side lane - icict icfl 7Tcft
gnf^tinsfFfr-fe'SR^?
I am very happy that I could render service to you people. c. If 4 IM I is tagged to a plural noun, that noun will take 3ft or iff form.
5.
TTSfriftAcFT^TfA»KF
34|sni<{l ftvT I
Gandhiji said that we would certainly get freedom.
one with long hair - vfA cuci+cUMI-n'^ cirTiciiMI
6.
one with big ears -etulcuMI
sichi< A A fA> 3iiMcfl cisOmci yRT 3TctA% I The doctor told the patient that your (his) health is slightly better.
girl with small eyes - wl<TI 3fhst+c(ivfl ns4il-wi
We have read in history that there was lack of unity among Indians.
2.With verbs (gerunds) one who reads - MGdl+ciivii-hG'leiKu
8.
one who knows - 'jim^cuvii the tomorrow that will not come - H 3n-taivii *M the train to Pakistan -
AftA 3TlA V5T if fcPsTT%fA> ({ImctcO ^A 3TTtnfl | My sister has written in her letter that she would come for Deepavali.
^Tlft 146
147
SUggS » Learn Hindi Through English 9.
itfeK4ftyT dlyfl d
10.
srntrnfo^i Nobody knows whether it will rain today or not.
11.
chU^ilcFTebig
cFtsdrcfl HleB-Cl Rldcfttl
One who knows computer work gets job quickly. All people like the person who talks sweet things. 13 3T^ff7P7 cFTR Chretien eh4xu(| 3ll« 141 tt d
16.
SUg^S « Learn Hindi Through English
48.
We know that subject and verb have close relationship. If the subject is singular, the verb too will be in singular. If the subject is plural, the verb too will be plural. If the subject is a pronoun like I, you, he, etc. the verb too takes the form appropriate to that pronoun. Apart from these neat rules, in Hindi, if the subject is masculine, the verb will be in masculine. If the subject is feminine, the verb too will be feminine. In certain tenses, when the verb is transitive, the verb will be according to the object in number and gender. So far good. But what will be the form of the verb if a) singular
TKTMxll^lqirl TH «jx=il «Ft‘gfzt I
and plural nouns, b) masculine and feminine noun, c) different pronouns
Chide those children who are making noise there.
come side by side as subjects in the same sentence? In English, when
HltR HINU| ^41^ 11 The minister is about to speak (give lecture) within a short while.
a multiple subject consists of a third, second, and first person pronoun, the verb is in the first person. Let us take the case of Hindi. 1.
3mr ct>i4st>*< if hr rhrh 3tt^ 1? i
17. THRMdirl
RT hifcict> 1>?
7R 3TtT rT^nrt 3TTTJ f I 2.
Who is the owner of that house (made) of stone. Tft
20.
=0? elJldini eogTit 3TRT^? Where has that traveller wearing a cap come from?
If the subjects are human beings and one of them is masculine, the verb also will be masculine.
xitddl ^1
{R fTldi if I
The clock (watch) that costs a hundred rupees also works well. 19.
If the sentence has more than one subject, the verb will be in plural.
Two singers have come to participate in today’s programme.
18.
AGREEMENT OF SUBJECT WITH VERB
4)dl 3jfaTR 3TR 1? I Msi 3^7 cdsf4>qT 3TT?f I 34TH 11 3.
qeRld «smi xu[^i> |
If the subjects are not human beings, yet living things (animate), then the verb will agree with the nearest subject.
We (one) should never believe those who flatter. 3fh tttt’ tr nft i1 4.
If the subjects are not living things (animate) and each is singular, then the verb will be in plural and masculine. 3^7 'HSti? I editi 3Tt7 STTcft RJ 1? I
148
149
SUgg^S » Learn Hindi Through English
* Learn Hindi Through English
5.
11.
If the subjects are not living things and in plural, then the verb
adjective, then the gender and number of that adjective will be
agrees with the nearest subject.
according to the nearest noun.
VirT 37t7 ftoi$<4i «sil I 37ft ’■hM Hsi 1>l 6.
then the verb will be formed according to the nearest object. 31ft ehMsi iaftqi I
Pairs like M Id I - ft a 1,
irft are treated as
masculine units. So we have to say: (ft ’TTttT-'ftdT,KTf«4?d, (ft -ei |x| I - XI | x[).
ftft^trST37ftM41 <3(14)1 fft737ftft 37ft 31<3I If 4ftftor 777J is placed after the subjects which are of different genders, then the verb will be masculine. TST’T 37t7 ftoi I 4)41 ftflc) f I TT4, sfftrtTT^rRfttf I 8.
37ft7T7ft
In certain tenses when the verb is transitive and formed according to the object and if there is more than one object,
7.
If there are two nouns in different genders but with a single
The readers of this book need not feel confused over the complexity of these rules. They will be able to come to grip with these rules in course of time by extra reading in Hindi. However, when a sentence looks clumsy or sounds unnatural by following the above rules, it is advisable to recast the sentence or break it into two so as to make it sound normal. Instead of saying,ftld I 37ft 71*4 37lft f (as per rule 2), better say
Some grammarians do not agree with the rule no.2 above but recommend that if the subject are of different genders, the verb agrees with the last. It is to be decided by personal choice.
ftftTT 3717ft | 37ft TUT ftt 37T7nf I or ftftfT 37ft 7TK K^ft 377rt fl (rule 7). Instead of saying, 7JK 37ft ^KjfTTt Kt (as per rule 10), better say 7JR 'Jflft Kt 37ft ^K ftt '’Im 1 % or 7JK 31ft =TK Ktft 'KTft f I (rule 7).
7TOcistbl 3ft7 J«-5l(l Msftiftt 3tlcfl f I 9.
If the two subjects are quality or feelings, the verb remains in the singular. sETU 37ft 5® ^37TI I became angry and sad. 3743?) VST 37ft db^MjpJT I He (she) was grieved and surprised.
10.
If the subjects are pronouns in different persons, the order of preference for verb will be first-second-third person plural. ft, 37t7 7^7
tjr
74 f I
sft7 ^k "stt 74 Kt I
150
151
SUggfS » Learn Hindi Through English _____________________________
49.
SggjS » Learn Hindi Through English
3)7 4
SPECIAL FEATURES OF SOME CASES
4 87574441
77545754)41 1.
While 4 14 cm means meet or see, 57) Pern means become available
It comes after an object, if the object is a human being. ■8(477554 4*371
47754 Ihcii 11 met Ram.
It is not necessary if the object is a non-human being or an inanimate thing.
*P
JII4
I
Other longer verbs which take a it are: 375 577, MI«Pl 577,
cK4t <J*P clfj
2.
3$ 775 54 filcdl I Ram got it.
ynshirt «h< (meet), 41*41 «h<, 3l<;i 4>< (promise), -hhlrl 4>t,
?
Both 54,4 are used with nouns denoting time. 54 denotes a point of time (at) whiled denotes a period (during).
577 (love), ^1 (pleased) ¥li<0 mt, $55777 577 (refuse), WT7 57t. 2. In expressions like 37773)44*357,i’i) it ^-m, 4*4 *im, there
5$ 775 54 37757I He came at night.
is no harm if it omitted.
5$ 775 4 37737 I He came during the night. 3.
But if the noun is qualified (has an adjective), both 54,4 may be omitted. 5775 775 7J77 5M1 5>7 74 4? T77
4.
5$ 55) Hfft 377^?
54 is omitted when the verb indicates going to or coming from a place. W5)
3754-3754 57 (ehl) tip
54 is to be added with the days of the week and the dates.
Hindi has two kinds of verbs: (i) direct like 73757,n
If two nouns are connected by of, the of is translated as 37747-44 depending upon the next word (Lesson 9) in Hindi. TTrffSTT
7775377 54, mTx| nidjisi 54 6.
a.
‘I expect a telegram’ will become ‘I do expectation of telegram’.
if 5775 3775^57 37757 I 5.
577/4; /H?)
is feminine while
m) may be added to inanimate things for emphasis.
1.
3P aw is() M
is masculine.
1 expect a telegram = I do expectation of a telegram. 4 <777 44 TIcffm 577777
$ 1. It is used when the verb is 57$,4t57,''J75, hp i , (h M,75$/St iP
4 <777 577 $55)77 577777 $ I 2.
We respect them = We do respect of them. 37737 5774 fl (577 because 37757 is masculine)
if 57S774 f4>*f)*i •Up <Ml
$5 d-i4>l $7575 5774 4 I (54 because $7575 is feminineja
4 7573) 4 773757 ■’jtn 1 152
153
» Learn Hindi Through English 3.
Stjg&'S • Learn Hindi Through English
He helps me =' He does help of me. TOif +^tRRR/1
%I
g. feminine)
TOitit «5i«4ni wen % I 4.
TORR R> cftR
The teacher praises the student = The teacher does
TOT ifc T*R> 'gsft f I Ram has a daughter.
praise of the student.
vihci<|
rtiilgi 4>Trl 1> I (Rft because
3T&RNct> vJTR
Ri TOT RT RtR 1?1 Animals have four legs.
TO 3Rftr 3ll
M^itUjrtidsb feminine) b.
is used to indicate relationship, parts of the body, property, irrespective of the number and gender of the next word in Hindi.
RR/^t is used to express the value of a thing. TORR rftn TRR ^t stein - a pen costing three rupees.
KRR VR> nGj-i sft I We had a sister.
■jTTO TRR RR Rt?T the horse of the value of thousand rupees. c.
TJR> RTR i? I Ahmed has only one hand.
R^t TTOR TOT tifxlq 11 The minister has four secretaries.
RR/cfit is used to indicate the source of a thing or maker.
3TR3tRlft, d?
R?2R RR MRild a stone house
m-mi
^geit ^t Hlrll a garland of flowers TOT 3RJ^t a gold ring
4/to
a.
4 is used adverbially. R8TR 4 - briefly, - secretly.
if - openly, RR TOT R
b.
R denotes price. TOTORt 4 Pha} iTR
? How many apples
TO^^tRit a silver watch TJRRftRRT^t
will one get for ten rupees? c.
make” (Richard Lovelace) d.
That child was bom in a washerman’s house.
RR uldHH the merchant of Venice
TO TORT (if) TOT R^R TO ?
RTRTO 3uq4l villager if WK
Who was there at that time? fR Id41 (if) ZRTRT «i(5ri TOTO % I
& Jawaharlal Nehru belonged to
Nowadays tomato is very cheap.
Allahabad. e.
Sometimes if is omitted. TO TO TOR TORt R> TO (if) jpTT I
RR etc. are used to indicate a place or residence
Rft
^<si? What can one, who has no eyes,
see?
TO is used to indicate one’s age TO 'TOT TO cisRJ ten year old boy
d.
Sometimes it it,RT it are used to mean from among or for emphasis. ^R Micil it it 3TTR TTrItih % I
f.
TO denotes strong negation. TO RfT^ TO Riff I He will not (at all) go. 154
Among these fruits the mango is the best. 155
Sgg> » Learn Hindi Through English
SWffs * Learn Hindi Through English______________________________
50. PARTING ADVICE
Midi TsUdlft^ R«t>ini 'Aim 11
3ldRdl
Gold is dug out of mines. 1^3'ft'ft 3^t Rrtilvft I
1. The absolutive form 357 (Lesson 40) should be added to the Word concerned. It is not to be written separately.
He took out the watch from the pocket.
fft73T3>7, 737-4l<M, ft-d<M
773ERft fartl<M ft317377 I Carry the book from the table.
2.
Other examples are: ftftt ft ft, TTJS ft ft, ft? 37 ft etc. e.
The following verbs take er before them.
7733.
33777 77337 rely on, 33^3/14^31713337 - believe, ^3377 37737 invade, attack,
num - blame, 'jt-Mi si'll - be angry,
Mid i - flirt 1,ftd-ftl, xuvl-'UvH, 3 <33 I - fa <si 3 11
Hyphen should be placed before 777/^777 ^3-73, 3TT3-ft7773ft^
4.
3JvR3R37 commit atrocity. f.
In the case of compounds, hyphen should be placed between the nouns concerned.
Hyphen should be used in certain words to avoid ambiguity. 7^-77^ is different from I
Sometimes we may omit 37 .
5.
In pairs like 77^-33,3^-Hftt, USe the vowel rather than3. Ron*
ft 3773ft 3T3 (37)3^77^1
33,ftfft^,R?fft
I prostrate before you.
It is to be noted that our currency notes have the word 7733 instead of 73TTi
3T^ft3Tft(37) 3^7 313313 triftui I Great disgrace will fall on your head.
6.
some Sanskrit words found in Hindi, fa aid,
(lifted 373ft f^ctilft (er) 3773 7737I The parcel reached its destination.
3773133 (37)3?
7.
3ft, 3ft should be written as separate words. 3ft 3ft7T33ft, $ft ch^MIHltd 3ft,
8.
lift
ufft, 7773, 337 should not be written separately. 3fftf^3, ilfdidd, T7TH33T3,33777773,331^11 fa
ftiffttl
Send this letter to his address.
9.
Some words have two forms in currency. Both are acceptable. Some examples are: 3j?7ft-^ftf 377ft-37ff
777^3-77^3 §ehW-<j4>id dl4Ri-<3<sim 3733-3cf3
’sR<37rt-«i<4?rt 37rft-3?ff 156
are now in
use. faa'3, are becoming obsolete.
3u«tftl fatift stctiyl (er) 'Jim'ii? Where will the poor man go to?
It is no longer the practice to use right-slanting stroke below
37377-37^77 157
Wsih Appendix - I Si13lol
CLASSIFIED VOCABULARY
raisin mozambique custard apple orange peach apple
Fruits grape at'jfk
3FTR
311^1 3TT| 3TR an^spsTRT cfxi^d
fig walnut, chestnut pineapple pomegranate guava plum peach mango plum jack fruit
WtKT tfdlc^ ifcr
xgcT Flowers oleander lotus Wd’iV'PT?,
fetfw, ■firafira, riicTT 3?}
a<=£3 a^r *ik
TTRTT
ctd
currant banana elephant apple date musk melon apricot rose berry pompelmoose cherry rose apple tomato water melon thorn apple orange pear lemon papaya jujube, plum wood apple
Jjd|c|
MVI, "MHeft W
dtRltl HHI'+idt
Hl'KI rjlfd^l 159
lily bud pandanus chrysanthemum flower of pomegranate daisy balsam tulip rose marigold yellow jasmine, magnolia jasmine sweet jasmine olive basil narcissus prickly pear cobra flower myrtle daisy round jasmine
SUgf^S * Learn Hindi Through English
SUg^5 • Learn Hindi Through English q4*j<si sun flower silk cotton
friR,
Sdilcdi 3t1^
4*1 ch 3d *4-Met
Trees and their Parts
chid chidl rjsjfr
rir? ^5Tcr feolcbl 'jRT IF?
sid, SllOl ?TTS
•Ilk'Md
^T^TT, Mcdl
«l«jd
riht
sfr^rr^
«hhh, rmfh
germ guava mango tamarind graft wood thorn stone gum pine bark rind coir root conifer branch palm tree stem coconut margosa leaf holy banyan tree acacia banyan bamboo seed plum, jujube birch pulp mulberry cypress teak cactus
Vegetables 3Rsft
cat'll
ISRs^ll
9kt ’Tt'sft <«1K, ^iChcTl
■q-4Isi, Pifcl riritri
HMcfi
^61
itril
WR KPT
an edible root 160
myrobalan potato colocynth long cucumber pumpkin bitter gourd ivy gourd mushroom pumpkin squash gourd musk melon cucumber carrot cabbage cluster beans snake gourd beet root sour lemon water melon coriander spinach, potherb mint pumpkin (white) onion cauliflower cabbage capsicum brinjal lady's finger lentil chillies radish fenugreek yam garlic bottle gourd sweet potato turnip drumstick greens sabre beans
9R U? ■’thfcf rft
drains and Pulses 3R^
M’fl
dildHdi ^*TT ■m^ci Rl4SI, ft=dSI
HH
^ddl, 'AH'MM
KT51
yellow gram black gram white gram horse gram wheat field pea gram rice beaten rice oats barley millet sesame pulse paddy pearl millet maize pea pulse of lentil green gram, kidney bean ground nut red gram finger millet cow pea sago
Mbft, WT Hddi 'JlNHiCl
rikT m ci
hh<*
'rffc
PH VW? Mil
Iron ofKIh •vroH H0l{ HI'S
w fiptf fctf feft
Eatables 3TST W
^dlh-41, elivil ^9, 359
4>ldl (W ‘S1PT cUR
egg pickle ginger cardamom sugarcane curry cashew nut pepper minced meat saffron
TT< KW INCH
ftsl crh!
cTRT
161
rice milk jaggery meat clarifiedbutter sauce sugar butter milk, whey nutmeg mace cumin seed curd cinnamon milk coriander seed salt cheese betel leaf thin rice cake loaf pistachio almond butter cream gruel meat pepper chillies sweets sugar candy liquorice jam small mustard molasses salad castor seed bread butter milk parched rice clover wine
SURRAS • Learn Hindi Through English
SUjffi » Learn Hindi Through English w? stTTMT BKBt WK
tiid
crane goose, swan
HIKH w
honey soup yellow mustard betel nut semolina, coarse flour dry ginger aniseed turmeric asafoetida
ttct
----------------
~ ,l,ifen A nimuls
<£
<3 "''Ml WTriT <SK$I TOT
Birds
=bl<4d, ^3TT
fa^tr, tot ’tft’TT
■^FTT^,
tor ktcTT did ebb «Vjdl
k £k «lCf1<Sl
■^lyT
’frf $tT ■*kn, ti i Rcbi
bIk
swallow owl wood pecker pigeon cuckoo crow eagle vulture sparrow ruddy goose red-legged partridge bat kite chicken partridge parrot magpie stork quail duck, drake weaver bird hawk, falcon nightingale cock hen canary peacock oSiich
TOT
TOrs, (tok ■fe
W
■^3TT
^ddl
■stl’M, $k
fWt
TOJ, TO?
^ft4T
Sb TOK, TOTOTO
d^sbMl
162
riiror fmi
camel tortoise dog mule rabbit hare donkey, ass COW squirrel jackal rhino alligator horse panther, leopard mouse mole boar giraffe pony leopard hippopotamus antelope mongoose monkey goat tiger stag cat ox, bullock bear sheep wolf buffalo crocodile lamb ape hyena
^3R
f^KB
fox hound lion bull Pig elephant deer
Insects
B^BT Od'Hd pKtitZ
’’tkrc
^ffeT tottoT
f?0H4>dl
t
?fhn W fest
sfen, fro fero fd <-Hd.il
HPI TOBT, HildBI
♦iWl
boa, python crab earthworm bug chameleon centipede grain moth snail black ant ant lizard glow worm. fire fly louse leech prawn cricket grasshopper locust wasp butterfly cockroach white ant cobra moth horse flea wasp scorpion spider fly mosquito
fish bee frog snake oyster
USX-li
BtJH'Wl ^(©ch BN fe
JTfff & 3NT
parts of the Body 3PJ6I 3krft, silk 3Fnfk^T arte, 3Fpft TTSt afe, ^fc, TOK wr «+>♦«,dl{ ^kr cfrM,
^T, ®TR, TtH tsrNsl
TTrTT, '3x5 *n
163
N’t, w
thumb intestine ring finger eye finger heel lip shoulder temple waist, loin wrist arm pit ear little finger elbow hair skull blood neck throat cheek anus kidney lap knee skin nipple, teat breast buttocks face braid chest
im
SUg^S * Learn Hindi Through English
SUga^S • Learn Hindi Through English
faq
Rhk farit fit'll ZFT
t'""1 trffa dot'll
ffafa faa W
l§?r
dl^H FT#
Mtidl
teit fas yadl tz trft
'L'-bSI sl'M ?fafa fa?
Krai
jaw thigh liver tongue ankle leg chin index finger sole palate spleen tooth jaw beard brain heart nostrils vein nose nail pulse navel eyelid rib foot calf of the leg back pupil stomach muscle foot, leg lung arm pit eyelash arm hair eye brow gum forehead
mouth, face fist vagina backbone penis head bone palm hand heart
fafa ft?
fat
?fafa
S-faT
fefiR Diseases hydrocele blindness
farm Spjftnf, 3iM^,
3|(dtlK
chlHoll,
TftfcFTT
4>lcl 1 '■rcK ^•sl
fafa W
4*11 i rrfarra 4
Hehl
’Ifa •^cb
^ch'W
dl^d, ^TT ?Rt ?R
164
indigestion diarrhoea goitre constipation jaundice typhoid hunchbacked leprosy cough scabies itch baldness gout, rheumatism abortion whitlow dumb giddiness small pox dropsy cold malaria, ague plague asthma diarrhoea ringworm
heart attack sinus w stone nfat ■qyiyra, <-i=tr=>tparalysis elephant dysentery fafat blister Ttfar, fj?rcn, pimple, acne abscess deafness piles fever cjSR fistula W diabetes nfai? epilepsy fatfa cataract fafanfa? chickenpox tuberculosis wn, st? lame <^ISI dengue trbi-si «^siR influenza small pox ^?ld
English
PREFACE - cb'cftwra A language is like a flowing stream - Kabirdas
“Write a better book,” my mind commanded me after 1 had gone through several self-instructor books, tempting people to learn Hindi. Most of these books, certainly good in parts, assure the reader that one can learn Hindi in thirty days. I beg to differ from that point of view. Also I do not understand why on earth one should be able to learn a language in thirty days? What is the hurry? Based on my quarter century of teaching career, I should honestly say that one cannot fully learn Hindi or, for that matter, any language within a month. I have been learning Hindi for well over fifty years and there are still miles to go. Hence I thought that there should be a better book, a two-in-one book, which, without making any tall claim, would enable the reader to acquire step by step a solid knowledge of Hindi through model sentences and also get acquainted with Hindi grammar in full, without much stress and strain. There are no short cuts to knowledge. At the same time, some kind of promise by the author is essential so that the reader will confidently go through the lessons with optimism. As the author of this book, I assure that if one is willing to spend twenty more days in addition to the thirty days’ claim made by other instructor books, one will reap full benefit from my book. In other words, through Sura’s Learn Hindi Through English, one can gain a considerable knowledge of Hindi in 50 days, neither more nor less, because this book consists of exactly 50 lessons. Of course, it is assumed that the reader will devote one full hour daily (repeat daily) to learn each lesson. It will not serve any purpose if one practises these lessons by fits and starts, off and on. There should be consistency and regularity during the initial stages of learning a language. This book is a boon to readers who are serious about their aim and consistent in their approach.
This one week labour of learning the alphabet is well rewarded. The Hindi language is written in the Devanagari script. It is in the same script that Sanskrit, Marathi, Nepali and many North Indian dialects are written. Hence it will be easier to learn these languages straightaway without having to learn a new' script for each. Further, the Hindi alphabet has the same letters which almost all Indian languages have, including Kannada, Telugu and Malayalam. Therefore, learning a new script may be necessary for some languages, but there will be no problem regarding pronunciation. Learning a new language involves a lot of writing practice. Knowledge has to be transferred from the eyes to the fingers to make it permanent. Hence said Francis Bacon : “Reading maketh a full man; conference a ready man; and writing an exact man.” The learner should also practise writing the lessons given in this book. One can become meticulous in the use of written language only through a good knowledge of grammar. Viewed from this angle, this book will also effectively serve as a standard book of Hindi grammar. As the grammar of a language rarely changes, this book has a permanent value and it deserves to occupy a proud place next to Wren and Martin’s English grammar in the bookcase. It may be preserved as a family heirloom for the benefit of the younger and future generations also. Then there is an exhaustive appendix at the end of the book covering a wide range of vocabulary and serving as a ready reference to help the reader in the day-to-day use of Hindi language in various spheres of life. As a practice book to learn alphabet, as a reliable guide to Hindi grammar and as a treasure trove of examples and model sentences, besides being useful from the examination point of view, Sura's Learn Hindi Through English is a must for the learner as well as the leamed. As Hilaire Belloc said in another context: “Do not throw this book about... Preserve it as your chiefest treasure.” N. Sreedharan
Needless to say that before taking up the first lesson, one will have to spend a week in advance to leam the Hindi alphabet. That takes the total number of days to go through this book to 57 days! (v) (iv)
HINDIALPHABET Vowels a
aa 3TT voo 37 ai $ am
3T VU
3 ey <1
e
qa Sp
st
as 'n' in pinch.
a is similar to American'r'as in very. s is aspirated 3. It is pronounced with an 'h' sound or with a breath.
au
0 ah
3J:
nt is like strong 'n' with the tip of the tongue curled backwards and touching the tip of the palate.
Consonants
ST is very much like the English 'sh' in shut. It is pr onounced with the tip of the tongue touching the palate.
aha
3T
ka
kha
ga ’T
cha XT ta 3 tha a
chcha
ja vf da a dha a ba
pa q ya a sha ST ksha ST kha >3
® is pronounced as 'ng' in as in sing, England.
ee
5 ri
tta a ththa ar PPa qr ra V sha ’T thra a ga TT
la eT sa a gna
occurs only in borrowed Sanskrit words. It is identical in pronunciation with st.
gha a jha
nga 3 gna 5T dda nna 3 W dhdha na a bha ma
The sign'chandrabindu placed above a letter indicates that it is nasalized, or spoken also through the nose. Where use of English words with half open 3?r sound is desired, half-moon symbol should be placed above. e.g.:
sEwx.,
Note: va
In the vocabulary box in each lesson, the asterisk symbol (*) shows that the noun concerned is always used in feminine form and it takes verb in feminine form.
ha shra
ST .
za 5T
(vi)
ra 3
rha 3
fa
(vii)
Mode of writing consonants + vowels ka 35
ki fa
kee
35T
kaa
kha
khaa
khi
khee
73T
fa
ftt
gaa
ft
koo
S5
gee
ga a
T
gha
ghaa
gi ft ghi
a
st
fa
fa
cha
chaa
chi
chee
ST
ST
ft
fa
chcha
ku
ghee
khu gu 3 ghu
khoo goo 3 ghoo
kru
ke
kai
ko
kau
kam
kaha
¥ khru
ft
ft
far
fa
ft
S>:
gru 3 ghru
khe
khai
kho
khau
kham
khaha
ft
ft
ftr
fa
ft
7J:
ge *T
gai ft
go ft
gau
gam
gaha
ft
4
’T:
ghe ft
ghai ft
gho
ghau
gham
ghaha
ftr
ftr
ft
ST:
che
chai
cho
chau
cham
chaha
ft
fa
fa
ft
ST:
chchai ft
chcho
chchau
3 choo
3 chru
9 chchee chchu
3 chchoo
ft 3 chchru chche ft 3 jm
chu
chchaa
chchi
w
fa
fa
ji fa
jee fa
ju
3 joo
jhu
3 jhoo
3 jhru
3
3
fa
fa
chcham chchaha ft jam
je ft
jai ft
jo fa
jau
jaha
fa
fa
ST:
jhe
jhai
jho
jhau
jham
jhaha
ft
ft
fa
fa
ft
ST:
ja ST
jaa
jha
jhaa
ST
5TT
jhi fa
jhee
ta
taa
ti
tee
tu
too
tru
te
e
er
fa
ft
3
t
ttaa
tti
ttee
ttu
3 tthoo
?
tta
ttru
tte
ttai
3
5T
fa
ft
5
&
daa
di
dee
du
3 doo
3
da
dru
de
3
ST
fa
ft
5
ddaa
ddi
ddee
ddu
I ddoo
3
dda
ddru
3
ST
fa
ft
?
£
tha
thaa
thi
thee
thru
the
thai
tho
thau
tham
thaha
3
ST
fa
ft
3
3
cT
$
ft
ft
a
a:
ththa
ththaa
ththi
ththee
ththu
ththru
ththe
ththai
ththo
ththau
ththam
ththaha
ar
2TT
ft
3
3
ar
ft
ft
ft
at
ar=
dhaa
fa dhi
dhee
dhu
dhru
dhe
ST
fa
ft
dhdha
dhdhaa
dhdhi
dhdhee dhdhu
ST
srr
fa
ft
3
3 3 dhdhoo dhdhru dhdhe st 3 3
nu
noo
dha
vTT
fa
na
naa
ni
nee
3
HT
fa
ft
§ thu
5
3
3 thoo 3 ththoo 3 dhoo
3
nru
3
to
tau
tarn
ft
ft
e
taha e:
tto
ttau
ttam
ttaha
$
ft
ft
a
e;
dai
do
dau
dam
daha
£
t
ft
ft
ft
dde
ddai
ddo
ddau
ft
ft
ddam ft
ne
tai
ddaha 5:
dhai
dho
dhau
dham
dhaha
ft
ft
ft
S
S:
dhdhai
dhdho
dhdhau
dhdham dhdhaha
ft
ft
ft
st
ST:
nai
no
ft
ft
nau ft
nam ft
a;
naha
pa q
paa
pha
phaa
q>
ba
baa
q bha
P'
pee
pu
poo
pru
pe
pai
ft
4t phee
3 phu
3 phoo
3 phru
4
phi
phe
bee
S5 bu
3 boo
’?• bru
t> be
bai
qr
bi ft
tt
bhi
bhee
3 bhu
3 bhoo
3 bhru
t
bhaa
bhe
q
HT
ft
4t
ma
maa
mi
mee
3 mu
3 moo
3 mru
q
HT
ft
4t
ya q
yaa
yee
qT
y> ft
4t
ra
raa
ri
ree
q
ft
laa eTT
la
5 yu
3 yoo
3 yru
4
po qt
pau qt
pam q
q:
phai
pho
phau
pham
phaha
qfr
qt
q>
q>;
bo
bau
bam
baha
t
4r
qt
q
q;
bhai
bho
bhau
bham
bhaha
4
4t
qt
4
H:
me
mai
maha
4
mau 4t
mam
t
mo 4t
4
q:
ye t
yai
yo
yau
yam
yaha
4
4r
qt
4
q:
rai
ro
3 roo q
3 -
tt
3 ru q
-
re t
4
li
lee
lu
loo
lru
le
lai
feT
eft
3
3
ef
va
vaa
vi
vee
vu
voo
vru
q
qT
ft
eft
sha
shaa
shi
shee
3 shu
3 shoo
3 shru
ST
STT
f4
3
q
qT
ft
?ft 4t
sa
saa
q
qr
si ftl
4t
ha
haa
hi
B
BI
ft
paha
rau
ram
4
t
raha q
lo
lau
lam
laha
eft
eft
cf
cT:
ve 4
vai 4
VO
she fr
shai 4 4
qt
vau qt
vam q
vaha q;
sho
shau
sham
shaha
st 4r
4t
4
ST:
qt
q
q:
3
3
3 su
3 SOO
3 sru
4 se
sai
so
sau
sam
saha
3 hoo
3 hru
4
4
qt
qt
q
q:
hee
3 hu
he
hai
ho
hau
ham
haha
tt
§
I
1
t
tr
tr
B
B=
see
HINTS ON PRONUNCIATION
1.
2.
If a word ends in asound, then that sound is not pronounced fully, but clipped half. 3ra ab
RTR aaj
sth
•er ghar
TOR Qalam
RR Ram
to
R occurs only in borrowed Sanskrit words. It is pronounced like h but with more pressure, e.g. Shanmukha, Santosh.
8.
Some letters which have a dot below indicate that the words in which they occur, have been borrowed from Arabic, Persian, Turkish or English.
kal
■frrr sir
If a 3-letter word does not end in R sound, but has the st sound in the middle letter, then that letter is not pronounced fully, but cut short. TOR - kamra - kursi
3.
aam
7.
TORT - Kamla HKRi - aadmi
WIT - rupya
In a 4-letter word, if the second letter has R sound, then that letter is not pronounced fully. 3TTOR - Akbar +.<^.<4 - kathal ^rttrt - darwaza rtor - bachpan
iiw
- sharbat - tasveer
9.
5.
6.
- kehna TOR - behn
tort
rtrtr
- Rehman
? is similar to American “r” as in very. R?rf larayee. ? is aspirated 3 (i.e. rh [rh]). 4^1? - Chandigarh, urtto - Aligarh.
R is a hissing sound, like the English ‘sh’ shut. It is pronounced with the tip of the tongue, e.g. Shankar, Sharmila.
(xii)
- qila
- kh
RRR - khatam
RTO
- khabar
- gh
H7TR - mughal
RH
- gham HRR - ghazal
-z
htrtr
toVrk
- zamindar
-f
TRRRR - final
thel
- fail
- Azad
hrrr
If the next consonant is Ti, R, n, H, then the preceding dot denotes R; sound . WT to be pronounced as M**l, RRR as HTOTO =fTO as W”-
ii) - pehla frorrt - Behari
fihnr
The dot placed above a letter (like R) indicates one of the nasal sounds -TO n, n, R, n -depending upon the next consonant. This dot is called Anuswar.
If the first letter has R or ’ sound and if the next letter is s?, then that R / becomes R sound. h^rt
TOR - qalam
In common speech, people ignore these niceties and pronounce them just like TO R, n, R, R,5.
i) 4.
-q
If the next consonant is R, TO TO TO then the preceding dot denotes sound. TOR - Moftd, TOR - RiJRR.
iii) If the next consonant is TO ~s, TO TO then the preceding dot denotes ”( SOUnd. 3RI-SRRT> RTPHRTT. iv) If the next consonant is R, TO TO TO then the preceding dot denotes T sound. HR - Sant, HR-Nanda, aim - andha. y) If the next consonant is R, TO TO TO then the preceding dot denotes H sound, tot - Champa, - Mumbai, nnk - gambhir, torkambal, hru - Sambandh. (xiii)
vi)
CONCLUSION
If the next consonant is the preceding dot denotes sound, w - thfre-ttspre.
vii) If the next consonant is H, ?T, H, the preceding dot denotes sound. KW-sanlagna, ^fi-munshi, ^t-Kansa, Httrc-sansar. However, for convenience, sound also is heard-samlagna, Kamsa, Samsar.
Nowadays, for the convenience of DTP and printing press, the half-moon symbol is fast becoming obsolete. It has only pronunciation value now. = swan, ^t=laugh. Even here people are not very particular. Thus, se, t?, etc., are spoken and written as arret, 3Z, ^T. In other words, the Anuswar (dot) has dethroned Anunasic (half moon) in both speech and
viii) If the next consonant is^, the preceding dot is pronounced asH.W - samvad, trer(- samvat.
writing.
ix) If the dot is on the last letter, pronounce with the nasal sound of n. - nahi(n),^ - kahi (n).
clearly as it is. So, in Hindi too, words are spoken exactly as they are written-
Hindi is a descendant of Sanskrit. In Sanskrit, every letter is spoken
keeping in mind the niceties shown above. Even these delicate distinctions get automatically absorbed in our speech in course of time. Hence, Hindi did
10.
The half moon-like symbol (chandra bindhu) placed above a vowel indicates the nasal sound of the vowel. It is called Anunasik. - kaha(n)
in - ha(n)s
- ba(n)s
not require a Daniel Jones-type scholar to produce a separate pronouncing dictionary. In Hindi, just utter each letter as it is-you will be fully a nd correctly understood.
Note: The dot above stands for (represents) ?, st, vt, n. (e.g.^=^+3t+n). The half moon above indicates that the vowel is nasalized, (e.g. 35=^+3t). In other words, the Anuswara (dot) follows a vowel. The Anunasik (half moon) is a modification of the pronunciation of the vowel itself.
11.
The sign is call Visarga. It has the sound of ha ('Sj-ant: -ataha, -falataha.
(xiv)
(xv)
WORD PRACTICE Before going to Lesson 1, practise the following words by speaking and writing. While writing, try to draw the headline after writing the whole word as far as possible. In course of time, the hand will automatically find a convenient way of drawing the headline. 3TT- come
TsTT- eat
KT - sing
xft - ghee, clarified butter
KT - spread KT - go louse
touch 7ft - sir, mind Kt - one who
Kt - barley
Kt - carry
7^- thou
KT - was (masculine)
eft - was (feminine)
- give
Kt - give, two
ut - wash
H, HI - no, not
Kt - nine
KT-get
xft - drink
smell
Kt - sow
Kt - also
KT-or
xf - these
ft-cry
7=TT - bring
7^ - take
it - those
ift - sew
it - by, than
Kt - sleep, so
Kt - hundred
Kt - only
% - is
■jtt - are
3TK - now
3TTK - today
3TTK - fire
3TTK - mango
- sugar-cane 3K - wool
KrtK - sugar-cane KiK - loan (xvi)
ixef; - one
7K - defect
3Ttl - and
KT7H - yesterday, tomorrow
T^TT - letter
KI - house
KK - walk
K7T - roof
K7H - water, burn
- at once
3K - cheat
KI - afraid
KK - method
TrtH - weigh
KIKT - little
KK - breath
Kift - not
73 - read
KKi - throw
K7H - strength
- roast
HI-die
KK - fame
IK - chariot
7T3 - quarrel
KT? - he, she, it, that
KT? - put up with
3K - laugh
3TK7 - if
ifoil - at last
^K7 - here
i«TH - fuel
3U7 - there
AOtn - mortar
(iHTH - announcement 3Tt?KT - rank, post
- spectacles KtTK - medicine
stsriM - pen
- bad
KKT - hot
Mini - incident
tixlri - unsteady
tJTlft - umbrella
KKTK - reply, answer
$I’I3I - quarrel
Ztsfift - basket
337 - stay
jJlfibKl - postman
<55-u - search
df&KT - pillow
KT^t - pat
K^K - dowry
- threat (xvii)
HTP - polite thri-n - bear fruit
XRH - downfall - calf iR
qixFTf - entreaty
■^RTT -money, rupee
ds*i - boy
UTTI - otherwise
7TTH - shame
th 41 - cold
- turmeric 3TPjfa^ - modem
$ch4fa - thirty-one
slMrin - cure
t»ch
chW
yiHR - bug
fenUm-n - flicker
^■budtn - misuse
8RSRTTT - tremble t4Hldlf^
failHIcjfaf - prospectus
tmiqifaefi - chemical
- youth
- horse-race njb'Krft - lizard
- animal
gldOZ - at once
- stare
dUldfl - packed
- faltering
d ch 411 - luck, fate
yfadR - police inspector
4Hch?I - fire engine
qdtsIZ - mischievous
xRf^TS - autumn
richdglfl - woodcutter - sunflower
fclxlHlfcffa - under consideration
- historian
34vjfl4^VR - museum 3qc£tfnFd - Vice-Chancellor
- cot
JHHUIW - very hot - ungrateful
sxHMdqH - bailor
- vessel
■jrrarft - flower garden
- labourer
- discrimination 4MI4IH - transport
WKH - frilled
- kindness
3T3TR - often
- confusion
mVWTHjZ
- enquiry
W<WT - feeling
iltfMH - employment - canopy
fam (Id - on the contrary
- promising, destiny
- to praise
34l
3^Rffartn - indifference - nisLoiiccu
licbdxM - singular 3tlqx||ftcFi - formal - beautiful
chelae’ll - puppeL ’JHHjyrd (- bathroom (xviii)
- glitter
«IHch
(xix)
Read and recognize
CONJUNCT LETTERS - teacher
The Hindi consonant letters do not indicate the consonant
- Indra
sounds only. They stand for the particular consonant +3T. Thus is k + a. When the consonant is to be expressed without the
owl
inherent 3T, a right-slanting stroke called ‘hal’ (t?cT) is put below the letter. Thus we have
, etc. So one may write kya (what)
3iist>HUi - invasion f?37 - god ^413 - collected
4 - wealth
- flower-bed
533 - moment
- expenditure
as However, the use of ‘hal’ is not in much vogue. It is used with
335T - good
While combining two letters:
73T3T -much
3T^?T7 - goblet
Remove the vertical stroke (perpendicular line) of the first letter,
3?3R - rock
hcoi
3T33T - resting place
Tjnr - good deed
r3THT - sacrifice
323 - diet
i.e. the first letter will become half. 21=’ST, zr+t5 = W, 2T=r2T 2.
If the first letter is formed in the stroke itself; then only half of that letter is joined to the second letter.
3 = 33,
i?ff - student
3= 33,
3P3 - birth 3.
- thirst
In the case of letters in which, the vertical stroke does not appear (^,55,~Z,3,'3,3,7,'?), separately
and fully, they retain
the ‘hal’ mark. 3 + 3 = 33, 7+ 3= 73 7 + 3= 7?
like 7,^,'7,etc., If 7 is the first letter, it is written above the second letter, ^ + 7=
5.
When it comes after a letter having a vertical stroke, it is written as a left slanting stroke below and to the left of the
7.
73 - love
W - bee
- honour
7TTJ - nation
quickly
- grammar
3737 - veneration
^cil<* - verse
33737 - problem
7773 - place
- tongue
■^75 - short
- fame
sK,^7 + l = ^,7 + T=3
3TT3T77 - pineapple
H«3 - civilized
PTT^t- ink
vertical stroke.
£3T3 - meditation
feTT - box, can, compartment
3r7T -
4.
- butter-milk
3TRU - office
However, till recently they were written one below the other,
6.
- ungrateful
3TTT - child
or in some Sanskrit words like
1.
U? - planet
373 - action 'etirii - cowherd
When combined as second letter to T5,3,3,3,3,3,7 it is written
337 - fever
a«si - cool
thus below: 7 + 7 = 3, 7+ T= 7
Miti - lovable
omimk
3TT3T - peaceful
335T - solid
3WT - week
73 - secret
Though ST,
are included in the alphabet itself, they are
nothing but conjuncts written in a special way. 3^ + 3 = SJ, 7 T=sT,H + 3T = 3T,
+
71+7 = 3 (xx)
(xxi)
- business
CONTENTS
27.
PAST PERFECT TENSE.................................................................. 83
28.
DOUBTFUL PRESENT TENSE ......................................................87
1.
BASIC SENTENCES........................................................................ 1
29.
DOUBTFUL PAST TENSE .............................................................. 89
2.
THE IMPERATIVE ............................................................................ 3
30.
PAST CONDITIONAL TENSE........................................................ 93
3.
PRESENT TENSE 'BE' VERB ...........................................................7
31.
HABITUAL TENSE .......................................................................... 96
4.
PRESENT INDEFINITE TENSE....................................................... 9
32.
SHOULD - MUST - OUGHT TO................................................... 100
5.
PRESENT CONTINUOUS TENSE..................................................13
33.
AUXILIARY VERB - PRESENT TENSE - HAVE TO............... 104
6.
GENDER ............................................................................................ 16
34.
AUXILIARY VERB - PAST TENSE - HAD TO.......................... 106
7.
NUMBER ............................................................................................21
35.
AUXILIARY VERB - FUTURE TENSE -WILL HAVE TO....... 108
8.
CASES .................................................................................................25
36.
AUXILIARY VERB'CAN' ............................................................... Ill
9.
POSSESSIVE CASE...........................................................................29
37.
AUXILIARY VERB 'FINISH'........................................................ 113
10.
PRONOUNS........................................................................................ 32
38.
AUXILIARY VERB'BEGIN'...........................................................116
11.
REFLEXIVE PRONOUN.................................................................. 35
39.
AUXILIARY VERB - ALLOW ................................................... 118
12.
ADJECTIVES......................................................................................37
40.
THE ABSOLUTIVE......................................................................... 120
13.
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES ................................................. 40
41.
PRESENT PARTICIPLE................................................................ 123
14.
ADVERBS............................................................................................43
42.
PAST PARTICIPLE........................................................................ 126
15.
VERBAL NOUNS / GERUNDS.........................................................46
43.
COMPOUND VERBS..................................................................... 129
16.
POST - POSITIONS........................................................................... 50
44.
CAUSATIVE VERBS ..................................................................... 134
17.
CONJUNCTIONS ..............................................................................54
45.
VOICE............................................................................................... 138
18.
INTERJECTIONS.............................................................................. 56
46.
CONNECTING THE SENTENCES.............................................. 142
19.
FUTURE TENSE................................................................................ 57
47.
THE USE OF fa AND Wn............................................................... 145
20.
FUTURE SUBJUNCTIVE................................................................. 61
48.
AGREEMENT OF SUBJECT WITH VERB................................ 149
21.
PAST TENSE 'BE' VERB.................................................................. 64
49.
SPECIAL FEATURES OF SOME CASES....................................152
22.
PAST IMPERFECT TENSE..............................................................66
50.
PARTING ADVICE..........................................................................157
23.
PAST CONTINUOUS TENSE...........................................................69
24.
PAST INDEFINITE TENSE..............................................................71
25.
PAST INDEFINITE TENSE-TRANSITIVE VERBS....... ............. 74
26.
PRESENT PERFECT TENSE........................................................ 79 (xxii)
APPENDIX
(xxiii)
1. Appendix - I Classified Vocabulary
1. 159 159 160 160 161 161 162 162 163 163 164 165 165 166 166 167 168 169 170 170 170 171 171 171 171 171 172 173 173 173
Fruits Flowers Trees and their Parts Vegetables Grains and Pulses Eatables Birds Animals Insects Parts of the Body Diseases Clothes Gems and Jewels Minerals Relatives Occupations Building and its Parts Household goods Tools Directions Colours Days of the Week Names of Months Names of Months (Indian) Seasons Time Numerals Special Numbers Fractions Devanagari Figures
«RTT%? If? % I What is this? This is (a) book.
2.
i What is that? That is (a) pen.
3. This is a temple. That is a notebook.
4. This is nose. That is ear.
5.
t?
6.
tR eRTT%?
%I
What is on the floor? The chair is on the floor
7. The pen is in the hand. There is ink in the pen.
8.
cbhiyi %? Hfft, 75Tf? mifTdO! | Is this a paper? No, it is plastic.
Is it a temple? Yes sir, that is a temple.
10. stoHM 3Tt? enitM ^(■’17^1 The pen and paper are on the table.
174 177 179 182 183 184 186
11. The clock also is on the wall. 12.
ncbdl 7? I Union is strength. VOCABULARY
- a, one - pen (xxiv)
I
Where is the book? The book is on the table.
Appendix - II Proverbs Designations Administrative Terms Prefixes Suffixes Direct Verbs List of Adjectives
BASIC SENTENCES
T’cRcIT* - unity ^TT - where
sfa - and <*>uiyi - paper
1
SJJg^S • Learn Hindi Through English
gyggS « Learn Hindi Through English - notebook
TH - ear
- clock, watch
- chair Tjft - no, not - book iff^X - temple ■JT? - this, it tff - yes
- strength ft - in,at - that, it ■?T2T - hand
4t - also
The Imperative denotes: command, order, request, warning, prohibition, entreaty, etc. Therefore the subject will always be in second
i.e.
thou,
you,
you-respect
(g,
gn,
3m).
Some-
limes the subject may not be mentioned.
PTT^t* - ink
gjs used in addressing god, servants or children and in affecllon for mother, sister, younger brother, etc., or for expressing strong feelings like contempt or anger.
t - is
1. Words with asterisk mark (*) denote that they are feminine nouns. Then the adjective and the verb qualifying that noun also will be in feminine. 2. oRTT means‘what’. But if mT comes as the first or the earliest word, then it is not translated. The sentence should be treated as interrogative (i.e. yes or no - type - question)
■JU is used in addressing family members, equals, servants and juniors. 3m is the polite and respectful form of address for all, both in singular and in plural. It is used in addressing strangers and superi ors. As there is only one ‘you’ in English for singular-plural-respect, 3m is translated as ‘you please’. When g is the subject, the verb remains in its root form. e.g.
%? What is your name? %? Is this your house?
person,
ffjf* - table
Note:
W
THE IMPERATIVE
■snffa* -floor, ground V7 - on,above
TRF* -nose
2.
f%ilT - book
Thou get out -
«n I
When is the subject, 3Jt (letter or sound) is appended to the root of the verb, e.g. You come - gR 3TT3TT I You read - gH (n^+ 3ft) When 3m is the subject, TT (letter or sound) is appended to the root of the verb. e.g. You (please) come - 3m 3TT^T’ I You (please) speak 3m cflfcnJ (^tcT+ ^l>) | You go - sleep - bring - eat - sit - write - play - see gn^TTSTT - TTt3Tt - rTT3ft - 73T3T) 3m 3JT^r -
- frR^t - T^cft - HW I
- <3i^ - 3f^l* - friftsn* - tsifrii' -
W 3TfspJ, etc., are also written as 3JT?ft, *n?tr, etc., but the former forms are preferable. More politeness or entreaty is expressed by adding ’TT to the verb already used. 2
3
SUg§,'S • Learn Hindi Through English
SUEZ'S » Learn Hindi Through English
3TTM 3H^
'1.
3MMTJH5 MW ilRii^li I You please send a letter. The negative or prohibitive form of the Imperative is obtained by placing MH or W immediately before the verb. Of the two, H is polite but weak. MH is emphatic but less polite. Miff (naheen) is never used in Imperative.
!).
HM H WfT3tt I Don’t go.
7.
nftrft MH ^TT, MH HTT, MTH M^HtftlYou ascetic (Krishna), don’t go, don’t go, I fall upon your feet. (Mirabai)
8.
9.
7JW + 3TT (letter / sound) rJM TTOft I TJMTtsit I 10.
The following verbs behave irregularly when 3Tt or Th is added:
do
11.
3" eft nt fa3Tt Mitt
3TTM
12.
rttfal’ 13. rftfstu
<JMIjn> <jchM oldl <>m4 W>MT3Jt I Open a shop and earn money.
■3M^T3jt3^TT3T^HT3ftl
15.
You go and bring a table.
7JM 5*1^11 tai'llMg-il I Always wear khadi clothes.
W 3 MTrHM Ht I
16.
Take (hold) the pen in the hand
3.
smTM'ifuH fatsu^i You please teach us mathematics.
MODEL SENTENCES
2.
3TT3TMjWMH I Please don’t stay here today.
14.
1.
3TTM OSl(d^l) Mi’ll MH JlRll' i You please don’t drink cold water.
Subject
* 4t MM
MTiJMmMTHI Please always speak in mother-tongue.
Exceptions
drink
3T1W if MH jsiORi' I You please don’t buy handkerchief in a shop.
3TTM + (letter / sound) 3TTM til^ I 3TTM MtfvTT* I
take
g4?il TTW <m)ril I W>MtTJWMH <Mld11 Always speak the truth. Never tell a lie.
+ verb root
give
feiMdi, G>«{1 TftHMT3ft I Vimala, sing a Hindi song.
Imperative
i
nat, mtm xnwfwsft I Mohan, get up, drink hot tea.
7JM M7 MH ^Wt I Don’t sit on the chair.
Verb root
Pbcil ■’t^WTT 3TRT Wt I Give one kilo wheat flour.
3TWWT?m-3*RMHHtitl Don’t run here and there often
HJrTM it MU'iyi Ml Pita I I Write on the paper with pen.
17.
3TTM it HSHK WM^ flctufdH I You please withdraw a thousand rupees from bank.
4
5
Stgffe « Learn Hindi Through English
gWji • Learn Hindi Through English
3. PRESENT TENSE BE’ VERB
VOCABULARY - often, frequently 3TF5T - today - here
TR - do
cEH - yesterday, tomorrow
ist-0^ - buy
ralr-i - open
RTR - hot
’’TT - sing
’fhr - song
wheat
TST - cold shop
I am
TB - get up cEKT - earn
- stay, wait Th? -run
Gbqi
Singular
3JTZT - flour
TSR - there
<jM>h* -
acfniMcpIct
3JT - come
Plural
3 it
We are
KRi?
You are ^R^t
You are
3TNIf
He\
TheseV
She \ is
Those fare
It/
They /
1>
Note: 1.
All plural have the same ending f I
2.
To indicate negative, use It comes before verb.
3.
Though 4 stands for I, while talking, a person may use 7HT.
Pi m>i ci - take out
^-letter
Particularly writers and people in power tend to use tHT in
RtrT - wear
Tpft - water
stead of W I
tft - drink
TTct* - matter,talk
■qr^Tm* - mother-tongue
Tiff - here
TTrl - truth
(moi -
4. 5.
3TTQ,4,^ denote singular also if they are used to point out to a respectable person. are also pronounced as eft I
teach MODEL SENTENCES
- thousand
5*^11 - always
1.
Note:-
f jHmim din
4 aruim*^!
I am Gopaldas. 1 am a teacher. In Imperative, even if the subject is not indicated or missing,
2.
one can guess it by looking at the verb. If it ends in 3Tt (letter or sound), then the subject is you (singular). If the verb ends in TR (letter
^R^ta^t?^ngn7nnft? Who are you? Are you Ram?
3.
or sound), then the subject is you (respect or plural).
'31? Tift
%I
He is not Kishore but Rakesh.
It she Kamala? No, she is Vimala. 5.
Mg qM> if I
I
This is (it is) a dog. The dog is a domestic animal. 6. 6
7TT TTOT I TyR KuIm I We all belong to India. We are Indians. 7
StggfS • Learn Hindi Through English
MJgf^S * Learn Hindi Through English____________________ 7.
I IH >11VM IHcfi ff? <1
4.
7| |
PRESENT INDEFINITE TENSE WUTI WI yJHM wr
Are you (respect) a lecturer? No, I am a doctor. 8.
The present indefinite tense, known as simple present tense. Indicates an action in the present, an action taking place now. e.g. I <jo, You come, It runs, She sings, They shout, etc.
if 3RR, 3rara7 3ftr 3TF^ft'f I They are Amar, Akbar and Antony.
9.
KT
1? I
In Hindi, the indefinite is formed by adding the suffix KT,ft or 7ft according to the gender and number of the subject.
That is a white paper. 10.
WRT T*K5 KTT 3Tft''JTHT 7f?T 11
Then the sentence is rounded off with Kt,ft,ft as shown in
India is a big and ancient country. 11.
’fraftTft'SRl, RK
I .esson - 3 to indicate present tense.
I
Subject
Verb root
Masculine suffix
Feminine suffix
ftt ftt ftt eft
There are 100 houses in the village - all very small. 12.
13.
KRTK?K7 lairfl
ft .
'KT
KT
Is this house not vacant?
3*
kt
ft
KT
KT
fwMcficfl The lizard is on the wall.
14.
15.
kt
3raft ft wsi God’s in His heaven All’s right with the world. (Robert Browning)
1. 2.
VOCABULARY
3U4li|cf5 - teacher
3JTf$ra> - lover
^TKT - dog
ft> - of
KfFt - who
isnrft - vacant
ftra - village
SR - house
fewft * - lizard
WZT - small
mIMcH
- animal
KFe -
* - world
tVT - country
- white
JtlliR - poet ftt - hundred
RK- all
3. 4. 5.
O.K. all right
TTTMIUK> - lecturer
- but
RTT - big
ft
6.
All masculine plural have the same suffix ft added to the verb root. All feminine subjects take the same suffix ftt added to the verb root. All plurals, both masculine and feminine, have the same present tense indicator ft. The negativeTftt will come before verb. When Kftt is used, tense, need not be shown, e.g. does not go - Hftt tjTTKt I But if the subject is feminine plural and if Rftf is used, then the verb takes a dot above, e.g. Girls do not jump - rTsfftraf Kftf Nowadays women increasingly use KR instead of ft for singu lar. When they use KR they end the sentence with masculine plural verb instead of feminine verb. Thus, instead of saying ft KTTeft ft, a modem woman will say KR Tift ft. For plural also they say KR Krft ft.
8
ft
Note :
I am no poet. I am not a lover either.
UIWRJ^- domestic, tame 'JTHT - old
t ftt
1
ftXPR KtHpft I ft 3JTf7ra fttXff I
Kt - of course, so
ft
Present tense
9
SW<S • Learn Hindi Through English
_________________________Sgflfe » Learn Hindi Through E nglish
MODEL SENTENCES: Masculine 1.
15.
i xTW'ftcTT il 16.
foucbl v? fcrtsia it?
Feminine
<MTXU «lni i?
1.
When does the baby sleep? 4.
cRTT^Ti?
5.
2.
3.
4.
5.
They never speak falsehood. nif I
6. 11
l{4»
oldi xt? XR 3<1
7
oidi i I
jR«ii
M*ri
3jra=j?Ti
«lf|dT Hii UfHrfl I
eRT,tjm^RTii ejtsit*,
nit
ti My mother works in a college.
afft rftnxRrfteiii
10.
XTRJ xRFTT?'i 3TRRTxR?ft i I
11.
wqifitcbl 3H3^RH^ftf I
The secretary thanks and the people return home. 14.
irtfa 3ftRt
Madam, what do you buy ?
The stars twinkle in the sky. 13.
iI
8. w, 3nq^nisrftc^fti?
irni I
The sun gives light to the world. 12.
^r
Hi? 3T5i5T UFTO4 ftlHdl %? Is good quality butter available here? 10
it tsiirfi i i
We, the students of the hostel, do not eat rice, we eat wheat only.
Sitting on the tree the parrot eats guava 11.
w?ft wnxrRfti7?7ftt 3ft73Tmi7?ftti
Poor women do not wear silk sarees.
Those labourers work in a factory. 10.
TRHT rfbl HTTOTf i 3Tei5T 4llrfl i I
That old woman sells fruits and flowers in the market street.
We do not sit on the floor. 9.
ftrft it?
The fish always lives in water and swims in it.
cEit Hit
tr
xr
Sarala sings well in three languages
3TTU yltMrt jt y*4iqi 5t> I You laugh more than necessary.
8.
gn eRlf
Why do you cry on every little thing ?
f| We go to the shop daily and buy milk.
7.
i w««d nit xftiti I do not drink juice in the evening
311d H'fld tilfsMI i?
Does this boy learn music nowadays?
6.
r£R TRR tt 7TTR ng,-er 4 nxn HRi it? What do you do from morning to evening at home?
Whom do you write the letter to ? 3.
^arrt i i
The horses run fast. The bullocks walk slowly.
I drink tea. 2.
iti ihf itei i i
The cow grazes in the pasture comfortably.
The lady teacher reads newspaper. 11
SUgj^S « Learn Hindi Through English
Learn Hindi Through English
5. PRESENT CONTINUOUS TENSE
VOCABULARY 3HsI417-
When a work has started and is continuing at present (e.g. I
34l
3rxt$l - good - nowadays
3TT7TR- comfort
- sky
jftTH *- woman
eK'rft'Tfr - never - factory - poor tR
dlcd»llcl
- guava
newspaper
am going), the process is indicated by inserting 7in/7f/7ft between verb root (e.g. 3JT) and the appropriate present tense indicator 1|,ft,f,if TTT is used if the subject is masculine singular
cEPT - work
if is used if the subject is masculine plural or a respected male.
eWife - because
7ft is used if the subject is feminine
■grra *- shine, twinkle
To denote negative, Tft is put before verb.
xHHII? *- pasture
- graze
Subject - hostel
‘jttMri *- need
srtllcH - much
?J3 - lie, falsehood
THTT - star
#7 - swim
ft
Masculine
Feminine
Present
-ing
-ing
tense
7?T
7ft 7ft
t ft
U-^cTR - thanks
ifg - tree
ycbl^T - light, shine
CRM - fruit
rgH - flower
stxctl - child
*- old woman
suyfR - market place UcHsH - butter
iTxl - sell
- labourer
*- fish - college
Wft - of silk
ft- cry, weep
ft?f - daily
cUefH - boy
rfte - return
Llffra - secretary
7TTft* - saree
/
3TT
Tf?T
7ft
t
W\ 3TT7 \
3TT
7f
7ft
t
:/ 1.
All masculine plurals have the same ending -7f f
2.
All feminine subjects take 7ft
3.
All feminine plurals have the same ending f
MODEL SENTENCES: Masculine 1.
ff I am going to Madras this night
2.
■fn - laugh
^7% ft? What are you seeing above ?
3. 12
3TT 3JT
- milk
ffn - parrot
- sun
Root
T5T3T *- girl student
nieirl - rice
ersfiR^rftcRff wm Why is that beggar continuously screaming? 13
« Learn Hindi Through English______________________ 4.
3>tii 4*3*7 m1*
Seeing a 5.
f^ft
%i
’). Th
thief this dog is barking 33 f?f73 7f f
fiiRtu fayn fcprraT^ 3 Ptaiti 377 7ft f i Sania Mirza is residing in Hyderabad.
srm^n
VOCABULARY
Why are 7.
TTft 37ft 3TT 7ft % I The train is coming just now.
10.
We are writing letters in Hindi. 6.
Slj^S « Learn Hindi Through English
you always laughing?
iMlJl
3rft - just now
37T7 - get down, descend 3737 - up, above
7337* - news
Tsimi -
fei&i - shout
xft7 - thief
75: - six
3^T - bathe
■He* - drama
•il*ti41 - servant maid
T75 - ask
«F5TT - strike (clock)
food
dPin - mathematics
These pilgrims are bathing in the Ganga. 8.
'ftf tttf tTF^FTn
w? 7t tth 7f f I
Those devotees are getting down from Tirumala hill. 9.
3Tt4im* ’ifiira HdlH 1J75 7% f I The teacher is asking questions in maths.
- serve «Kdd - vessel
37F - devotee
3FT - part, share
Feminine
f3ou(l - beggar
1.
37^^737177737^ fl
777T* - night
nd in it - continuously
I am listening to the news in the radio
7THK - clean
TFT - hear, listen
2.
jd 3
- bark
3lft - traveller
7E7 tfl ft I
You are worshipping in the temple 3.
oil'll Mtlti
4.
dWlfl <47dd
I
The servant-maid is cleaning vessels. 5.
WWT^TftTfttl We are drinking hot milk
6.
3i(q «ud dff tj'i tfl f I You are not listening to my talk
7.
3 41 dl TTSf^FTT diecb 3 'Mid 74 ttfl 1? I These two girls are taking part in the drama
8.
Trft75:’^jTTTft'f I The clock is striking six 14
15
ttdici - question
» Learn Hindi Through English
ggfft < Learn Hindi Through English
6.
4.
GENDER
Present tendency in Hindi is to use some nouns in the common gendere.g.ftsft, Fhs. Wind) 5O1
There are two genders in Hindi: i) Masculine
),
ii) Feminine (^ftfePT). The Hindi gender system is partly natural (based
5.
on sex) and partly grammatical (based on usage).
Among the collective nouns (names of groups), some of them are always used in masculine and some others are always used in feminine, dset,
In the case of living things, we can easily identify the gender of the word, e.g., boy, father, king, bullock brother, man, husband, etc., are naturally masculine.
ftft?, ftn, 6.
Similarly, girl, mother, queen, cow, sister, woman, wife are
ftftRT, crten, ftftn, ww, vaft, w^jatd'lyi
But the problem of determining the gender arises when the noun is a lifeless thing like house, wall, pen, mountain, potato, etc.
fftTJ, 4>ld 1, ftrapu - always masculine xraFTsft,
In the case of inanimate things, there are some general rules to determine the gender.
- always feminine.
1.
f ending denotes feminine :
By changing the final 3T/3TT into 4 ftZT-ftft, Ml s I - m! 41 ,^RT-^iftt
(According to a research, among the inanmimate things, the following words which end in 4 alone are masculine: VFft, fttrft)
2.
By changing the final 3T/3JT into TRT
3.
By adding
By imagination on the basis of meaning : W5, ft?, are
big,
Hlfeieh-mfelOd
WH, etc., are masculine as they hard,
terrible or powerful. eRTT,*lleii,Rra,etc.,
4. are
learn it from our mother. is feminine as it is worshipped as a goddess. Some nouns do not come under any rule. It is difficult to say why any of them is masculine or feminine. We can remember their gender only by practice. 4TR, Rift, HRH masculine
Tn-wfl, 5.
16
iO-ftarft
By adding R (last f becomes ? ) tftcft-fttfftR, ftrft-ftfeH, RTeft-ufteH
6.
By adding 3TT^H uf^d - m F4n
7.
feminine
By adding ftt/3TPft ¥ft-^lt*ft, -5>
feminine as they are soft or small. '4TTT is feminine as we
3.
Odefi, Weft,
Rules for formation of feminine from masculine
By form: to decide by the last letter of the word: 3TT ending denotes masculine :
2.
feminine
Though living things consist of males and females, some are always used in masculine and some others always in feminine.
feminine.
1.
Jeq, ftu, ^eT masculine
By changing vowel sound d|4|et>-’
| ch |
SIJ^S • Learn Hindi Through English
SRfft • Learn Hindi Through English 8.
Some nouns have different forms in feminine
‘* fqdMHlg’i
cfff dCdclH f^isildl % I
Vinayamohan shows (exhibits) Tippu Sultan’s sword. 7^1, 9.
7T7J7-77HT, cT7-cP-{,
Sometimes masculine nouns are formed from feminine nouns by adding various suffixes : - she-buffalo
HI
I I TOTOT 31
This new newspaper gives fresh (latest) news.
'fcn - he-buffalo
7TS- widow
t§3TT- widower
TOT - husband’s sister
12.
- sister’s husband .
- mother’s sister
13.
14.
TOT 71 TOT TT TO i? I The new year begins from tomorrow
15.
I Today the wind is blowing slowly.
16.
TOT ?T TO4tfTO (TO) TOT I Water is flowing from the pipe.
17.
TO TO»t 3TTOH TOTift % I This clock often goes fast.
18.
TOTTOTTOTTOftt?
MODEL SENTENCES The cuckoo is black, the parrot is green and the sparrow is
2.
■gtrTT H 3^7 TOr iftST I The lemon is sour and the apple is sweet.
3.
4.
5.
I An aeroplane is flying in the sky.
Where does this road go (lead to )?
TsTTH'tf HI di ftridi t I Gold is available in the mine.
Why do you get angry?
19. 3TNchl TOf 3TOT% ?
H-Schtp rfld TT?ft ’Kdrl 1? I
How far is Mahabalipuram from Madras?
Three elephants move along on the road. 6.
G?"4i dl<^4 ^KIch^TH chfcfdlt’ f> I There are ten poems in the Hindi text-book. 18
i Sitting on the tree, the bird sings.
22.
TIT'TOT <*> i cfil Trft I This cow does not give enough milk.
8.
21.
<*i
7.
TO’TTrT $Hi
Wn - aunt’s husband
brown. f^tcTT stands for a general statement. It means ‘ happens to be’)
l c£ft 3TTOT3T 3lrhd 4)dl % I Sushila’s voice is very sweet.
TOdl^ - husband’s sister’s husband
cTTO - sister
TO xre T£T| I The bear is climbing up the tree.
TOTOft cT^%3^-»T^ I This lane is long and dirty too.
23.
3TM3T^nTOTOftt I The cat’s eyes shine in the dark.
24.
m^i41
TOTO^^TO^I
There are many springs on the hill. 19
Wi .fi .• • Learn Hindi Through English
♦ Learn Hindi Through English 25.
7. NUMBER
I The weavers weave clothes.
26.
rftt
era»r A noun denoting one person or one thing is said to be in the ■angular number. A noun denoting more than one person or thing is >«)id to be in the plural number.
i
The police is coming, run away (escape). 27.
itHRT
TsTTHf |
The plural number is also used as a polite and respectful form with reference to a single person, a superior.
The people of Tamilnadu eat only rice. 28.
I
The singular number is inherent in the base (fundamental) form
That old woman is cooking food.
of a noun. e.g. 3tgT,nsct>i 313,3333
VOCABULARY 3T^R - darkness - building
- voice, sound 33 -fly
chfcidi* - poem enough
But there are also a large number of nouns which look similar
- exercise
TT^T - dirty
Trfr* - lane, alley
RRT* - cow
f^R - fall
TfFFTT -anger
33 - climb
rtiyii - fresh
^3- fast
Words used directly from Sanskrit do not change, e.g. foHT, Wi.
a
few more unclassiffied nouns do not change in plural.
e.g.3RJ3JT, ^3T, ^7331, 3tFT, HTHT, - text book
Ui<^4
2.
- cat
All other masculine nouns remain unchanged in the plural. 31,«fc3,
bear
- sweet
HRT - tall
3^ - year
3.
RpTT - gold - aircraft
Feminine nouns ending in inherent 3T take 3 sound in the plural.
- begin
- road
33T5
letter do not change in the plural, e.g. *i'bl, 3TRT, RI3T, •ihi, RTRT.
P37F - to cook
- weave
IRHI-IRU, dltl-dff
Exception : Some nouns signifying a relationship with repetitive
- weaver
33 - flow
All masculine nouns ending in 3TT change the 3JT to l>. ulsi-ul^,
drtetit* - sword
-bird
Plurals are formed according to the following rules. 1.
3RTT -waterfall
- distant, far
e.g. 3l/3t31, 31/31tR, Rt3T «lci/*i)^ ^cd, si«$> Rlhdl %/si<^ Midtl $I
TsTR* - mine
fclfeill* - bird
In both singular and plural, e.g. 31, . In these cases, we can find out their number with the help of the context,
3JRsT-3TR^, 3Ttlcf-3lV(S, $t>tdH-?bcd*5,
- soldier ?3T* - air
4.
Feminine nouns ending in will end in in plural
KT3T - elephant
20
21
1T3-1T^, -"Il<4—■*UL*
• Learn Hindi Through English
Sgg^S • Learn Hindi Through English 5.
8.
Other feminine nouns take in plural, e.g.
9.
if ^TR '‘TRUT’ «rfMdl f I I know four languages.
10.
sif*gi Rieftqt/RSHTTTT't 1 The postman is bringing letters.
sign is and not if. 6.
Feminine words ending in ^TT take a chandrabindu in plural, e.g.
11.
I,1 -At I, fr( I - R| fsq |, I - «jR«<7
I
Ramakrishna is buying some books.
KMl-mmii, TFTT-^’iiy., ■Hirdi—■Hini'X, ^3-^3^. It is usual to write if for T*. But it form had better be avoided. The plural
tlHchwi ^5 jjt-aefi
«RRTd 3
fI
Mosquitoes sting much in rainy season. Note:
12.
The words cftn, 7TUT,^f,'3'^ (people, group, class) are appended to some masculine nouns to denote plurality but as a class : rTHT eTtn, 3Jl4 rftn, Uiechuui,
Bring two baskets. 13.
Among these, ’ThT takes
singular verb. As ^,^,3TTR are also used as singular to indicate respect,
14.
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
TTrT 3
2.
I The rainbow has seven colours.
3.
? How many ships are there in the harbour?
4.
U'di«i ifvra df^Aii f? 1 wft
7.
RTTT if TJcR 3^ Rgnrl If I Rarl f Beautiful flowers bloom in the garden.
16.
R Rt if I There are many shops on the sea-shore
17.
MtfRTR tfyt d^d I Bheemrao eats a lot of sweets daily.
18.
RTyTRif RsmI} 4ffiR#| I
19. tpjsifi>
1
Trrf^TRRSrRjRi^, ^RRRRRJ I In villages, agricultural fields are more and buildings less.
20.
I Many newspapers are published in Hindi.
21.
Fllf^<47I Kanchipuram silk sarees are famous.
Three sisters live in the hostel.
22.
if x4ci4| 1? I Boats move(sail) in the river.
■Jihn if I Animals live in the forest.
23.
R?TtyTTt 3Ttffrft| I This bird gives (lays) two eggs daily.
'*TRH if ftsRIT
'f I
Women in India wear bangles. 6.
I
Foreign toys also are available in the market place.
Five rivers flow in Punjab. All rivers fall into the sea. 5.
dWl41
15.
Tt^?t f I
Rats run here and there at night.
RT epf si^> 1? I There are many guns on the table. The servant maid is washing clothes.
cTFr is added to them to emphasize a plural sense : rftn, it TTFT, tTT cTFT ,3Tf riFT.
I
^nrrawif
I
22
23
I
SUgfifS « Learn Hindi Through English
SUgj0 » Learn Hindi Through English 24.
8.
I There are many countries in the world.
25.
■snf^n I There are many religions, castes and languages in India.
26.
I There are a lot of factories in Jamshedpur.
27.
dRIui^l^*if^< ? How many temples are there in Varanasi?
Case is that form of a noun or pronoun which expresses its relation with some other word in the sentence. The relationship indicated is like subject, object, means, purpose, advantage, separation, origin, possession, material, composition, place, time, etc. There are eight case-endings in Hindi 1. ft This is added to the subje ct only in certain tenses of the past, when the verb has an object. TRTft <snq| I
VOCABULARY ‘ ra^bow
3T5T - egg eER - cut, sting
fctHHI - shore
ehMdl - cloth
fxieJl - letter
^T- rat
*PTH - forest
- ship
aletj) - basket
sifft>4l - postman
HT5* - boat
Sift - religion
ftt - wash
eiftRIR - harbour
«HHM* - rain
eTTH - garden
- foreign
fftcT - available
It is added to that noun which is also the object e.g. Call Rama :
«JRT3ft. Rft is not generally necessary when
the object is inanimate. See cinema : Ri-Ihi ftiai I Tri RT3ft I
- garden
ftftt - agricultural field
ftdif* - sweet
1.
ItaH - bloom
Ran mi - toy
- mosquito
CASES
fart, take ft not 'aft. 3. ft It is equivalent of by. It denotes the tool with which a thing is done. e.g. They went to Karachi by plane : ft ft c+Ri-cfl Rft | 1.
It stands for ‘to’. I give money to Sita : ft ftlai
fttTI
"C I It need not be added to the name of a place, e.g. I am going to Delhi: ft fftpft "5TT Tf?T I
hHH
- world
- sea
5. ft It means from, than. The monkey falls from the tree : ft'R
ft^R - beautiful
Bharat is older than Lakshman : ft’3rST%l 5. '®KT This connects two nouns. It stands for ‘of’ or’s. Use ^ET if the second noun is masculine singular. Use'll if the second noun is feminine. Use ft> if the second noun is masculine plural or respectable person. It is also used if the second noun is masculine and is followed by one more case. R>TR7, tIM ftft uiq, eft <*m4, ThT fti V?ftl 7. ft, TR in, at. Reft, ftT. -ismi (bathe) takes it not it. 3 ft, aft etc., Used to call some one. RT^TT ftft aftftftt (Q wretch !) 24
25
Hsef), %
Sgfft • Learn Hindi Through English
* Learn Hindi Through English
Note: 1. If there is a case symbol after a masculine noun ending in 3JT, then change that 3TT into 1?. =hHti + 'S =
6.
We see with the eyes. 7.
nsehi+fet=fet I This rule is not
applicable to masculine words shown as exceptions in the
8.
3.
9.
With feminine nouns ending in it is shortened to ? and Rt is
10.
I
ffranft gRraMHd £ fed li ht^ f i
Father brings books from the library.
When a case sign comes after a noun it is written separately, 12.
e.g.f^tir
RTJRTH
?> I
We learn many things from history.
If case sign comes after a pronoun, it is joined to the pronoun, e.g. <jn+fet=
But V7 is written separately for clarity.
13.
14.
MODEL SENTENCES:
RTH^t^TRRRRftt
I
There is hot water in the bucket. There is red ink in the ink pot.
e.g. 3TTQ+TR=3RR R7
1.
'i'll fetid*!
The Ganges starts from the Himalayas. 11.
5.
I Please give this book to Ravi.
TR, RIX’ - RTRtfet.
added in plural if followed by a case sign. e.g. nsfe«ii
4.
3JSRTWfet R f I The teacher gives the prize to Lakshmi.
If a case comes after a plural, add 3ff sound or letter. ^R-VTt it,
3FRR
previous lesson like THIT, fttfT. 2.
TR 3TR3f Tt ^<Sld 1? I
RRT7pjfetRtftRFt^r ? Do you sleep in the daytime also?
T^RfetRRSfR^ift I 15.
Send Rahim to market.
I There is an old temple on the mountain.
2.
3tM4>rl arsqnra
I
16.
Nowadays teachers do not cane the students. 3.
RRTR
fet RTiR fJfet
I
17.
Throw away the rotten fruits. Don’t cut with knife. 4.
RtRif fem^ I There are many books on the table. TTHR7TRfi fRrfetRfcrft| I A squirrel runs on the branch (of the tree).
18.
MMrHTt won tjldli? I
i The washerman’s donkey is grazing in the garden (park).
By effort, man becomes successful. 19. 5.
shci*4 FlRR feodl % I Sujatha writes letter with pen.
i Delhi is the capital of India.
20.
Tsrra
i
The people of Punjab are by nature heroic. 26
27
Sgg(S » Learn Hindi Through English
SR§(S « Learn Hindi Through English
21.
? What does Satish’s father do?
9. POSSESSIVE CASE
22.
tI We talk with (the help of) the tongue.
23.
3ft I You boy, don’t run there.
24.
chflM 3Tc^vT R7T % I Kareem is Abdul’s friend.
25.
Tftrn^^^TdlH <1441811 I Sita’s husband’s name is Ramnath.
The possessive case is denoted by the sign R7T (of, ’s). It denotes the relationship between a noun / pronoun and another noun. 1.
Mohan’s horse RTC4 tffeT Rama’s brother TTR R7T 41^ Sita’s dog TfUl R7T 2.
VOCABULARY - history - squirrel <5Wd<- office
If the next (second) noun in Hindi is masculine singular, R7T is used before it
larra - rotten
washerman
If the next (second) noun in Hindi is masculine plural, 37 is used before it. Boys of the school RfrT 3; rTgifc Mohan’s horses W 3? 33?
wr - donkey
- student
Sita’s house RTTT R7T 8R
Sita’s dogs 3> j>t)
‘STH* - tree branch
Trees of the forest Jiur-i 3; 3s
Houses of stone 3> Plays of Kalidasa
3>
- beat
J^H-chR - prize
RRF1 - attempt
- bucket
RTjR - outside
TTRRFft* - capital city M’hrl - successful
3.
If the second noun in masculine is followed by another case (^3,^,^71,^,’3t,3, V7) then the R7T before the second noun becomes 3>
7
in Gopal’s hand 7ftWT R7T RT«T 3=3)4 IM 3> ^T8T 3 from the neighbouring house «IIIM 47T tR 3= ^TIM 3> RT 3 to Sarla’s brother <4<MI R7T RTf r3 = TRcTT 3> RT? cf3 If the second noun in Hindi is feminine 33 is used before it. Gopal’s mare 33 3)3) |
Rahim’s sisters <£)
To Ram’s mother 7TR 3) RT 3) I
girls of the school 33
an assembly of women f33l3i RRT
distance of one mile 334 33 t3
paper boat 3) RTcT
produce of the field ^) ■id'Jl
28
29
» Learn Hindi Through English
5.
__________________________SU^S • Learn Hindi Through English
through your kindness
murder of woman
31 Im4>1 <£>MI 3
’tft33 grill
dining table 73133tt
love of mother RT MMdl
9.
3rt3>^3 ckthtr313^
10.
RRTRiT Hlfcich cbld % ? Who is the owner of the garden?
A peculiar use of 3> is met with in such sentences as : A king had three queens
trgt
I have one sister.
I
i The name of Prema’s dog is Nero.
11.
rrh 3 3T«r i*et>n 133 rtrrt % I The feeling of unity is now weak in India.
12.
rftHT 3i SR 3 f3tr3 RRR f ? How many rooms are there in Leela’s house?
This usage denotes just the existence of queens and sister to king and 1. ti'hl 33 33t
emphasis
is
on
possession.
333^5 3>
Where do Hindi books are available here? 14.
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
13. 'SRRTT (3>
R>T RTR RRT3 ?
VOCABULARY
What is the name of Govind’s school? 2.
^ni«i RtT ■'grt
cbHylh - weak
1? I
The rose flower is pretty. 3.
- rose
^333R7 3tRRt I
f3RRTT - rent, charge cflUR - ill
Hifri* - owner
I
Hari’s mother is ill. Hence she is in the hospital from day before yesterday. 4.
I There is no ink in Rajan’s pen.
5
^¥t3>sr3^R^Ht| ?
Who lives in Suresh’s house? 6
'rTrTT cFT■’Tpft *0<5i 1? I The water of the Ganges is sweet.
7.
i I do not know ( am not acquainted with ) Radha’s brother.
8.
RHT3 33TTRrf3RHT^l33tt ? How much milk does Prasad’s cow give (yield)?
30
- pretty
31
• Learn Hindi Through English
10.
Sgg(S « Learn Hindi Through English
PRONOUNS
fdhR^ft singular
dcfoilH
rTTr
A pronoun is a word used instead of a noun. It helps the speaker or writer to avoid clumsily repeating the name of a person every time. The Hindi pronouns are as follows. Singular:
fehU cfi
[^>•4*1
plural ft \ I n r\ I IchUlcb
Suppose after RJ, ^K,if,it ,RTt, R^R, RTtl? there is a noun and if
, KTtj (rJR is singular in usage)
Plural : KF, 34TR, it, tift, ^R, RTtf
fchdcEl Terr
there is also a case sign after that noun, then these pronouns change into JH,3H,JR,3R,ntH,ftH,fdm,iifR,fe7fT. e.g.
RTt who (relative); RTR who (question); RTti somebody, anybody
in which country - RfT RTT R - f^TR HTT R
In English when a case is added to a pronoun, the latter changes its form.e.g. to + I = to me, by + he = by him, etc., In Hindi also similar changes take place when case-endings are added to the pronouns, as shown below.
of that man — d34 R7T-TH 341i from this boy - RK ms*i - JH riKdil - JH H in these rooms - it RTRt R - JR Rmi R - JR di 144) R the name of our country 4>l <^l =hl- jn^7^?i 471 - gqft ^>1 R7T
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
RRTH (cJR+RTT) RIR Wl |? i)n '41M
fI
What is your name? My name is Varadaraj.
From whom do you learn Hindi? 3.
nit ($+^1)rjrt^ (3+e6t)fH7srnft|| My sister teaches me.
4.
Mlni'rfl ^*4*1 «pRTTjt t» I 'jtdRfTSTt I Mother is calling you. Go at once.
5.
KR TH gctild H xtTdcR jaOdcl f I We buy rice from that shop.
6.
JRHKTifTnjn^t I There are waterfalls on these mountains.
7.
f^TtftRTRUflHftjfnjf3TT^f I Owing to some reason, he comes here daily.
What is the name of your friend’s father? (HKrft - girl’s girl friend). 32
33
SUgt^S « Learn Hindi Through English
SggS ♦ Learn Hindi Through English 9.
11. REFLEXIVE PRONOUN
i Your sister Sheela is my student.
10.
3l 4
444 hie) Sf 5*4 Hi <'chZI7% I
Reflexive pronoun substitutes or refers to a noun or pronoun. If we say, ‘Rama does Rama’s work,’ it will sound clumsy. So we say, ‘Rama does his work’. ‘His’ reflects Rama.
We have a house in that village. 11.
'5'T w Tf 311 m4>1 «rSh -Tft 1? ? Among these cycles which.is yours?
12.
si<*e< <4i?«l, flO jflfl cjGsu', S?RTH I
Instead of saying Si SlTR7
Doctor, please look at (examine) my tongue and my teeth.
3TRHT gives the same meaning of RJT-^fc-3mdl has three forms :
Sft Wftjft Hldchl 3 ehtrfl f |
3tMdl-31U'|-3<M'fi
13.
In Hindi 3JRHT is used as reflexive pronoun in such cases.
My brother’s wife acts in dramas. 14.
jh
^df^d Rtflt ^rsff
Use 3TflS if the next noun is masculine plural or respectable person.
fI
Use 3Rpft if the next noun is feminine.
There are beautiful bangles in both the hands of the bride. 16.
Use 3JUR if the next noun is masculine and is followed by a
RTR7T RRTRflT
case sign.
What is your house (residential) address? 17.
RfRRIRRrRRRRRRnRt?
E.g. My name (is Ram) - Sfd-RTT RTF - Stt RTF
In which office does he work?
I (write) my name Si Si +RR din - Si SnRTF - S 34Mdl RTF
18.
Rif S Wtft % ?
(i.e. My reflects I)
In which class does Pavitra study? 19.
MODEL SENTENCES
? Where is the door of this fort (situated)?
20.
RTt SfeRf RtRHZit flff | One who barks does not bite. (Barking dogs seldom bite)
21.
id i we must say Si 3TflHTRt 'flidi I As
Use 3JRHT if the next noun is masculine singular
^544) r<{l irioit I
You write faster than me (than I do) 15.
ji
-^fr KTRH i TTt 7JTTR?T | I One who sleeps (much) loses.
VOCABULARY 3jfSfRR - acting Rlqd - rice
cfr>l
jftfl* - tongue
RRlf - class, grade
jdf^d* - bride
HTfl - name
- call
flTflt* - brother’s wife 34
1.
d\dId 3Ttpft Rift chHdi RR <^ni % I Nandalal gives his watch to Kamala.
2.
3TFRRRTtSRt^il Father sleeps in his room.
3.
Si 3m4l I write with my pen.
4.
3FTRTRT3 MddI % I Yogesh reads his lesson.
5.
3tmft siGH RTT 'JiMI % l Hari takes his sister to school.
6.
34g.1l R7 dffl I They do not sell their house.
fshdi - fort ^d{l - quickly RTR - tooth RKT - address
35
SUgj^S « Learn Hindi Through English
SjggfS » Learn Hindi Through English
7.
12. ADJECTIVES
3m J
it W
1? I
All people love their country. 8.
34m41 tr
i? i
An adjective is a word which qualifies a noun, a pronoun or .mother adjective. In ‘blue sky,’ ‘angry sea,’ blue and angry are adjectives. In the line, “The woods are lovely, dark and deep,” the words lovely, dark, deep are adjectives as they say something special about the noun ‘woods’.
Ramya sits on her chair. 9. I am popular in my office. 10.
7JR 3FT4 ■dlxlI'jTl eftt ^rfT3rt |
Generally an adjective says something about the quality (3i^«i,
You call your uncle. 11.
•I l<4 34'4’f
quantity
rjU % |
The cow gives milk to its calf. 12.
wrtft 3rt4
If e g.
did I tlH 3RRn^HH3m4i
I
Totaram gives his pay to his wife. 14.
lUehl
rftZFtf I
The labourers return to their homes in the evening. 15.
3m H TH (Rd) ^tVTdd^t -Jinn11
(ttTET),
state
or
condition
is attached to an adjective, it intensifies the idea, cblH,
jmvTI-Tft
ns4?l
According to the last letter of the word the adjectives in Hindi are of two kinds: 1.
those ending in 3T1-34,otsi,<*>iviI,wlai,
2.
those ending in other letters - RRT,
i
An adjective ending in 3TT can qualify only a masculine singular
Man does not know what is in his mind. 16.
number
(3^T,41MR) of a noun or merely points out
wi i i
The peon salutes his officer. 13.
(^|7T),
noun. If the noun is feminine, 3TT will become
TfhrT3n4^qi«ftT^t i
If the noun is masculine plural or a respectable person, then
Meera is washing her clothes.
3JT will become
17. Ahmed lives in his brother’s house in Allahabad Sim I M1 <5 <413 Tj?T T I
18.
If the masculine singular is followed by a case sign then also 3TT becomes However, the following adjectives ending in 3TT do not change at all: 7TRT, mRm1,
Jacob is memorizing his lesson. 19.
Mum witm 1R u i vi 3m-i i dmR'i J^<s( nd in 1I
20.
t|
Kalyanram celebrates his birthday every year very well. 3tMdl tJU cidd Tf ^RTT cfitrlI ^1
I deposit my full pay in the bank.
TR^T, 5^941
good boy - 3T6t5T ns*i
masculine singular
good girl - 3T^t
feminine singular
good girls - 3T6t31 visR>4T
feminine plural
good boys - 3T£t5 nsi
masculine plural
good leader - 3T€^HrTT
masculine respect
to the good boy - 3Tctj cHl
noun followed by case
VOCABULARY 31fym>id - officer chHti - room ■enxn - uncle Rvft* - wife ®R55T - calf - salary - in the evening 36
MMtitfl - peon WR - love TRdTR - salute
All other adjectives ending in any other letter do not change whether they qualify a masculine or feminine noun or a singular or plural noun. 37
SgffS • Learn Hindi Through English
Sgf^S • Learn Hindi Through English 437 eisctu - handsome boy - masculine singular iTPT ^TRT - hot tea - feminine singular
77173 Hf^TT 3rf4m |1 The rivers of south India are not very deep.
13. 14.
- ugly buildings - feminine plural 7TFT - poor people - masculine plural h4><1
Whose is this new house?
441 777773 TWI
15.
R7 - on white paper - noun followed by case 16.
77KT ni-jf 37% faritl % 1 Fresh eggs are available here in the morning.
17.
377
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
, tmT erg r 11 • Sudha is a little girl, but she is clever.
2.
Tj?
XT?T5
*xj| % |
% 77737 % 1
The minister always travels in the first class.
37T^4t 3TT VTT17 TERyTR %1
The body of that patient is weak. 18.
"37^ 7Tm •jF^cfici yl«
This mountain is high. 3.
3^4441 ^IRri'^UIdlrld t I That yellow building is the court.
19.
377>77777 % WlRa 413H Blrldl 11 Tasty food is available in that restaurant.
4.
'4773 m 7RR4% KT3 if I Towns in India are dirty.
20.
Tjm Arft <1)41 ms',hi % l Hamid wears a dirty cap.
5.
^gg^rtsiRi ur-fi chi j dffi ifidi i Nobody drinks the salty water of the sea.
21.
4141 t1 Gold is costlier than silver.
6.
^7? 37417 hG?cii ^>41m3 ehU^ Hlft UfHdl I That rich woman never wears torn clothes.
7.
Tftrn 4441 77141 -ft rrr?4r 11 Leela wants blue saree only.
8.
dfarH
ynxfci f i
There are many ancient temples in Tamilnadu. 9.
R’4i wnti Hindi is an easy language.
10.
4nTmTUi4177im3ft7nferti The water of the Ganges is clean and holy.
11. 12.
VOCABULARY 37477 - rich
34in 14 - easy
35377 - high, tall
o<±el - sour
7377T- salty
’TfRT - deep
xfr^t *- silver
377?!* - desire
yt«U4* - language
4141* - hat
41^ - lemon
•Beil - blue
•^Idlviy - court
nfcia - holy
d^cil - first
41<*f7- yellow
Mlxfl4 - ancient
m3T - tom
44777 - ill
41^4 - food
7747 - but
hGscH*-
- broken
4cTT
- dirty
woman
7TWH %> 4 ^41 77%t 11 <7? mil % I Ramdas has a broken watch in his hand. It is a foreign watch.
■gfWrf -difficult
777377* - travel
7J3R?*- morning
4^ - apple
77137 - gold
WlRa - tasty
7fa 4T3T mrT %, <4(4>4 4t^oeei met % I Apple is a sweet fruit but lemon is sour.
7147 - body
44^7377 - clever
38
39
• Learn Hindi Through English
13. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES
SlJggfS * Learn Hindi Through English 6.
The superlative degree is also expressed sometimes by the use of *t.
In English, the adjectives undergo certain changes in the comparative and superlative degrees, like, good-better-best, bigbigger-biggest. In Hindi, there is no such change in the form. 1.
In Hindi, the comparative degree (jtHIcH-STT) is formed by putting it (than) after the person or thing with which the
■jflTfh Hylsjd % I This is the strongest of these palaces.
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
Trivikram is the tallest boy in the class.
comparison is made.
Water of the river is the best for health.
My pen is better than your pen. 3.
it %1
In the place of it some times ^t 3rt3TT or ^t ^fa^Wd is used. The degree of comparison can be modified by putting before the adjective words like 31fs^,^idl,^R,«4
4.
The superlative degree (wiTraWT) is formed by putting watt (of all) before the adjective. ehHni M'Mtt
ns«fa % I
4.
6.
Twit‘flUld %I
ihii4I
1
The Ganges is the holiest of all the rivers. 9.
When the noun compared is not mentioned, the adjective is
10. 11.
the worst man
it sr^t't 1
IfllOficE
«kddH ijldlll
From physical point of view, man is stronger than woman. THT^t 3jit$nfilfai4R% I As compared to Ram, Rahim is cleverer.
the best man the heaviest stone
ih
Prevention is better than cure.
repeated, putting it between them, to express the superlative degree.
it
Swimming is the most beneficial exercise.
Radha is the tallest of all women.
Tt ■RrSR
MQini 751
Gopal is shorter in height than Ram.
8.
TTO7 THT sftwt it vhft 11
3Tc&it 313nq4)
I
it yJTcbC’i ^HT I can do even the toughest work.
Jiyaram is the worst student.
5.
*1 iqw ^t mil
5.
7.
1? I
'11^1 it HtI tin J) % |
An intelligent foe is better than a foolish friend.
Kamala is the most beautiful girl. falMUIH
Rfl '5>R
My car runs faster than your vehicle.
This room is larger than that room.
3.
’T^tw Ui41 4tih 51
2.
irft fhClH j^ld it % |
2.
w"<s|l
12.
^t srfarsra nfeT 141 n^d 11 Compared to the donkey, the horse is stronger.
the fattest cow 40
41
• Learn Hindi Through English
StJgl0 * Learn Hindi Through English
14. ADVERBS
13. til'll ft H^'ll I Gold is a lot costlier than silver. Home-made sweet is much sweeter than the sweet prepared in shop. 15.
i%'l Mlil ^75: <Jdl xrqi^l
An adverb is a word that modifies or qualifies a verb. In other words, it indicates how a verb (action) is done. An adverb may indicate the time or place or manner or degree (amount) of action, with reference to a verb.
Blood is six times thicker than water. 16.
Some examples:
chH7sl4fenil
Time : 3TFX, Tirf, ftyl, 'STS if, Tfift, 3T^, TT,
Village life is less expensive than town life. 17.
Place :
■Sf3Tcl^T^I^3T^^3T€^f^T3T^^ft?
3TT4, 1ft^, THT, ^7, mR"), ^Pf, 3717, TTP, <41^4
Manner : Jiwich, 4t£Ri, 'dvil, tfft,
1 am an old man now. Where are my best days now?
^ff, stPiyi,
3
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
chicn if 37T777 Tpft «Htlrtl % I It rains often in Kerala.
2.
Hldl4) 37«ftfrit^777
3.
3n'Jict>n fenjdisff 37^t T75Tiff TTHI Nowadays students do not read well.
4.
^RiIhi \fmic;i 1>
I ^7? They see films much. This is not at all good.
5.
TRT T14t TTTlfl Tift itrn I Ramesh never drinks coffee.
42
43
SU^ffS • Learn Hindi Through English
SUggS • Learn Hindi Through English
6.
M vjilrfi % I My sister goes to cinema only sometimes.
I have only headache. That too is one sided.
7.
=F>T ^rft % ? Why does that cow give less milk?
The naughty boys are ringing the bell loudly.
8.
I Go away from here quickly.
9.
^0? Pidgin % I This is perfectly all right.
10.
22. Where are you going? I am just going (for no reason).
VOCABULARY
3JT^7sTT^f | The people of North India eat potato daily.
daftl* - progress
- less
oci’iiMeb - villain
^7^- late
Horses are running fast in the ground. 12.
3^- potato
yfa - loudly
I
11.
3Tsff* - petition
I
Ramprakash gives rent late every month.
- sleep - just, thus
TfR - north fihtiMi - rent
tsitJl * - cough TjTrf - at once - slowly - to rain - headache
Our villages are making progress gradually. 14.
'5J3 qlnrfl % | This servant-maid always tells lies.
15.
4,HUI 7Td *47 Htfl 3
Due to cough, I do not get sleep throughout night. 16.
Rlci^R The squirrel runs here and there.
17.
si'jHi %? Where does Anjana stay in Delhi?
18.
tsicHHcb yihfr-gwlI In films the villain laughs loudly.
19.
TpT ept 7J7HTT3H 3Tyft fwo'l I You write an application to the officer immediately.
20.
11
i»cbd
44
45
- bell ^TR - ready Heise - naughty - completely - at all
Sg^S • Learn Hindi Through English
• Learn Hindi Through English
15. VERBAL NOUNS / GERUNDS finite In the expression, “ Seeing is believing,” seeing and believing are nouns. As they are formed from verbs, they are called verbal nouns. In Hindi, verbal noun is formed by adding HT to the root of the
/.
By seeing cinema we get headache. 8.
344314
9.
>-j3trnrfa CMI514 mwi -sffaa % I It is not proper to celebrate festivals with pomp.
As the verbal nouns end in 3TT, this 3JT will change into TJ
10.
by eating out +^-TTHTt for reading
11.
«,ci4i'fl H
12.
‘IMtfl <*>4dl *4^«4 «hl
Devraj does not know reading and writing.
'fan’ - 339 3? fvH’
for saying <*>5'4i+3jt -
37t
13.
5C«4I Q?4dl3T3%, 3tj^3fafa^T^3fa 3fa BHHI fa)4dl %l
14.
tfaTT37farm ^f^3>rlf I
in going
Murder is a sin but to kill enemies in war is heroism.
on return rfli'ii+37 - nle-) Hl
It is difficult to get such a house.
MODEL SENTENCES ^5 ^infl aa-n 3T5UT % I
-2-
Getting up early in the morning is good.
The infinitive (to + verb) also is expressed by verbal nouns.
rflrll HMdl 'dMrfil I
It is good to walk, walking is good - both should be translated as <J5tddl 3TEUT % I
Leela knows dancing. *i444<1
1.
Doing exercise is a good habit. 4.
373H7 ’’fru 3tt % i
2.
443 3lrl^'43brldl farlrflt I
33 fa *4^*3
331 333 ei^M Cbldl 'Hud f> ? Do you know how to type?
3.
By speaking truth we get success. 6.
fawnfafalrHI xll^dl ~ti I want to speak in the meeting.
Drinking coffee often is bad. 5.
I 8T3T 3>
To err is human, to forgive divine.
of coming 3THT+37T - 3TT93>T
3.
HcfK cbtdi 34144H 31ft fa I
It is not easy to ride a horse.
sound if it is followed by a case-ending (311,^,33,etc.)
2.
fa 5*4333 en 11? I
Our knowledge increases by reading newspaper.
verb. e.g.
1.
ffa fa *4I ^4S4 fa 1444^^5 5^411 % I
«Hdl % I
A man becomes famous by giving alms.
46
fa 4>H 3MUI 'BHdl I I do not know how to drive a car.
4.
31? 34 in til ns«t»i 4<j>n
31?t
i' |
That lazy boy does not want to go to school. 47
SUgg^S « Learn Hindi Through English_____________________________
__________________________ SjJj^S « Learn Hindi Through English
5.
4.
'J’T 3 cRT
"iff?
311-01
What do you want to become in the future? 6.
FIT J’-Slfl FTK7 <3Hl «MMI Mti<; chicfl % ?
iff 'q? (=Ff) 3THT I
Please do come to my house this evening 5.
3T6^^w43jnn-4fi5T^^n i
Does your sister like to cook?
Do not hesitate in doing a good deed.
-3The word, ‘for’ in expressions like for coming, for going, for reading, etc., are translated by fch’. Though is not a case
-5The case-ending is often dropped after a verbal noun if soon followed by another verb. The verbal noun retains the T* form.
ending here, it is nevertheless a case symbol. Therefore when Tfhn nff ^<s*l (4> frTT») ^TTrff if I Sita goes to see Gopal.
fcTT’ occurs, the verbal noun will end in T* sound, e.g. for going 1.
fhft «Ff
% fen’. It also means to go.
4 3ra FTt4 (nff) ouch l?l Now I go to sleep (bed).
trH’ si*i< 3JTF? if I
4 ipf M'Si’l (^jf) 3TT4 if I He comes daily to teach me.
The doctor is coming for seeing the patient (to see) 2.
n4f
Htff «h
What does not man do for filling his stomach nowdays? 3.
infill Lalitha goes for bathing in the Cauvery.
4.
VOCABULARY 3FRH* - habit
31ln
TTFTcff - mistake
ylW - surely
SJWTH* - pomp
FTP - sin
ifz - stomach
ranff - stale
WT - fill
Rmh
4 - regularly
yfflcjSr - famous
3TRTn>TFjmn4 TETif ^u
- future
- war
fhft - one who is ill
Today’s younger generation is not ready to get married at an
early age.
FHTT*- meeting
-4Verbal nouns are also used to denote order. But they are milder in tone. They sound more like an advice. It is less strong than the prohibitive FH. It is not generally used if the person addressed is older in years. 1.
«ntfl fl
2.
chcl «4f? «t rel="nofollow">IH ’hVIl I
Finish this work tomorrow. 3.
flyi Pl
49
FraTF - ride
» Learn Hindi Through English________
SggiS ♦ Learn Hindi Through Englluli
16. POST - POSITIONS
- instead of
mTm - equal
m^ - after - in spite of
In English what we call preposition is understood as post position in Hindi. It indicates a relation between a noun/pronoun and another noun, pronoun or verb. e.g. a book for you, under the tree, come with me, he lives opposite this house.
fen - without
fexfe - in the middle
fem - within
fet - on account of
«iik)
case-sign
is
sometimes
omitted,
e.g.
fet
TH
-
across the river. Even though as attached to post-position have no meaning, yet they are case symbols. They will affect the previous
Inside the room -
3t^TTR - according to
31fe - beyond,ahead
34- around
3m - above, upon
ehKui - due to
mfe - through
gRT - through
- near
FTRfe - in front of
fem, Rfe<4 - except
KW - through
3fe - towards
sifted - in comparison to
isnffe - for the sake of
mmt- concerning
mr? - in the place of
fefe - like
Hit? - like, similar to
*4i
before (also ) W outside (also fe) ^far d.
For the sake of style or emphasis, fe may be omitted. For the same reason fen/fe/fem may precede the noun/ pronoun. e g. feug dR 3Tfer (darkness under lamp), femmfe, fe femfe
e.
fefe below, under
When 3fe comes after a number, it will take fe not fet as in fe mil 3fe, RTfe 4)di 3TR
Mgrl - before
mt - across
MODEL SENTENCES
feW - toward
mtt - near, with (to have)
1.
tffe - behind
<M'Ai«4 - instead of 50
- like
c. The following post-positions have a it
a. The following post-positions are used with
34cti=i i - besides
«hh
W - with
Opposite your house - 7JR +mr+'m+it> Mint - tfedN-i
34Mfeb - besides,moreover
ffefld - contrary to
fetm - in comparison to shield - due to
10. e.g. if+mfeipi
afe - within
- for
b. The following post-positions begin with feT
noun if it is masculine and ends in 3TT sound. (Please see Lessons 8 and 9). How they affect the pronouns has been tabulated in Lesson
Outside the big room - «TST+'t>»HI
fen* - for
- against
have cfit before them (fe 3fe towards). Very rarely it is used instead The
fe - worthy
rrram - worthy
Generally post-positions take m before them (ifc HI4). Some (Ffe).
W - outside
- at the place of
In Hindi, for, under, with, opposite, etc., are placed after the noun/pronoun. Therefore they are known as post-positions.
of
mt tt - about
i A crow is flying above the house. 51
«ll7'4,
SUggfS • Learn Hindi Through English________________________
SlJgg£s • Learn Hindi Through English
2.
ercf 3RT tat I Don’t sit under a tree during rain.
19.
3.
TTjR W X^> %I There is a factory outside this town.
20.
4.
3jf£<ebl(l qH 3JT^i? I Officer comes to the office after ten o’ clock.
5.
3Td?HT 3i«^ci i<% I Compared to Rahim, Abdul is clever.
6.
34i'd«bM TRTR 3JR?Rfa <*>l*4 <*>
7.
qRt R str? Trt Ttn i? i The child is sleeping inside the room.
Today there is a feast at my friend’s place (house).
10.
Pit'niMt R dtd (PR'il R ’’ftd) There is a garden behind the church.
wn«ft^TrtTnsT3n
All the above sentences make it clear indicators come only after a noun/pronoun in Hindi.
They go just now towards the mosque. 9.
3Ttm R qTR % qR TTmTH 1) I
%|
3mffc RRTWT 4t RTT T I Uma has not even a rupee (with her).
12.
f^^) Mjj’ii ini'll} q? % 1 Delhi is on the banks of the Yamuna river.
13.
I Narendra is going to market with his mother.
14.
3TT^ 3TSqTqq> fell’I I buy medicine for my teacher.
15.
-dlHfh
16.
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
Clean this room after the tourist leaves. qidl
Mllft eFTt I
2.
I read this novel before you read.
3.
Mother sleeps after we have all slept.
Mdai
R «tl<^ HIUI'JI wldl T I
4.
He helps others in spite of being poor.
5.
Write the essay according to the teacher’s instruction.
VOCABULARY
Joseph does not drink tea without sugar.
PRUTT - novel
H7TTRT rPT (^> WH) uidl % I Lakshmi sings like Lata.
f'lt'nmt - church
? What do you know about Akbar?
18.
5H
Pldl xIN dldl I
17.
i Kareem does not sleep before eleven o’ clock at night. 52
post-position
Hence, if in any special construction some other word precedes a post-position, that word should be converted into a noun. e.g. after Ram has spoken’ ‘After’ is the post position. It comes before the noun in English. But when translated into Hindi, ‘has spoken’ precedes ‘after’.Therefore has spoken - a verb - has to be changed into a noun, i.e. a verbal noun, i.e. «?)ci4i . The translation will be TR RT «i) n d 1 +^> qT^-TR q> it lrnJ R qTT
Ud’l Mgr) There is a tailor’s shop in front of my house.
that
Tyff - tailor * - feast qiftxTT - garden - mosque
RtSTT - crow - sugar qqi* - medicine qter - friend Rqq* - help qqf* - rain 53
• Learn Hindi Through English
Sg^S » Learn Hindi Through English
17. CONJUNCTIONS
6. 7.
7511?, 7ft Mt M HHii I It is raining, yet they go to office. T5 4>W <*Rd t, fM^Mt^TH^MTR^ft |
8.
This work is tough, still Kumar is doing it. Hyi 4sdi1ftT47^Mt-^Mt5TTM>t I
Mt£I75, ill'lld> Conjunctions are words which link or connect words, sentences or parts of a sentence, e.g. mother and child, good or bad; I came but you had left; You said that you would come; The servant will wait until you are ready. Put two and two together. Some of the important Hindi conjunctions are given below. i.
3fh, 7f2TT, T - and.
ii.
11.
I think that today is holiday. Otherwise you go to office. '*!«! Mt Mt mihiJI 3ttM it Trar it> fan’ M Rarity
12.
Whenever my uncle comes, he surely brings toys for children. M31M djl dgldl 441fa? I
9.
m, 3JSITT, cTT - or. fe - or (colloquial). TT eft... 7fT - either...or. H...H... - neither...nor. cfT is archaic, TfH ... 7R - when ... then.
iii.
10.
The more the medicine given the more the disease increased. (Remedy is worse than disease). H^fa ttffa *J$lMTnMT5ft7frMtT5Tntl Even though Rahim is elder to me in age, yet he is polite. ^7Ttri|dl^f^3mi t IT^fTftTpTT’FR '5fT3tt I
has restricted use ‘as well as’.
The use of T is becoming obsolete.
HL,
- but. Mr^d,
- but also,
besides, but, on the other hand. TH is now obsolete. iv.
$ufrn’,
3f7f:, TTt - therefore, hence, consequently.
v.
ewlf^ - because.
13.
- so that, for the purpose that. 14.
- as, because. vi.
3Hn/irf^...7ft - if...then.
- although. 7ft Mt,ft* Mt, - yet,
even so, still, 4 44 fa ... TtsnfM - though...yet.
vii.
fa>- (said) that, whether.
16.
that is, i.e. (id est) 17.
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
15.
- even
though, qMt-*Mt - the more. 3td«trdi - however, nevertheless.
18.
2.
3TF3f TJfT ^fft^ff^ I Today is Sunday. Hence the students do not go to school.
19.
3.
Mt M 141 d I 1 Jfaid ebl MI JI ,igi % I There is a tank near my house, but its water is dirty.
4.
TT^tTMt'^TTft t, ■’HTT 5«chl TUT % I This watch is of course beautiful but its price is much, fisltdllb Hd ddl 4^1 41547 | As he is my friend I do not want to vote against him.
1 do not take bath today because I am unwell. S’O^i it faf ^5 'diddi i? HTHift I Ask Harish whether he knows Hindi or not. qigd Cbfjdl 34X»I it | Mohan says that the climate is good. Mtr %fa?tMHittfaqrfr i qr^5% The thief thinks that nobody sees him. But he is a fool. 7ftt7?3JT5’ftMitranHMT7ftMqr't3M7H^77ft I In the house of the poor man there is neither table nor chair. 4<J4fa ^chldi M xlldri 47ft MtH5dMIlMfaHdllt I
MtfaTRT 755771 Tiff t I Srinivas says that he is not hungry. 3TT77T^^Mmq 3n7nt7ftTqTT777f q^Tf T7qf5t7T7E?nt ? If Winter comes, can Spring be far behind? (Shelley)
"vocabulary" TH* - age
'turn «ii»ik - black market
Mt7 - thief
Met'f'Jt? - fool
^7H* - hunger
HTf - vote
ntaq - climate 54
tttM
Even though there is no rice (available) in shops, yet it is available in the black market.
«t>itPl 41?) Mtm xuq ? Do you drink coffee or tea in the morning?
5.
mi41
- polite 55
if i
StjggS • Learn Hindi Through English
SU^S « Learn Hindi Through Engligh
18. INTERJECTIONS
19. FUTURE TENSE
An interjection is a word expressing some emotion like pain, pleasure, anger, surprise, dislike, disgust, etc. e.g. Oh, Ah, Alas!
The future tense represents an action or a state as yet to take place or to come into being. Sentences to indicate the future tense can be formed by adding appropriate suffix to the verb root. The suffix that is added will depend upon the noun: masculine-feminine, singular-plural, I person, II person and III person.
The interjection has an independent existence and has no grammatical relation with any other word in the sentence. But it may be prefixed to (placed before) a noun while addressing, e.g. Oh God! The following are the important interjections in Hindi. 1.
Surprise
2.
Applause
3.
Sorrow
- KTft ^T, 3tft, ftft, 3Tft>, 3TK,
4.
Joy
- 3ftT, 3TftT, RT^-Rft I
5.
Disgust
-ft:,
6.
Shyness
7.
Distress
-
8.
Rebuke
- RH !
9.
Sympathy
-ttr! ttr!
1^1,7^, sfs, <wi
i
krt-kri rrt
Verb root
ir
^5TT
Future suffix masculine
Future suffix feminine ftft jftft
! TRTT
I
RT7 7 RRT 1
ft Kt ?
tnft Vft
Note: 1.
All subjects in plural have the same end in masculine - tft.
2.
If 'f sound is added to masculine suffix, we get the feminine forms.
3.
If the verb root is like with future suffix.
Some interjections can be used as nouns.
1.
Subject
Why are you kicking up a row? 2.
the 3T sound at the end merges
I will read - RS+
You will write - rJR
fcHsfii) I
Women will listen - ftRTT + tftt - fetlT I 4.
(live), ft (drink) are first shortened to ft and ft and then the future tense suffixes are added as shown in the table above. (touch) is shortened to tg for future tense.
5.
56
The following three verb roots take different forms when the future tense suffixes are added. These verbs are exceptions to the rule shown in the table. 57
StJgg*S » Learn Hindi Through English
S*Jg^5 » Learn Hindi Through English
Masculine Subject
tn
?Tn ot.ot?
vfFt
pt^t
ptOT
^OT
OTt
OTP PHIUl^l 3fpOT OT^OTOT3POTT?
1)
OTiP PTTOTT % fOT 3Tnt POT 1PPT?
In which inn will you stay in Banaras?
it
pt
H
Who knows what will happen in the future? 10.
inn int
OTOT ^t OTrft vftP yshcd< TOT POT POT I Perhaps those travellers will reach here by Friday night.
11.
frpnft otot ot ? Will your father drink sherbat or milk ?
For the above verbs, the feminine forms are obtained by ending
12.
them with ’ft.
OTPft'JlAHTHHOT^ITOTOTsi’II Jfld 4IH»ft I Vani Jayaram will sing a prayer song at the meeting.
^-^ft, rffrft, OTft
13.
P)dlv4) OT^OThftOTtOT^tf^OT^^^ fiH’lJ-Tiff I
My father will never send members of the family to see cinema.
it - fft, itft, ifrft, ifrft 14.
Note:
OTOT1 OTPyi OTP fepftOTt 4^1 ^111 Being a big miser he will not give anything to anybody.
It is common practice to write 3u«td I, OTOTH, 3OTht, and so on using P. But the regular, and therefore preferable, forms are those with tr andT’-34n'OT, OT^OT, 3JT^t, I
Will Mohan get any prize in the annual day function?
MODEL SENTENCES 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
16.
^OTT TJOT POTOTTPTJTOTT^OT 3Thfpp OTuh I
17.
OTOT-OTOTP T^OT 3ftr
Subhash will finish this work in an hour and then he will take rest.
i it otot i it <4*111 I too shall learn Hindi from tomorrow.
When will the post office open and at what time it will close?
3TF5T Jj>ll*4ehl pp OTTPPt^*t I (OT is the usage.) This evening we shall listen to the news in the radio.
18.
OTrf ■‘i'1-Hrft I Tomorrow morning Gomati will go to her father-in-law’s house.
19.
«iqi M^'fl OTfifehOTnftpt I Sushma will always wear simple dress because she is poor.
AftOTinT fcT^OTP <s»'iuf4n I My mother will make (prepare) tea for us all. 58
3ft? OTTOT OTH 3 OTOT TpWt I
exchange. 20. I
That wicked fellow will not listen to anybody’s advice. He will repent in the future. 7.
OTP OTP ot? 3
The villagers will sell jaggery in the town and will buy sugar in
^lOT^tOTtOT^ftpff i OTiA*l fchtil iit «ni5 4ffl ^-hii 3^7
nsi^OTtp 'rfitbii 3^TP^P pAui? Who will win in this war and who will suffer defeat?
We shall never forget Mrs. Indira Gandhi. 6.
OTiftOT?
dtpit
3T^ft dlRpd OTT^cf OTTOT I
The servant will bring coconut oil from the shop just now. 21.
ttiitjsu")POT^POTc'i'iJhl I The labourers will return from the factory after six o’clock.
22.
TftOT^T HIH $*OTM I Geeta will sit (for) the examination this year. 59
gUgflrS » Learn Hindi Through English
SUg^S * Learn Hindi Through English
20. FUTURE SUBJUNCTIVE
VOCABULARY - examination
- miser
U? - jaggery M»dHi - repent
47T - oil
W' labourer
*n4t - traveller
- dress
- father-in-law’s house
HXToZI uRlWIf^ The subjunctive indicates how to express a purpose, condition, wish, permission, advice, order, expectation, doubt and guess pertaining to future time. It is a form of verb which represents the action not as a reality but as a wish, hope, possibility, etc. To construct a sentence in future subjunctive, all the rules concerning future tense (given in the previous lesson) are to be followed except that the last letter of the verb is to be omitted. Future tense - 3iK'ui 1 4
I
Future subjunctive - T? 3TH’, 4 ^TT3> (If he will come, If I go) To express purpose, the future subjunctive is preceded by f^!7T4, f47T4 or dif* Examples 1.
tjesfl 774 I May God keep you happy! (hope, wish)
2.
4 xiigrti 4tt sTtet «l4 I wish that my son turns out to be a doctor, (wish)
3.
HfeHTt '*>5!
4.
c<5 T
4 yPHq>)
? Shall I go to see film this evening?
(permission) !>.
7^7 TTvl 7sTT3ft ^7774
7^t I Eat fresh
fruits daily so that you will remain healthy, (purpose) (>. TTT^ 37T57 7T77 efft VFft ^Jt4 I Perhaps it may rain this night, (possibility)
60
/.
3HT77ftrTT '3TTT* eft77?f^rTR' cilei I If Sita happens to go to library, let her return this book, (condition)
8.
% 7=57 4 m«j4 ? How shall I sing when my voice is not sweet? (doubt, interrogation)
9.
xn% 7517 5773ft xnit 4 57737, 4t4f 4t ^t?t % 1 Whether you go or I go, both are the same. 61
______ SUgg> » Learn Hindi Through EtigHnll
SU^S » Learn Hindi Through English
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
2. 3.
3TH7f^snft 4fcr-qTrr TTift^^TT I
3i< cjh
fit an
31 ra '4>IHsll4 4 ^ddlH t, ^rrflT^3T^H'3nii I
19.
ddd
20.
i Let God make this auspicious day come again and again. Many happy returns of the daiy.
21.
3TTT^t^-?T^T31l4dM^ 3Thu^^lHKt I Let this tour of yours be pleasant and safe. eni
H enf I
UHiutftif uniu41H3jnr i May you go safely, may you return safely.
23.
^Hdl ? Shall I compare thee to a summer’s day? (Shakespeare)
- use
12. 'd«i den if hih H Jjenit> ehl^ ch*<4 3T
62
chlMdlcfi - success
Tpff* - summer
rJHdl* - comparison
Tjtrf - at once, immediately
iftar?* - alms
ynfdiH - possible - old man
■f^WT* - widow i
It is not possible that I’ll forget you. My heart remains here1 wherever I may live.
^4 1
VOCABULARY
Let no student use cell phone in the class-room.
13.
i *inaT^t3
22.
3tm 4)41 ehi <jNr4 4leH h
^STT if eh)^
cbmdicO
Let success be with you! Let success kiss your feet.
Wish you both a prosperous wedded life for ever.
11.
^??i<2U ^'spn ? Let that fellow live or die, what do I care?
En’■<,«{) if OTT* I
Let some one like you enter my life.
10.
18.
tA
i
I
Today there is strike in the factory, let no labourer go inside.
9.
'5ft
If you (will) recommend, that young woman will get job.
8.
16.
17.
If the beggar will beg then only give money.
7.
3TT?T, 3tn41 ITT^^fiT frnr 3Tp4 siflcH 'SET I Come on, let us sacrifice our life for the sake of our motherland.
|3ff Mil Hlccm ? How shall we console those widows?
6.
15. ?
Whether the servant can go home now or stay for some time
5.
^THrT^t '4IU I Let the problems of India vanish soon.
? May I do this work at once?
4.
14.
HUUUI* - problem
Wrllhrfi* - welfare, protection - recommendation
UIccHT* - consolation
63
• Learn Hindi Through English
21.
SUj^S » Learn Hindi Through English
PAST TENSE BE’ VERB
/ TTmf^TtRRf^^ aft.aRTRR^faft I
‘gfar fczn
Radha was at the temple the whole day. She was not at home.
Singular
Mas
Fem
Plural
I was
Wan
Waft
We were
^nft
■^naff
You were
$*ft
gnaft
You were
3TTR ft
3KR aft
He,She,It
R?an
R^aft
They
Wat
Waff
That, This
n?an
-R?aft
ThosX
ftft
Waff
1
These/
was
Mas
Fem
W) lift5, 3u<;,ft an I
H ft
I was a poor man in the beginning. ')
aft | The tea was cold and so it was tasteless.
10.
RTrT
1 1.
were /
ft> TRRT3H dinft ft Rftn-Rftn ft ? During the earthquake who were there in the those rooms?
Note: 1.
All feminine singular verbs end in aft
2.
All masculine plural verbs end in ft.
3.
All feminine plural verbs end in aff.
12.
f4d 1-41 4>rl 3RRrnHRW8t ? <*UI
d<4)dd 4Udtft aft?
Why was your father in the hospital yesterday? Was his health not good? 1 3. chn 41m?S< iHdii «pSTR ®TT 3Tftft ft I
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
Yesterday noon he had fever and he was restless.
RRTgR^T^W^RRftft ?
14. snaft^RT^nftR^nfftaft i
Were you at the office at ten o’ clock? 2.
There was calm after the storm everywhere.
RirT TTTRRtt IRTHRW ft |
15.
We all were at the harbour yesterday evening. 3.
3nR
16.
Where were you in Mumbai last year? ft RRTT ’STRi-XR W ft |
5.
RKR’TftftRRftftaft |
jideil W4aucft ft W4 3FJ
"vocabulary"
They were at the post-office day before yesterday noon. aft I
- finger ring
3jfcft* - storm
RTrft* - finger
Igjft* - holiday
d41
TT7TRR - administration
TRTR RRH fttWRTI^Rfftft I
44 dH - tasteless, vapid
ai
Dr. Rajendra Prasad was the first President of India.
WftT - restless, agitated
Yesterday was Gandhiji’s birthday. So it was holiday for the school. 6.
3Tfira>Tft-gnRM
That IAS officer was younger than all of us.
lj<3^ RTSH ?
4.
^RHcftd
- earthquake
TTTfa* - peace, calm 64
65
* Learn Hindi Through English
22.
12^5
PAST IMPERFECT TENSE
* Learn Hindi Through English
8.
ejqfMMt-nfrratMTjTTaian i The beggar was wandering in the lanes even in rain.
This is a peculiar construction, not easily translatable. It is] neither simple or definite past (e.g. went), nor a continuous action ini the past (was going), nor a habit in the full sense (used to go). It is] somewhat mild in indicating a habit in the past or a repeated past] action.
9.
R^f^Mta3rrfksn7rasKnMTraitt^R?nsn i
A sentence in this tense is formed by adding HT/ft/tft to the root of the verb according to the gender and number of the subject as in Lesson 4 and then adding the appropriate past tense symbol
11.
«n/M/sft/sff as shown in the previous lesson, e g. RTrTT 8TT, RTft st,
12.
3Pjyf ^dcPTcH (?)
When Vinod was rich, he used to move about in a car. 10.
That bachelor used to hate women before marriage. ^^wMtMnfas^sFt^ttjg^ntst i We used to get up at five o’ clock itself during our youth. R7 TTRT
'SBTrft sft I
Mother-in-law used to quarrel with daughter-in-law for each and everything.
sft, 'nidi sft.
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
?iit t^uil «h
13.
IN
3d <*>««< MxiiH RTOTR? gejiHri «htc) ft | Akbar was ruling (ruled) India for fifty years.
That wrestler was doing (used to do) exercise daily. 14. 2.. | Before becoming a minister, he was living (used to live) in a hut.
3RR vftt Rinft ft RRRRR
15. TTfMtit (Mi)
tflrtHiH gldca ft taMI <siidi sn I
Before marriage, Sitaram used to take meals in hotel. When we were living in South India, we were eating (used tc eat) rice only. 4.
TFftMM
Rift sftHTT Mt RTR ft I
yMcfl Mi ehRUi R tR Mt
18.
ft RFT rlrl ft I
7.
ftR^ftcHsFRiftsn I TRI ft sn I Previously I was in Lucknow. At that time I was learning Urdu dictdl ftRift) <^cim R’HitdMftn hhi ft I The doctor was prohibiting the patients from smoking. 66
ft^ra-gRRMtefift i My relatives used to meet me often when we were neighbours. 13^M^rnn^i Before my marriage my mother used to cook food. Now I prepare it.
Due to threat, shop keepers took part in the strike unwillingly 6.
ft ft^ «hi? ^<smi SJT I I used to see cinema every week during childhood.
17.
When there was no scarcity of water, people were taking batt twice. 5.
16.
19.
RRTHT^ftftftifMn’Rcntftrft sft | 3TRR?MtfMnn cftcft t I Kamala was taking (drinking) medicine for cough. Now she takes tablets.
67
• Learn Hindi Through English
SURgfS » Learn Hindi Through English 20.
(clinch g^^llftlft 3TTtn?n I
23.
et>^di 2ir(^>aHft>'’TRrV^t
PAST CONTINUOUS TENSE 3njyf (?)
ft) I This clerk always used to come late. On enquiry, he used to say that he had no watch. Note: A special form of the habitual past is obtained by omitting
zn-ft-ft)-ftf It is used in narrating a repeated act of the past. e.g. TOT ’ftftl Tift) 1ft ^ift aftl 1TTH
I We would (used to)
go there every morning and return in the evening.
The past continuous tense indicates an action that was going on in the past at a particular time. The completion of that action, however, is not known for sure. Sentences in past continuous tense are formed by adding T^TX%-Tift to the root of the verb (see Lesson no:5, present continous tense ) according to the gender and number of the subject and then by adding the appropriate past tense indicator 2IT-ft-ftt-ft) as shown in Lesson no.21. e.g. 3TTT?T 8TT, ft, 3JT7tft ft), 3JTTift ft).
VOCABULARY (jhea* - scarcity
^HT* - hatred
'fldiJl* - youth - threat MCCjciM - wrestler
1.
ft vTrTT ftf|?|ch<
2.
I was listening to Lata Mangeshkar’s song. ^^cHHftcRTTTsTft^Tt ft ?
- hut, cottage
vftft) - neighbour
- clerk
S’fe*1'1* " rule
8JT I
What were buying in the shop?
RHT prohibit
- relative
RHT? - week
MODEL SENTENCES
3.
^n^ict>< tra^ftKHT^T an ? Why was Harishankar laughing at that time?
4.
ft)cbftftifrniirg; 311^^4 I Madhav was filling up an application form for job (employment).
5.
ft) i Cool breeze was blowing slowly (gently).
6.
«rftft
ttrt
tkt sit
i
It was raining continuously from seven o’clock yesterday. 7.
Afftni^wr^TnT^fttrgiTT^nftftftnT^t ft) i
8.
Urmila was speaking at a meeting yesterday evening. Traftjft ft Heft TR’3RTjft ft) | The boat was crossing the river fast.
9.
ftf^sft'gftTzrRft^TTfft ft) I Mother was kissing the child with love. 10. I The cow was grazing the grass along with the calf. 11. IpT Tra Lip ft) ft> ft >*fti(* 1RT sftfr ft I We were all sleeping soundly because we were very tired.
68
69
gggjs • Learn Hindi Through English 12.
Sgg’5 • Learn Hindi Through English
3TTqVltf^f xfll^ftlt ?
24.
PAST INDEFINITE TENSE
Why were you crying so loudly? 13.
JilHW JjTraTcT
eptlHf VI (Ulftim) ffv (^) it I An action mentioned as done in the past without any definite reference to the time or its condition is said to be in past indefinite lense, e.g. I came, I saw, I conquered (veni, vidi, vici, - Julius Caesar)
Dogs were barking throughout the night. 14.
33lt I Aero planes were flying in the sky.
15.
Wf
3JTVT, flVT, 'jAoi. To form the simple past tense. VI
(a)
Farmers were sowing the seeds after the rains. 16.
form masculine singular, and change it into I* for masculine
if vtti wtTift iff I
plural. In feminine singular it becomes'f and in pluralf (frioi,
Girls were making noise in the class. 17.
19.
If the verb root ends in 3IT/3Tt, VT is added (3TTVT, iftVT) which becomes if in masculine plural iff in feminine singular and iff in
WH chiRf m-i ifvfiit VR VHTit st I
avoided using only the vowel form. Hence 3TT^,3nf,3TTf are
Narain Karthikeyan was driving the sports car fast.
preferred instead of 3TTV, 3Jirft,3JT?ft
feminine plural. But where the use of VT is optional, it may be
I Children were playing ball in the playground.
21.
7^ ^ftiH VIJvftVVift ft I In the shade of a banyan tree an old woman was selling fish. Ad Ultl fcfixi it I
The bullocks were pulling the cart. 23.
(b)
? To whom were you writing the letter?
20.
22.
ftnt, fcRsft, ftnff)
i Sudhir was working in the museum last year.
18.
If the root of the verb ends in silent 3T, lengthen it to 3TT to
V?
flHeETTMlt ®t I
That philosopher was thinking for a long time. 24.
I Trees and plants were drowning in the flood.
(c)
Root ending in 37 first shortens its vowel. ^-^3JT. Root ending in f first becomes ift-favT, ft-ftvT
vs
VST
vt
flsT lit
flVT HTVT
Tth’
it
ftVT
ih?
- to kiss
- philosopher VTV* - boat VWT - calf
35T - cool -AehA* - job
W? - banyan tree VT?* - flood
KVT* - wind 70
Singular
Plural
vft
vff
^isfr
flsff
frf
The following verbs are exceptions to the above rules and their past tense is formed as follows: Feminine
Masculine
3TVTW VI - museum 3TT^T - application VRT* - grass tj
Plural
Verb root
"vocabulary" 4ni - to graze
Feminine
Masculine Singular
Verb root
Singular
it
fciMi ftvr
3 W ft VT
Plural
ffv. 1^
If
wt
71
Singular
Plural
vft
Iff
' ft ft it ”t
ft ft
Sg^S « Learn Hindi Through English
SUgj^S » Learn Hindi Through English
At this juncture, we are expected to know that verbs are of two kinds - transitive and intransitive. A transitive verb has certainly an object, e.g. She wrote a letter. Here ‘wrote’ is the transitive verb because it has ‘letter’ as its object. However, the object may be understood sometimes and not expressed openly, e.g. 1 ate. Herej ‘ate’ is a transitive verb even though the object has not been stated.: I must have eaten something. That is enough explanation.
7.
qq 3JF5T
8.
jhiRin cti
9.
i The servant brought four eggs from the shop.
10.
<14I Rama lived in the forest for 14 years. After that he returned to Ayodhya.
11.
3TTq
12.
wttM
13.
Mggl qfi h<4 i M Mt 4H<*>1 ni They did not forget me. I also did not forget them.
14.
<41 ■h 41^ •*<{) M I The travellers took bath in the Yamuna river behind the Taj
On the other hand, the intransitive verb does not admit of an object, e.g. He died suddenly. An object is a person or a thing that is affected by the action of the verb. To find out whether there is an object, we should put the question what/who to the verb.e.g. Saw - saw what, saw whom. There will be answer, expressed or understood. Hence ‘saw’ is a transitive verb. Died-died what, died whom. There cannot be any answer. Hence ‘died’ is an intransitive verb. In the present lesson, we shall have only intransitive verbs in the model sentences. Sentences in the past tense with transitive verbs are constructed in a different manner. This will be explained in the next lesson.
15.
1.
3TF5T <*>f>1 Mt Pl <41 I Today cardamom was not available anywhere.
2.
ar-anTO M Ml <41 Pl <*><41 i Suddenly the bullet emerged from the gun.
3.
i Because of headache I slept only four hours yesterday night.
4.
6.
c-ini
<41
Mahal.
MODEL SENTENCES
5.
41<m 3<»>m
I
What happened to mother? Why was she crying? 16.
72
ddfeqiit(dq^)fMvfti
4)<*>0M^3*^i 4
In that job I got a good pay.
4
The train stopped just for a minute. Therefore I got down quickly (in haste) <J>T? When did you return from abroad? <*>
MI
17.
4>(tai<4 1 Some peddlers sat under the tree.
18.
^t^^R 3JnTftT^vf7^vn I The school opened only today after the holidays.
VOCABULARY $ <*11 <4 Ml* - cardamom
'■Hurt - forest
4> (tan'll - peddler
pay, salary
4
- suddenly 73
• Learn Hindi Through English
25.
Learn Hindi Through English
PAST INDEFINITE TENSE
Here jafHl is in masculine singular, not because the subject, Ram, is masculine singular but because the object, a horse, is masculine singular.
TRANSITIVE VERBS TTFTFZT
f^RPT
As mentioned in the previous lesson, a verb is called transitive only if it has an object, whether expressed or implicit. In other words, the object is the most important aspect in a sentence having a transitive verb. Therefore the verb will be in masculine or feminine gender and in singular or plural number according to the object in such sentences.
2.
TTPTT I The object, two horses,is masculine plural. So we have the verb 73 (I J1
3.
I'M I Though the subject is masculine, the object is in feminine singular and hence the verb is formed according to it.
4.
This rule is applicable only in the following four tenses:
TnT'4'TT
1.
Past Indefinite - e.g. I ate.
verb iaOdl I
2.
Present Perfect - e.g. I have eaten.
3.
Past Perfect - e.g. I had eaten
4.
Past Doubtful - e.g. I might have eaten.
(1)
5.
TTtrTTft T’Pifrudl I Though the subject is feminine, the verb is in masculine singular because of the masculine singular object, one letter.
If a sentence falls under one of the above four tenses and if there is an object (mentioned or understood), then the following steps become necessary. This procedure is known as ‘ne’ rule.
6.
tflai 3TPTon* I The object, two mangoes, is in masculine plural. So we have
i)
Add to the subject. is the symbol of the first case, (see Lesson 8 ).
7.
ii)
Put the verb in masculine/feminine gender and singular/plural number according to the object.
iii)
If the object is not mentioned or if it is followed by then the verb will always be in masculine singular.
iv)
The following verbs, though transitive, are exceptions. That is, they will be formed according to the subject: The
auxiliary
verbs
(can),
1.
i
74
TTP ft tflfli Mil I Here the object is Sita (feminine singular). Yet the verb is in masculine singular because the object is followed by ^ft
8.
KPH | The object has not been mentioned. It may be mango (masculine) or roti (feminine). The number or quantity too is not known. It may be one mango/one roti or it may be more. As the object has not been mentioned, the verb remains in masculine singular. (2)
*£35
(finish) and rPT (begin) also do not come under this rule, but will be formed according to the subject. Examples
the verb 73TT’ though the subject is a female.
In the case of exceptions — cTT,^trT,^rI,fpH the verb will be in its normal form, i.e., according to the subject. 1.
dldRpft TTT^ I The servant maid brought vegetables.
2.
fldl4)
«WI 31^1 ? What did the leader say in the meeting?
75
3L<S » Learn Hindi Through English Sgg^S « Learn Hindi Through English 7. 3.
TThftjft 441 ?J3
4.
THT
5.
? Why did Gandhiji not utter a lie?
HH ■’RTTI Ram forgot that story.
8.
ftftqpftftgmfl «hzft^>fenjKriiiii.fl fidrfP i My wife bought Japanese toys for our daughter.
9.
3mft7ftrTfti^Hftt7TTftfttftf?
TTI^«I Tt 1J4f! I We met the minister this morning
(3) When more than one noun is the subject of a transitive verb in the past tense, is added only to the last noun. TTR,
How many cows did you see in the field? 10.
tlrlcd «*>) I Ram, Krishna and Gopal made
the mistake.
11.
12.
^ngnft3Hsr^Rft^i3F?fl«i
?
Did you read that strange advertisement in the newspaper?
exhibition yesterday. 13.
(4)
14.
1 rift, Tuftft
rTST (They fought the case). Both are correct, wi TPTjn? (Did you understand?) Both are correct.
'^TTfftn’ftft
I
^n^fttftft-^ft7T^<M'f)ift^5'4dift«TFTfftnn I All political parties, small and big, participated in the election.
<*4i <14-1 (He chattered ),
3TT5T
Today is new moon day. Hence I did not shave.
In the case of some verbs, ft is sometimes used and sometimes omitted. Both usages are permitted. ft
15.
ftsni mRcikftft^rftft Rl ft>ffth 3jft^ chltjisift <si)rl I The Birla family opened (started) many industries for the
TTtft cfu ^JT (He talked a lot of nonsense). Both are O.K.
progress of the country.
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
3ft -TlchO ft> frH’ftft I I sent many applications for job.
2.
^41^1
4^11 ^>40 MI4I I
16.
?
cfftftftftftt^TT ^IPId fft^TT 3^734^1 ITTHI I People welcomed the minister and garlanded him.
17.
41ft cfit ft l
That traveller brought a costly camera from Singapore. 18.
I She did not show her new cycle to anybody.
Why did you insult me? 4.
TTT§uc4>Hft 3Tfi
5.
ft ftlft 4iH I>' I Abdullah ate five bananas day before yesterday.
6.
gft^HiftRftanftTmnTftft^fft^n I Kanchana passed the examination in first class.
to all the pronouns. 3ft, 3ftl 3Tft 4wT MdVf'Tl ^^1 I, you and he saw the
Tlt^pftTTftftt^^RftftjfftTiiblRiyi^t I The Government tried to remove poverty.
But if the subjects are pronouns (I,You, etc.), then is added
3.
xiW4ftfaspiral i
The watchman woke me up at five o’clock.
?
19.
gnft sUcHfechd
441 eh^ZsTtf^TT?
Where did you place the postal stamp? Did you lose it somewhere? 20.
ftftg^Hft3T4ftg4ftt Rhdl^ftftf | 1 sold my old books in the shop.
Where did you buy this mirror? 76
77
SUg^S » Learn Hindi Through English
Siggfe • Learn Hindi Through English_______________________ 21.
26. PRESENT PERFECT TENSE
Rd^rf^TT I The Kauravas fought with the Pandavas for 18 days.
22.
(dldjdd)f^n I
The present perfect tense is, in fact, a tense of the past. It
The secretary signed the order.
represents a completed act, the effect of which is still present. It
23.
brings a past act into relation with the present. In other words, it
rft |
denotes an action concluded recently.e.g. I have eaten. ‘Eaten’ shows
That ascetic drank neither coffee nor tea. 24.
cHI 4>gl
that the action was over in the past. ‘Have’ indicates that it is recent
cH|| dTitf^n ?
What did the shopkeeper tell you and what reply did you give?
VOCABULARY 3F?fter - strange
3i i^m i - mirror
chrii - banana
- poverty
- difficult *fTT5T- election
past. So we have to use both past tense and present tense symbols. 1.
Write the sentence in the past indefinite tense, (see Lesson 24)
2.
Add present tense symbols
3.
‘I according to the subject.
If the verb is transitive, then it will be according to the object.(see Lesson 25)
■cilcfldH - watchman, guard
si Mi ftehe - postal stamp
TH - party, group qwiian - signature
M^ii -
Him* - garland Hciim -
question
- advertisement TRTT8R - signature
costly
4.
Then add or according to the number of the object.
5. - secretary
will be added to subject.
Examples 1.
■dipiql 3TRT%| (The servant has come). 3JRTT is past tense and % is present tense. Hence it is present perfect tense. We use t because it stands for 3rd person.
2.
Tf(
I
have
never
gone
there).
7nn
is
past
tense, It is present tense. is used because the subject is . 3.
n<*> et>5i4l PusDi? (Ram has written a story). This sentence has transitive verb ‘write’. Hence the verb will be according to the object et>gi41 which is feminine singular. So the sentence ends in fcHtdl % I
4.
rTR 3JnT73Tt’i I (Usha has eaten four mangoes). Usha is feminine singular. But the verb is in masculine plural. It is because eat is a transitive verb and the object RTt 3TTR is masculine plural.
5.
TTEJ RTT % ( He has read ). The verb is in masculine singular because the object has not been mentioned.
78
79
SURgS « Learn Hindi Through English
SUj^S * Learn Hindi Through English
6.
8.
7t^^> 3T«ft-3nft ■wi’M1I After crying much, the child has just now slept.
9.
3n?i)et> «i!+d< '^"’TfTT f*wc Th cilil % I
yml cKT M
7.
In the case of verbs to the subject as they are exceptions.
the verb will be according
Ashok has returned from office just five minutes back. 10.
Note:
Snuetu *75 3Tnt tft filed I % I Your letter has become available (has reached) only today.
In referring to historical facts, it is customary to use present perfect tense instead of simple past tense. 1.
TFT 'jvic'I 4 xAqg TTTrT7^ f I Ram has lived in the forest for 14 years.
2.
^1 Mai
(Transitive verbs) (Verb according to object) 1.
I Columbus has discovered
I have heard Nehru’s speech.
America.
MODEL
SENTENCES
(intransitive
verbs)
(verb
according
to
2.
2.
3.
i I have come here many times.
'5*71
iach i % 7
Have you seen the play Harishchandra?
subject) 1.
CM X||C(U| 7JHT % I
377
37ciHTfl 3«sfl 1? I
That writer has kept a lot of books in the cupboard.
^TT rJH T7 ? Have you ever flown in an aeroplane?
4.
3Tfi
I
The majority of people have not read the Ramayana after childhood.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
^5 nflyt ^7 «l<4< I That patient has slept for a long time.
5.
'37T 3<
6.
I Razia has spoken in Hindi in the meeting.
7.
7^ 3^7 I The guest has brought apples and guavas.
8.
TyT? h^d^n trg, tHH it 1? I The bridegroom’s relatives have stayed in an inn.
*7735^7^1 I On my child’s birthday my friends have sent gifts. 37«TTq^;^T^^T7^7rr7^iTTnt i The teacher has hit me once severely. s7
fem ci i<s1 7njit ff I
The Birla family has given (donated) lakhs of rupees for temples. 9.
h#hy
(14111
Krishnakumar has bought a new motor cycle. 80
81
Stag's » Learn Hindi Through English
SggS • Learn Hindi Through English 10.
27.
■’fhr 4)TpTT% i
PAST PERFECT TENSE
We have heard this song earlier also.
tjyf 3JrR8TcT
hi41
11.
i
The past perfect tense indicates the form of the verb that
My grandmother has not eaten anything during the fast. 12.
expresses an action completed before a particular point in the past. It is formed in English with ‘had’ and the past participle (like ‘gone’).
i
The stress is on completion of an act, once for all, and it need not
Anita has driven her car herself. 13.
3J^7T3i 3TTR '3KT
necessarily be connected with remote past.
Hlft fWJT 1? I
In every way, the past perfect resembles the present perfect
Till now I have not drunk (tasted) pomegranate juice. 14.
except in the final (‘be’) verb. That is, instead of
%I The labourers have made (built) this long road.
15.
Present Perfect = past + present
I
Past Perfect = past + past
Every person has written at least one poem during youth. 16.
vftt i My father has taken leave for two weeks to go on pilgrimage.
VOCABULARY
Therefore the past perfect tense is formed by adding to the past
tense
?n,4,4t,4f
according
to
the
subject,
if
the
verb
is
intransitive. If the verb is transitive (having object), then the verb will be
- guava
3FTH - pomegranate
the past
tense forms ®TT,4,41,41 will be used. In other words:
formed according to the gender and number of the object. 4 will be 14 I * - pilgrimage
- gift <jy?i - bridegroom
added to the subject. TTI, 4tvT, far! are exceptions.
TFft* - grandmother (mother’s mother)
MODEL
- gift, award
«J4Hi - to save
subject)
4NU| - lecture, speech
oyfrt> - person
1.
TH - fast,vow
4
SENTENCES
(intransitive
verbs)
(verb
according
4TTT 44*4 K4 mi<41 an I
I had brought five Hindi novels from the library. 2.
TTtr’ 4 I Yesterday you had slept soon (early).
3.
TTKt eh^4)< TTZt4TpftTTTT TT I It had rained in Kashmir valley the day before yesterday.
4.
MOetKl (mom IS I) Tfft 4 I The President had stayed in Hyderabad for a fortnight.
82
83
to
Sgg(S • Learn Hindi Through English 5.
__________________________ SlJg^S » Learn Hindi Through English
Medi efit <nsl 47744 R<*>cfl ®ft I
7.
The Patna train had started at four o’ clock. 6.
Trf^ran^hrrarft4>thtt4?t an? eft i
8.
Radhika had come here during Deepavali time. 7.
(mwv)
$ddHfttfTIT P'lt'JiiMt 47t4T ®ft I
9.
47ftft47^hMdRft 3tW) fe>7n 44 47374 ft^n an i
10.
377 ft
On demand, the shopkeeper had sent a fine variety of rice.
TT^ft^ft m!g< ftft?T jpj & |
11.
dltMI'il qlngt 44t CIIMM Hlft 3TT? ?ft I
4T I
ftftpft
*1 <7l$nr4>i
The bank had called computer literate youngmen for interview.
The servant maid had not returned till noon. 10.
31 jcnq
That scholar had translated the Rig veda.
Gandhiji had been born in Porbander. 9.
tf.3ftftg^7ft4fft77ft^t^4fftftjfftn’7i4ftfft747 4T i Dr. Ambedkar had struggled for the progress of the dalits.
My mother had gone to the church last Sunday. 8.
ftl^U7<41ilft ft 477447 37lshMU| 1^47 47 I
Mohammed Ghouri had invaded India.
12.
447 3774 3TT4 ■g4? 474 4Tftr ft 4?tt’ft ?
?4ft
4ft c(^i>ft7ftt eft |
We had seen a variety of things in the exhibition.
Had you taken bath (bathed) in hot water this morning? 13.
ftft37Mdl H4sh
447 47,^77^ 37^47437 477757^ I
I had not studied my lesson. So the teacher became angry.
Transitive verbs (verbs according to object) 1.
14.
We had listened to this song again and again on the radio.
ftft4?niii mTciftift^ftiaft^sft I I had bought this cow in the village fair.
2.
7J4ft 44 ft
15.
iJ-flM
16.
?4ft ift47fft4f ft ft! fftt4 ^^4 ft 474 fftT47 37 I
3rRicbi(l it? snft 47 44777ftft■gia
17.
away.
4T7?3^rr4 4ft ft i 18.
My brother had read all the twelve novels of Premchand. 5.
377 4^7437434? ft 7ftft47H^fteftt 447747 I barked. ftfr
disappeared. 19.
^fftT77 ft 7733)71^43737 37 I
20.
ftt?4 ft 37?ft3; 377^1(1 fayNI 4T I
The police had caught all the thieves.
»qftfftqft i
My father had given me fifty rupees for pocket expenses.
ftftfftdl41ft37T37ft^4ft77ftft | ft 77743 ?t4Ti I My father had put (kept) money in the table drawer. It
4<5I I
That mischievous boy had awakened the sleeping dog. So it 6.
3ftr’ft3t^7 47fttf447 37 I 43 4? T? 447 I The crow had drunk the water of the pitcher. Then it flew
once. ftft^ft
34 ^IlTH 47 I
Our soldiers too had taken part in the world war.
<sTim stt i
When the officer entered, the peon had opened the door at 4.
ft 477447 did 7ft
The Mogul rulers ruled over India for 331 years.
47ft feKsH eft |
You had written useless things in the letter. 3.
?4ftftQ
Mohan had taught maths to Ashok. 84
85
SUggfS » Learn Hindi Through English
StJt^S « Learn Hindi Through English 21.
28.
I
DOUBTFUL PRESENT TENSE
The farmers had sown seeds in the fields.
dQiJf dcfnioi
22. The Governor had hoisted the flag. 23.
I The washerman had not washed the clothes properly.
24.
I The child had thrown away all the toys.
25.
chilxlirtdlI The employees had shown black flags against the minister.
This tense is used to indicate the doubtful nature of an action. That is, we are not sure whether an action is taking place at the time of speaking, e.g. may be writing, may be cooking. Only in the future, as we enquire, we come to know whether the action (e.g. writing) is really taking place. So this tense is formed by the combination of present indefinite tense + ‘be’ verb of future. This ‘be’ verb in future, i.e. 1ft takes the following forms ^TT, ^tft, ift^t, iffaft, ifht, iffrft according to the subject. ‘May be going’ will take the following forms.________________________________________________ Masculine Feminine ■ft srfldl l^n 1
VOCABULARY -translation
lft*t 1
3tisftHui - attack, invasion 34^141 - novel
eh4-Mi(l - employee
chicii - black
fsKTU* - kind, variety
13Rf - expenditure
^T3T - pot, pitcher
tinft* - valley
- pocket MtgciKi - fortnight - throw
^TST - flag
- table drawer
KtHT - to be bom Mil'll - hoist (flag) ijHT - fair
Hmf - stuggle
■git 3TH7
jnai 5Y111 if,
'tffft 1
T?
|
£
'Jllrfi 6^0 1 3TN
1
As we add ‘ing’ to the verb ( he may be reading), we may also use the continuous form. This form has been explained in Lesson 5. So we may translate ‘may be doing’ in two ways. i)
using present indefinite form - i ifhTT (masculine), <*>
ii)
using present continuous tense - ITT TW (masculine), UftffWt (feminine)
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
hI^'I
'iiiai gbii I
2.
Mohan may be going to office. TT ■gftTFT ifVt I
3.
That multi-millionaire may be giving alms to poor people. ffrft it | felflqai iftm I
4.
The patient may be buying medicine from the dispensary. VrT itTTTFT 3TTifhTT I
5.
himi
Goods may be coming by train. sidlrfi Ethfl I
Maya may be drawing a picture. 86
1
87
SUgl^S « Learn Hindi Through English
Sgf^S • Learn Hindi Through English 6.
29.
cSt iffajff eRTKcT SritH’Tl (ntiai ih’TT I
DOUBTFUL PAST TENSE
Kerosene may be easily available in the ration shop. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.
14. 15. 16. 17. 18.
^TTnf^TT KhTT I Amarchand may be selling silk sarees. PiiK>TTT3T rh'H I The church bell may be ringing (tolling). sjra ^
STrffsTft - last
(would) have come for the marriage. In a way it indicates presumption or inferred certainty. In this lesson also we have to check whether the verb is intransitive or transitive. We have first to form the past tense (see Lesson 24). Then add ihn, ihft, KFT, KPfr, Kbf, Khft as shown in the previous lesson according to the subject, if the verb is intransitive. But if the verb is transitive, it will be formed according to the object. Then to indicate doubt, we have to add KfrTT, according to the gender and number of the object. will be added to the subject. <=TT, KtcT, «^T, ftrT are exceptions. They will be formed according to the subject.
MODEL SENTENCES (intransitive verbs) (verb according to subject) 1.
KTrT'jpr
I
Yesterday you might have slept early (would have). 2.
41hi0 K7KTc^Kt’t
3. aiflusi* - date
KPT - playing cards KPT - price
EJ3TT - smoke
wft* - brother’s wife KT?T - goods
KTT - kerosene - time
really taken place or had been completed in the past.e.g. Gopal might
’ERT - big bell
xiirticCl* - trick,craftiness a«=0<* - picture
aqrd - attempt
An action which might have taken place in the past is said to be in Doubtful Past Tense. We are not sure whether the action had
I
The expert might have talked about this disease.
"vocabulary" 3i*iri - famine
IjTTWT
««n -cheap
fcicrflHT4TKhTT I The postman might have brought a letter for you.
4.
*Acii mI
KhftI
Sita might have lived in Sri Lanka for a year. 5.
t5TK KfcT 1ft ^fif I The students of the hostel might have got up at five o’clock itself.
TSiimi* - establishment 88
89
SUjgS « Learn Hindi Through English
__________________________ StJgl^S « Learn Hindi Through English
6.
6.
hivjh
Rift fcfc 3TRT vftnRTT Ft 3TTT’ifft RTRift I
It is not known (we do not know) whether the Aryans had come from somewhere or not. 7.
15011 441I
mhPi^i*m4Ht
|
8.
More than 500 persons would have died due to earthquake in 10.
vdlldR ct>Hui tg<141 vft ifrrft I Manorama would have taken leave due to chronic cough.
11.
f«l($l TTRTRTTRRTRmi 41*l> • The cat might have drunk the whole lot of milk.
12.
rW
13.
itn J2M in It, ^t 3TR RR>REvdRTT Mg''’ 4f*1 I My idea is (I think), he (they) would have reached Kolkata by now.
$HHrtl R7 fRt tff’t I In the course of the war, bombs would have fallen on the buildings.
11.
Rif
R^f «Tin i 4bn i
fRRFTRR $4*1 SI RRT?T% rt-Mlfch '’ERR> Ullrich f^HIMI RRTT 41*11 I The tenant is quarrelling because the house owner might have demanded rent.
«hi
10.
folw^RRlMHRft"^ f4*41 4 «4gd-Tft ch^lRdT fcKsf) 4i’fl 1 Vishnu Prabhakar would have written many stories in Hindi.
9.
Iran.
^ofRRTt Rfed m-iHimih RRR3 Rmi 41*ii I imprisonment to the thief.
In olden days our ancestors would have gone to foreign countries across the sea.
My brother would not have told a lie.
Transitive verbs (Verb according to object)
ifrft I The servant might have bought wheat and sugar.
14. 1.
TJIpt rtl-JIH^n 41*n I
rrr
4>r«ir
3 foddi «r cmjhii kftt ?
15.
How much money would you have earned in business? 3.
16.
The cook might have prepared food. flirt 1-41 3JRR
R>t Rldl^-f4*idU| KtRT I
relatives. m<£1
vTSR^RRTR 331^4^ I The boys would have flown kites.
vocabulary"
vi RR1? <5'K4 PhtHtl ddiMi Rift 41'ii I
■JvfTt* - vomiting
*k«ii<
Mmiditi - imprisonment
Pmimi -
The advocate would not have told this secret to anyone. 90
avi
34isi<MK^ Mil 3«sld HHIOIH MSI ^1*11 I
Raju’s father might have sent wedding invitation to all his
5.
'tft'ft,
Rekha might have read the tragic news of the accident in the neswpaper.
m~l$4l^<siMl tl<4H I 4lJll I
4.
*SKid
The guest might have eaten some spoilt sweet. See, he is vomiting.
You would have seen the Taj Mahal. 2.
Rtt rt^sdsbirt fni* ^m4i 5V11 I
The judge might have given the punishment of rigorous
It might have rained somewhere nearby because the air is cool. 8.
RR
The police inspector would have called the rowdy for enquiry. 7.
Rpff SntiMiti *t MlJl i 41*ii
9.
;jfn«
91
- business rent
gUg^S « Learn Hindi Through EngliBh
gUgffi « Learn Hindi Through English - tenant sdMRl - age, period - tragic ^fen* - accident
d^cPsbld* - enquiry, investigation rRr
- specialist
- in the course of, during
PlMdUl - invitation - bomb
- ancestors sldMItfl -rowdy
30. PAST CONDITIONAL TENSE
tSHraiH - hostel
RRR - secret
It is a kind of past tense. It denotes that if a certain condition had been fulfilled in the past, certain action would have resulted out of it. It, of course, means that neither the condition was fulfilled nor the resultant action took place. The past conditional tense is formed in the following manner. i)
TRST - strict, harsh
The conditional part (clause) of the sentence will begin with 3RR/Rpt. There is no harm if it is omitted.
ii)
The second part (main clause) will begin with rft.
iii)
In both the parts, to the verb root cn-ft-cft-cff will be added according to the gender and number of the subject. It is almost like Present Indefinite Tense (Lesson 4) except that there feminine plural will end in rft (and rff only in negative sentence and the final % is dropped as in Tj?t 'didl). e.g. I
mi«
sic) if I We read. We pass - Present Indefinite
Tense. 3RR ToR eft (1RT) RRT KTH I If we had studied, we would have passed - Past Conditional
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
3RR <1*4 HPIdldt^RR cFsfifWT I If Ram had asked, I would have given him loan.
2.
<1^ tfltsidi i
If a teacher had been available, I would have learnt Sanskrit. 3.
MIW
cit ASSlilqai I
If I had got money, 1 would have bought some essential books. 4.
3i’it cig
«ixnai eft 41’iiMt dleni«i if
I
If that swimmer had not saved (her), Meenakshi would have drowned in the tank. 5.
3TTFt'5^ Mqlaici ftncfl, eft if c)dd qidi I If I had got promotion, I would have got more pay.
92
93
SUjj^S » Learn Hindi Through English__________________ ___________
__________________________ 5Ugg(5 » Learn Hindi Through Engllwh
6.
3JR7 stHled RuRcft UMui R7TRTtS Hiwi? If Sri Ram had not gone to the forest who would have killed Ravana?
17.
3FRRT«ff5ftR^R WdSdl (3tMljl) ftdrfi I If there had been no Gandhiji, we would have got freedom late.
18.
7.
8.
3FRRtfhdl^fl^t ddldd^hERrftRt^^g^^^ I If my father’s health had been all right, he would not have taken leave.
9.
rR
Hteil RRT Midi rft ^*ih RRtRcTT I If Sarala had drunk (taken) medicine, (her) cold would have become less.
10. 3TTT xii^dl eftW Wl/l U^ddl I If Padma had liked (wanted), she would have worn silk saree. 11.
12.
13.
3RP ?7T R i<*m sheft eft t?R aafrt RtR I If there had been unity in the country, we would have made progress. o<nsl
41dd I
If Vivek Oberoi had stood in the election in Tamilnadu, he would have certainly won. 14.
3FR OiHM 3fR RxtJRRift Rft eft <M-n=ll TTrT Rt -IfH itdl I If there had not been bugs and mosquitoes, the child would not have cried throughout the night. 3TRt 3TRtTtft Hi»R mud I rtf RES RT^R 3ft tftS I If the guilty person had apologized (asked for' pardon) the judge would have released him.
19.
3FT7 7JR 'dcRl 3dd eft SJR^SJ^Rtt I If you had got up earlier, you would have seen the comet.
Note: In some grammar books, it has been advised to add to the subject and put the verb in past tense and according to the object, if the verb is transitive, e.g. 1.
If he had read 3TRt 3tR R£T RPTT I
2.
If she had bought the pen rR 3RR *tiH ISTfRt Reft
3.
Had you written a letter rR tpR RS fvRRT KtST
4.
If I had taken the medicine rR fR TST Rt Rt Reft I
5.
If I had called you 3RR fR ^mui RfTT
As the above construction is laborious, it is not followed by most people. The native speakers would prefer the following form in the place of the above: ?.3JRT R?> Mem ?. rR RK *nu jgfRd'l ?.rR 7JR RS fcKSirl
3RR TR fRf tRR eft 7RT-R TtR I If we had taken(eaten) banana daily, we would have been healthy.
15.
3JR7 ni^l <^41 R?ft rtf m?* *m^ HR I If the laundry had been opened, the customers would have brought clothes.
16.
VOCABULARY 3TTisRt* - freedom
i»d>dl* - unity
Rvf - loan
tsldtsldldl - knock at the door tii^di -customer
tsIdHel - bug
3TR7 flgHH 3tR eft *uf if 3TRTRft I
^*ih
If guests had come, they would have stayed in this room comfortably.
«{R^3- comet
MqluR
urt5< - mosquito
yr* - country, nation
94
rlei* - swimmer
- cold trouble
95
*-
promotion
Learn Hindi Through English
SW.glS • Learn Hindi Through English
31.
HABITUAL TENSE
3.
gjrpfcn
Qicdcii atei® The habitual tense represents an action as habitually or regularly done in the past or being done in the present or to be done in the future. It is different from a particular act of the past, present or future. It refers to a general fact. Yesterday he went to Mumbai a particular act, simple past tense. He used to go to Mumbai once every month—habitual act, Habitual Past.
Write the sentence in past indefinite tense (Lesson 24). But do
Mas.sing. Future
MODEL SENTENCES (Habitual Present) 1.
'Si TT^T
Piq I 1? I
I am in the habit of drinking tea daily in the morning. 2.
tjh
frr i tit ?
Why are you in the (having the) habit of sleeping during daytime? 3.
not add to the subject. ii)
+ cet +
Past Tense
The following is the procedure to form a habitual tense: i)
He would habitually drink,
H?l«41 QXfll 1? I Prakash is in (has) the habit of bathing in the river.
Whatever be the subject, write the past tense verb in masculine
4.
singular only like 3TFTT, TtsTT. But for *TT, instead of TRIT, use
TOTTTHT^Et3TRTT cbtrfl % I Uma is in (has) the habit of coming here in the evening.
'flIMI. iii)
Then put and add
according to the gender and
The people of India are in (have) the habit of celebrating some
number of the subject, i.e. «t>
festival every month.
Finally add: according to the subject in habitual present (Lesson 3)
6. n(hi eifri t?^u Afri fi The poor people have the habit of always wearing dirty clothes.
STT-st- eft-eff according to the subject in habitual past (Lesson
Habitual Past
21)
1.
In the case of habitual future, itself will change according to the subject. Wrft,
(Lesson 19)
Examples
Past Tense
3.
Past Tense
Hfrldl Hfqt'»1I<4I sftl 'nidi I Lalita used to go to temple. Now she does not go.
+
Mas.sing
«TT Mas.sing. Past tense
I am in the habit of reading newspaper ■4 3t
cEtH I 3T^^nj|3JT? You used to study well formerly. Now what happened?
Ram used to eat an egg. tin 3TST <su
2.
After drinking tea, I used to read newspaper. 2.
^EE?TT/^jft,
1.
xTET ’’fft ‘STR 3i$si«m M
+ ch
+
Mas. sing 96
4.
cHTft £ I My father has got diabetes. So he used to take walk (stroll) in the morning.
I' Mas. sing. Present tense 97
SUg^S * Learn Hindi Through English
StJggfS » Learn Hindi Through English 5.
6.
i
Habitual Imperative
When that actor was rich he used to go to Kashmir every year.
1.
IFTR ’jjta «1^1 '41 CM Ria IM i TO st I
2.
^*Ull TT^THT ft din I 4?l Rll rel="nofollow"> I Please (you) make it a habit to always speak in mother-tongue.
3.
yftlR’i ydgttttttttttttTift i
You make it a habit to come here often/be coming here often.
Our ancestors used to lead simple life. 7.
T> JflifM M>|M if R^Stt? *J«MHM ^Ilf4 T (3T*H-ft ) T?T cbtcl st I
Make it a habit to read (do read) newspaper daily in the morning.
During the period of Akbar’s rule, Hindus and Muslims used to live in peace. 8.
9.
10.
(2)
A special form of the habitual past is obtained by omitting TR
?fhft^ThRftT^^^3iisiich<Jl sft i
and the auxiliaries (final verbs) sn,st,sft,sff. It is used for narrating a
The Jhansi passenger train used to come two hours late.
repeated act of the past. The main verb will be in form f.
■g^ttpft 3JTi? &KI ^<S|i)^t Rim ch<4) ?ft I
1.
TTOt) I
qifadl
We would (we used to) go there in the morning itself and return
cMrft sft I
Mgrl TH tshdl M>
12.
Tft TTt TH7RH 3TtT^TT ff st I Charan Singh used to reply to letters certainly and at once.
Habitual Future 1.
HlpH 3TT5Tit 31 it ^4) til<91 chi’ll I Mohan will make it a habit to learn English from today.
2.
TT cftT TTO ft Tff TO ('Jimi TiTO ) 3TR TOT Tit eii
I used to get old age pension through money order.
in the evening.
Sania Mirza used to play tennis from childhood itself. 11.
7JT 3<<w< T^T 3TTTT Tift I
2.
3ft (Hi'H >jft flyi ’i’li ft a514 I Sri Ramanand used to bathe in the Ganges daily.
"vocabulary" 3TffHTT - actor
STH-TOT - peace & tranquillity
e^Mai - stroll, take a walk
r41gi< - festival
UT>HI - to cook
T^T - diabetes
mm - celebrate
Am - dirty
TTTTI 3TH it mmumi d>iJD I Hereafter Sarala will make it a habit to cook.
3.
qui^i Mfc|W| if 3TTt cbT^ 3^ yl4T thiu'l I Ganesh will make it a habit to wash his clothes himself in the future.
98
99
• Learn Hindi Through English
32.
Learn Hindi Through English
SHOULD - MUST - OUGHT TO
7.
^1?
The servant-maid should grind flour.
To indicate that something must be done or should not be done or something is desired by somebody, is added at the end of a sentence, e.g. You ought to read. He must go now. They
8.
should wait. What do you want? When
9.
i.
add^ft to the subject. (Lesson 10)
ii.
add HI to verb root - 3THT,
iii.
is added to the sentence:
7t «l«t>i
ui^l Tiff x<wi41 Tupfi* |
One should not drive a vehicle after drinking liquor. 10.
I.
ribll
If there is an object, the above TT will change into 4f if the object is feminine and 4 if it is masculine plural
iv.
4)ehtl4lHrt3tldl 41LHI |
11.
sFrT cFT^nH3TT5T^t 3Tf7 3TFST'FT 'ETH 3TiftHHHTHTf^t’ I
Should read book (Fem. Sing.) - hki* m
We must do tomorrow’s work today itself and today’s work
Must buy horses (Mas. Pl.) -
now itself.
xuGii' I 12.
If there is no object or if the object is followed only HI is to
^T'snafti
be added to verb root.
You must pass the examination this time. Otherwise forget
The patient must sleep - ffrft TftTT rnfffi* I
marriage.
We must call that servant-maid back - TH
H7T
13.
Tit MCt) tlHM H^HI M^ddl |
Old people must wear spectacles while reading. 14.
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
We should not believe in rumours.
13^-37 rfid-ll | It is getting late. I must go back home
2.
AiRih
15. Tell the washerman that he should bring the clothes today.
141 -i^i dtjtdi 1
A guest should not stay anywhere for more than three days. 3.
T7ft 7T7?
-141 414)
16.
|
Similarly a medicine should not be taken for more than three days. 4.
i4i
("4) 41
f^'-Muf) frits 4) xijf^lJ 1
1 if^ii l
6.
TTrt^ 7TlHT 37^7 7pt?
h(1^4)
Htfeista Ht 'THT 3Tt7 ^<|ch fpft
I
To preserve health, we should sleep early in the night and get up early in the morning. 18.
(One) should not bathe in dirty water.
H7 <5*1 Ct>t41 I
17. add 1
Irdfuct3H Hinrl
m
^dtlH 'hl
Man must take pity on dumb animals.
The clerk should immediately write a note (on) about this matter. 5.
7$ 3i!hc< 15I Mt fa^diti chwI'Mitsui
544rvil41^fi t£e4^nin'7t <*>*< MR? f*ne m?<4 Mtpm xiif^l We must reach the station at least 15 minutes before the
|
One should give medicine and diet to the patients at the correct time. 100
departure of the train. 101
Learn Hindi Through English
gyggj^S » Learn Hindi Through English 19.
ic41 (<*iill
% I 31dl*c| TtfttJTT *1^ H <=*->1*4
*
i^^tftriT^rHTxiTftqi
3.
'ipt SHUTT f^nt^nr invitations, (object Mas. Pl.)
4.
31IU*1 ^Tj> hwi* mg-D xiif^ii sft | You should have read this book, (object Feminine Sing.)
5.
Today’s children sit before TV. They should play daily. 21.
wHI cFTT 3TTft’hrd^t 78JT ifcfvTl’ tgvfl T^Tft
23.
24.
’’traffic ?iusu <sAn4) xiiGjij I
(3) Then there is the simple use of xjif^ii to denote what one wants or needs.
The State Bank should open a branch in every village.
Examples
t?4 STTTTTT eEt (ft) *4*11 xuf^i« I
1.
3iim*I *m
We must love our country.
2.
*^$1 g>» xuf^ii | 1 need some money.
TFlft^TT3jt cEt li04t T>feTt*FTEnt *4di I
3.
3TSf *1 *ui xiif^ii, 4t 3TR^ I What does a blind man want, two eyes.
4.
’■mi*) sflsi
5.
xlWlft =FT T^> TJtrnt =Et tj<±4) ri (f^i> | The peon needs leave for a week.
Our leaders should struggle to eradicate poverty. 25.
jjh*1
34S?f*l frt* I
You must memorise Abraham Lincoln’s speech. 26.
41*4 ^ftTTT^ft ri 4* i Rx-iT ei i4l x||f^i> sft | The servant should have brought fresh vegetables.
xiif^ii I
Old people should walk in open air to protect their health. 22.
st I I should have sent more
^441 *IC1<4 3T31 f*41 xfjt adflxfld Hlft *441 x||f^(J |
xiTift? What do you want, sir?
TTFft | The thirsty person needs some water.
Nobody should talk (engage in conversation) inside the library.
(4)
(2) In constructions like you should have, he should have, etc., the same procedure as shown above is followed. Then add: i.
SIT if there is no object or if the object is masculine singular.
ii.
«t if the object is masculine plural.
iii.
sft if the object is feminine singular.
iv.
sff if the object is feminine plural.
Another special usage is connected with style. 1.
He must come - a) 3TToF?t 3TRT xuf^i> | (simple statement) b) 444*1 xuf^vi fgt 3TTT( I ( style)
2.
Soldiers must obey their superiors. a.
^tt 3jRl*l(4«4i =FT (|d*| *4Hd| x||f^l« |
b.
^ft xiiii 3lfi|*ift4i
"vocabulary"
Examples: 1.
2.
I
urflM 'gin 3TRT ■aiRi' SIT I Salim should have come at once, (no object)
SIT I The cook should have prepared
3ii«cu5* - rumour
3TT2T - flour
f^'-Mufl* - note, remark tftHdf - grind yiltsu* - branch
■WI4-&4 - health
meals, (object Mas. Sing.) 102
103
Js^leb* - diet TFT* - pity
gggS « Learn Hindi Through English_______________________________
33.
AUXILIARY VERB - PRESENT TENSE
__________________________ SUK0 * Learn Hindi Through English 5.
HAVE TO fifelT, ‘ft, M3’
iff 4T14 Ml
We have to talk in Hindi in North India. 6.
To indicate necessity, requirement or obligation, ft is used.
iid«i cdhil chi
The poor people have to live in lanes.
To indicate force or compulsion, M3 is used. 7. While ft is mild, M3 is strong, ft indicates voluntary action.
places stress on the doer. He/She cannot avoid the work. But people use M3 at most places.
i3ftMMlftffnM3cnt I
There are so much of bugs in the cot that we have to sleep on the floor only.
M3 is more forcible than ft. ft places stress on the action - that it has to be performed. There is no choice regarding the action. M3
IsliMrl
Transitive verbs 1.
ftMlft f> chuui th fedeh cjf ^^
When ft/M3 is used:
2.
1.
add Mf to subject. (Lesson 10)
2.
add MT to the verb root.
3.
If there is an object, the above MT will be for masculine singular 4.
5.
M37TT according to the object. Then add f to indicate present 6.
MODEL SENTENCES (Intransitive verbs) Mddlf I
7.
sT'+dt ci hd 3F>t TT3 f fl ddi i
RlCdl8ft?T Mtt Mlxl elf ft 3641 fid I % I
8.
*4(fR f 'dMI fl ch % I
Bharat has to go to Bangalore next month. 104
ITMMdf 3lftftMMMdl^M 4,^ ftf f | Raghav has to type three letters just now.
9.
The Collector has to get up at five o’ clock itself. Mid chi 34 < |
^1 gil if Hchld f> fcdl* Ri
We have to give much rent for a house in towns.
Doctors have to keep awake till late in the night.
4.
cl O chi chi \if|q4 Ml «4J5d fcKSIdl 4 Sri I f I Writers have to write a lot throughout life.
I have to go home early.
3.
ggMTMflTMTf whTTTfld <1141 M3dlf I Pushpa has to sing prayer song in the meeting.
tense.
2.
MyVjd df Rd Ml MiTM 4>
Then put ftcfT f/M33T f. But if the verb is transitive put ft3T/
1.
Mft^l Mf 3lMf MiMf ftf M3f f I Manohar has to wash his clothes himself.
object is masculine plural. 4.
I
I have to sell the watch for my expenses. 3.
object. It will become ft if the object is feminine and f if the
■gf TsFcf
(xilcich) flyi
10.
C4cf>|ci1 di) chKdI chl<5 Mgddl MSdl f I
The advocates have to wear black coat.
105
Learn Hindi Through English
SggfS * Learn Hindi Through English______________________ ________
34.
AUXILIARY VERB - PAST TENSE
5.
dtftsgil Miiedi R’ST I
6.
qqT
The woodcutter had to cut the tree.
HAD TO d£l4d> fifrziT ‘W’ To indicate that some action had to be performed in the past as a matter of duty whether one liked it or not: add to subject (Lesson 10)
2.
add HI to the verb root.
3.
If there is an object, and if it is masculine singular, adding HI to
Due to rain we had to get drenched (we were drenched). 7. 8.
to It will change to if the object is masculine plural.
inTS.
4.
I had to go - 'UMi Usi I (no object)
11.
arrft4qft i
^=0 <*>) Ri tniH'l 3iMdi qR-q ycfte ctitdi qSTI
12.
I had to write letter - ^5^ qq fcRsmqqT I (object Mas. Sing.) I had to write three letters - cfht qq Irnst-l q^l(object Mas. Pl.) I had to sell this cow -T5 -u
^q| I I had to pay Rs.50 to repair the watch.
13.
qq^?ftq7T?qTq^T i Due to illness my brother had to resign.
m/1
I (Object Feminine.
14.
TT^T^t3Tqdtq^r^;fcnTq^q<Jn
I
Rajesh had to buy this costly saree for his sister.
1 had to sell two cows - TptqtqFt q^T I (Object Fem.Pl.)
iptqtcf
sjrfsfai ct>i
Due to economic reason, Harish had to give up his studies in the middle (halfway).
15.
fcPr qitqRcbR qjnrT^TTqgT . Rakesh had to take a loan from the government to buy a car.
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
Kunti Devi had to reveal her secret in the presence of Kama (to Kama).
Sing.) 5.
^qT^TTq^T I
I had to eat fish daily in Lakshadweep. 10.
Examples
3.
?fta>-WTT4
9.
End the sentence with TST if there is no object. If there is an object, it will be RTt for the object in feminine singular and q^f in plural. If the object is in masculine plural, end the sentence
2.
At the condolence meeting, all had to remain silent.
verb root is enough. If the object is feminine, this TT will change
1.
urmu i
Babar had to fight with the Rajputs.
1.
4.
kr
HJIH UPTT MSI I
I had to go to Madras suddenly yesterday.
'Jii’ini SIT I
2.
rt/W qUFT 3TU|IHeh Ttqqf filriHI q^T? Why had you to meet the headmaster?
I had talk to him in Telugu only because he did not know any other language. _____________________
3.
sj'nq'l qft ERifc 3l<«< ift pci’ll MSI I
VOCABULARY
Children had to play inside the house only. 4.
did I qit nf^cii wiaic4i« afUHi m^I I Sita had to stay in ladies hostel. 106
3TTf2fq> - economic, financial *hu|
- resignation
■ debt, loan
i d i, ^Tl < i d i - become wet
WRH* - repair
-woodcutter 107
5tgg)S • Learn Hindi Through English SUg^S » Learn Hindi Through English
35.
AUXILIARY VERB - FUTURE TENSE WILL HAVE TO
6.
m 3lHict>i(l feTH H7ferFH 3Tt7fefe rldl fen I The top officer will have to think over this matter and decide.
7.
ftrnsftfe ft
agi4d> fen ‘fen, 'fen'
fe^7 cm-ii qfel I
The leaders will have to remove/eradicate superstitions from
To indicate that a certain action will have to be performed in the future, this form is used. It indicates obligation and not compulsion fellfe). The procedure is the same as explained in the two previous
society. 8.
^TTOT 'flu!
ckcin ft id 'M’fl m^(1 I
lessons.
If you happen to go to north India, then (you) will have to talk
i)
add fe to subject
in Hindi only.
ii)
add HT to verb root
iii)
If there is an object change TT into or if necessary.
iv)
Finally to indicate future add ufei/fen if there is no object. If there is an object, change ufel/fen into nfe, fet, nfeft; fet, feft, feft as required.
9.
Students will have to accept (obey) the advice of teachers. 10. unemployment. 11.
You will have to go now. jnebl 3mufei I
2.
You will have to buy a watch,
3.
You will have to bring some fruits, rjnfe ^75 rfe fet I
country’s benefit. 12.
71 (N
ifahftfefefi fei fen) I
We will have to give (grant) scholarship to poor students.
fet 3TT5Tfe sniHI m^’ii I
13.
Today I will have to go to office early. 2.
ferfe nnfe ft> ffej ftni 3ift nfeft fe ftfen fen I We will have to connect the Ganges and the Cauvery for the
fef fefeft I
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
Rfemchiifenft etiKisii’l fect’l fel I The Government will have to open new factories to remove
Examples: 1.
Tjfefe 3jw
3tHIH et>
eRT Ari nidi M^il I You will have to bring kerosene from shop.
14.
nm?n ^th fe nr fefen i ft> smft sfe ft wim^I ’feft I We will have to print this poem of Kamala Das in the next
3.
eO
P)
issue of the magazine.
We will have to control population for the country’s progress. 4.
fefe 31 MH I diMtl
15.
I
^Rfefe^u^ffeftTnan^wn^nfeni For improving knowledge, one will have to read newspaper
Shekhar will have to keep his room neat and clean.
daily. 5.
qft^n ft nTH nfe % fe ^?T iigdd cht-ft ufei I We will have to work hard to pass in the examination.
Wil 16.
nfe ft> ffer gft sthht n? fern nfen I I will have to sell my house to settle loan. 109
108
Sgj^S » Learn Hindi Through English
SJgf0 • Learn Hindi Through English 17.
36.
i
AUXILIARY VERB CAN’ (sb <11 <10’
The trader will have to send (despatch) goods at once. 18.
fe(c
To express the possibility of performing of an action,
~s<m u^'ii I
The bridegroom and the bride will have to get up early in the morning of the wedding day.
(can) is used. This is added to the root of the verb, to convey the idea ‘be able to,’ ‘can’ ‘may’. The root of the verb does not undergo any change. But will change according to the tense and the gender
19.
ft fit
Rrn Tra
et><41
/ Tra yrau cavil
number of the subject.
fhTT I Subject
I alone have to make all arrangement for birthday feast.
Past Tense
Present Tense Mas
Fem
VOCABULARY 3ra> - issue of magazine - advice wim-ii
- to print
Mas
■Hehl
Traft
W"
«MWii - population
fauiq - decision
il'iR* - progress
Reference
- hard work
- increase
- scholarship
Lesson 24
Lesson 4
Lesson 19
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
U - arrangement
- unemployment
•HcMil
TT57T
t-iehc/1 1
- arrangement - bride
f ^tft gUcft f TFFrnfl 1 can give you money only tomorrow.
2.
’^TT
f ftvT Ft cad ft ?
Can you talk in Sanskrit? 3.
tiHi'd - society
IpTTT'JIT^Ttt
tichdi % I
Subhash can do this work quickly. 4.
I Meena can swim even in a deep river.
5.
i The bear can climb the tree.
6.
VMlfl ^t,
f gtl C!l<3 ^t RxjHA'ftH I
A drop of ink can make ten lakhs think. 7.
3l!'d<*>H ft f> 3id< '*>< tt<*dI % I Nowadays anybody can enter the temples.
8.
^TTf 3Tdl3TTTF5ftl[? May I come in?
110
Fem
rr£t
7T55T
widcflri - scholarship
- feast, banquet - control
Fem
siifq^ctiFt - superstition
flsdi - to connect
Future Tense
Mas
Ill
TfSTfi
Sg^S • Learn Hindi Through English 9. 10.
gjjggjs « Learn Hindi Through English
37.
tj?) 3hm^> f^Tl* Hjff HR 1 I regret that I could not do anything for you. 3K ftrff 7^75qfijft 7377T37T I That patient could not eat anything.
«Ft^ 4t
11.
fI
We can see any film this Sunday.
12. 3373> 3>l
tJ3> is used. This is added to the root of the verb. As per meaning, the sentences will be in the past tense only — past indefinite, present perfect and past perfect.e.g. I finished eating, I have finished eating, 1 had finished eating.
13. Ml11
14.
Cl «J id ehl J iff «H$i 4 Ji tlcfii | Nobody could understand that mad man’s talk.
15.
3^f ^smn aft I ^mi(| I There was a strike yesterday. So the traders could not send goods.
fl
17.
? When will you be able to go to Chennai?
18.
341 chei ’Ts^r^t >41x1 ik ("rdL* 3JT? Will Sarla be able to come for blood test tomorrow ?
19.
M3>s I The detective police will be able to catch the murderer soon.
20.
I That labourer will not be able to finish this work by this evening.
21.
'Si <jh<4?I ■’fra' HtTn3rr3> 1 I will be able to give you loan up to Rs.500 only.
22.
3)^^3?l4M <£1
112
Fem
Mas
■gefteft
K^t
u? 2TT
sff
3TH *3
L.
Reference
Lesson -26
Lesson - 24
Lesson - 27
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
'ffRK Rif 317373^33 I I finished seeing this film many times.
2.
R3T
*0<$l Kt ?
Have you finished learning Hindi by now? 3.
31737 3T3 3K ^33 37 I Ahmed had completed reading the lesson.
4.
TH ndyi 37t flR I The doctor finished seeing that old patient
5.
arnftn 3^1737737^7% i Aameena has finished singing Urdu poems.
7^3 -blood 3nR*-test, investigation
Fem
^nen
38
VOCABULARY jsjfsud 1 - detective Mi'in - mad Ht7 - peacock
Mas
K9’1
3”
n«f|ein Jl’l Ri «uqTTTWft TjftajTT frio I After her health becomes all right, Madhavi will be able to write examination.
4?l3cd* - cuckoo 73T3 - regret KT?T.- bear
Fem
Mas
Past Perfect
Present Perfect
Past Indefinite
Subject
Could you buy that house?
16.
AUXILIARY VERB FINISH’
6.
K3
3>4 J
st I
We had finished washing clothes in the morning itself.
113
StjggfS * Learn Hindi Through English_____________________________ 7.
^n3TTtr3THT^R^xr^ ?
Learn Hindi Through English 21.
Did you finish selling your house? 8.
T3K 1? I The boys have finished playing cricket.
9.
C'lo* ch^l’Tl fcnsi st I
13.
a-i<£| ^l*KKKKft r[^t I Due to debt his property was (had been) confiscated.
His lecture was finished.
It is possible to extend the meaning of ^>T to future tense also, then it will mean ‘would have’ e.g. ‘When would you have your studies finished?’
i All the guests have finished eating.
ft. Please refer to lesson 19 under exceptions. In short, ^TT, ^ft,
(W*r)ft^FT |
10.
12.
22. Note:
The writer had finished writing the story.
11.
if I I had finished swimming in the tank.
sff I The women of the family had finished bathing at five o’clock itself.
If we wish to use in future, we have to add the forms of fVt, ftrft, ftm, fftt,ftrft
it 3T9 TTT
reaching there.
14.
W TTH THE 3 Tjff Hthr xjcRT t I Your telegram has finished reaching here in an hour.
reply.
15.
| The cat had finished drinking the entire milk.
16.
? Did the Prime Minister finish speaking in the meeting?
17.
? Have you finished taking rest?
18.
tthk
3nf .ttjtr. Trftgnnnr^R^JTen i
19.
i The boys finished memorising their lessons.
20.
3TK?T fI On doctor’s advice my friend has given up the habit of drinking liquor. 114
be the termination depending upon the
subject.
"S qfl'l %TT8TTT tHHIf. ft 3TqHTErm TsTcf K7 | I finished spending my full pay in the first week of the month itself.
Prasad had finished passing IAS examination.
wiH
ftf | They would have finished singing by now.
txizft HTTH TR rpEt ftrft IThe letter would have finished it
mH|s|
fHTT ^t> ftf I They would have finished writing the
SWfi.s • Learn Hindi Through English
38.
__________________________ SUgR*S • Learn Hindi Through English
AUXILIARY VERB BEGIN’
7.
<16I<4O> O’<41 "cW’
37?
7f)13 hT'|4 7737I
He is poor. So he started begging.
To indicate that an action has started or has started just now or will start soon, this form of verb is used.
8.
mi<4 UuiMfrl 37^ 7737773 7[3 337 3154 377 37) ? When Ganapati began to sing, then why did you go out?
1.
The main verb will end in (33^, 313)
9.
2.
773 will change according to the tense and according ot the subject.
<*>ih ri'fl I Revati started working with enthusiasm.
10.
I The river started flowing from the mountain.
11.
5*4 M'liaitllFFt 77*1 I We began to laugh continuously.
12.
371ft vfUn^fTTTi 334 77ft i They started reading for the examination just now.
13.
3m4R(1
14.
Tpffc3TiTif ci'iidit 31^1-1 7737 I Sudheer started speaking continuously in anger.
15.
374 7
Subject
Present Tense
ft
3?, 3? , 34IM
Past Tense
Fem
Mas
rival if
M'lrf) 7^
rt'la Ijt
irfl ift
Future Tense
Mas
Fem
Mas
Fem
run
73ft
n<j
n4
Wt
<=rft
ci'il'l
d'lVft
rival
7737ft
vFTT
Hrft
n'l'ii
77341
773^?
rl'lcfl 1?
vl
vFTf
m
rFtrft
Reference
Lesson 4
Lesson 24
,7337 31, Note: It is possible to use perfect, past perfect and past doubtful respectively.
Lesson 19
to indicate present
34 Mirii'l n*il % I The peon has started burning old papers of the office.
afp 374T 3777 7741 2ft I
The guard showed (waved) green flag and the train had started
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
moving.
7)77375; 3^717733? 177734 tttttt it i
16.
3T373T sft5T-2ft5T «*4${4 7741? I Now we have started understanding Hindi a little.
17.
33t
I begin to write lesson every day from six o’clock. 2.
7^77 ^5 77^17173 3Tt
773^ I
The school boys begin to play tip-cat (game) in the evening. 3. 4.
chMtd 377^ nuif 7? I The soldiers begin to do exercise after getting up.
18.
33J77T7T 23)33(7^7737 ? 341<+>ri if
3^73)7 •uti} tn<~l I
Clouds began to spread in the sky and peacocks began to dance. 6.
^5rfT 7737 37l<) xft7 35)^737 | The dog started barking because it saw the thief. 116
33Kt4 7741 I
33774413ft ^7 313314 (37t) rliftl The Prime Minister will start meeting the President every Monday.
Why did the child begin crying in the night? 5.
33773
Due to rain, shops began to be closed.
19.
7373? Qiltui 333773 MVI5 evfl I Due to fast wind, fire started spreading everywhere.
20.
337 777377 fTTT’ f3773174 773 I Children began insisting on seeing the circus.
117
Stgt^S « Learn Hindi Through English
39.
S®^S • Learn Hindi Through English
AUXILIARY VERB - ALLOW
4.
t4‘*nR3J^5?dR'|TRdcr%Adi ehl cRdifl Rmi I The Speaker of Lok Sabha did not permit the leader of the opposition party to interfere in the proceedings.
5.
l41 RURR-ntf dtfi Rai I I The university did not permit some students to appear for the examination.
6.
AgHn'ld?A Rmi I The mosquitoes did not allow the guests to sleep throughout the night.
7.
RftRfRlRl 3T«1 RRl cR (TFTRd, RRR) RaTT I The minister permitted me to take a photo of him.
Put the root of the main verb in ending form ■3rR,AT^,
ii)
Use 3 according to the gender and number of the subject and according to the tense.
iii)
If the sentence is in past tense and if it has an object, add to the subject and use according to the object, (see Lesson 25)
iv)
8.
If the sentence is in the past tense but without an object,
Future Tense
will end in Ratt I
1.
AT£ STTHT IJWeb AT«R Rtt % I
2.
Some teachers do not allow the students to play.
4.
2.
5HlA 3jfi|et>l(l Rid I Our officer will not permit us to make phone calls from office.
3.
sTcteA tugn ermuR-R ? Will the doctor allow the patient to drink tea?
4.
di^^ «4
i
<JUe{>l
RditTfR ^41 I
His(her) mother does not allow him(her) to sleep during daytime.
Imperative
41hk «wi 3rrftKTRt
1.
RfRaRuRdR I Live and let live.
2.
<$cfi eR 414) R CUHH 4dlR Tt I Allow the porter to unload the luggage from the cart.
3.
'5?) 3hm41 ^Td eh?A I Please allow me to speak my matter.
4.
3H iidd Hd ARii’, 3R7 3tR RRrn Please don’t obstruct that poor man. Please allow(him) to come in.
5.
$pr3<5HqddRtRRRd 3Td4ddp eft I Allow Ahmed to stay in your room just for two days.
<3HieTTPtdRRtTI
The sick child does not let its mother to cook food. Past Tense 1.
I The teacher did not allow me to read story-book in the class.
2.
'Amici
chA ^hi^i
Gopal did not permit his brother to go to see the exhibition. 3.
Rdi R) tRI RRhi A/siA dRRt | My father will not allow me to see cinema often.
He allows (lets) me read his book.
3.
Raii i
The watchman did not let the thief to run away (escape).
MODEL SENTENCES Present Tense 1.
cumi
<*JR7T
Ri^RiaA Rt
cbujaiA isAcR Rn I
The Government of India did not permit foreigners to open factories. 118
119
___________ • Learn Hindi Through English
* Learn Hindi Through English
40.
THE ABSOLUTIVE
9.
S^fcis chid
Ril'd I Mt Tf 3<sd i % I
David sits in the church wearing coat.
'jcfcpilcicp 0>4l <J>7’ To denote doing a work after finishing/doing some other work
10.
Descending from the Himalayas, the Ganges river flows towards
earlier, is used. That is, it stands for ‘having done’, e.g. I go to
the sea.
office after eating food. The actual work is ‘going the office’. The work done earlier is eating. The will be added to eat tsilcM. i.e. 3 '•nidi + Idwi I i.e., WXsIMi
11.
M sKjcb rise) fj I Taking up the guns in the hand, the soldiers fight.
there are two actions, is added to the first in time.
RMTR^t F^HinM 3d
dfcbtl41 cftM^ Mlcht iffMR
I
The servant maid will go home only after washing the clothes. i)
Therefore, in constructions like the above, is added to the
13.
TFTit i*i)< tjdcht tpT T3 I
14.
MT? 4h=T HHIMR ^FTT chMIdl t I
15.
itf-clf^cii <M-1cb{ 34l>n141 it asdi cll^dl 7? I
root of the verb (^TT,^,7Tt) ii)
Hearing a noise in the night, we all got up.
If there is already a (as in
TPIcT MR ), totally there
will be one . i.e. MR + MR = MTM
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
I want to fly freely becoming a bird.
MVt^ MRM MR! I 16.
Do any work after thinking. 2.
RTMR ri/MMR M’xll 7?3TT 3TRMfeMR 3TTMT I Seeing the mother, the child became happy and came running.
3.
He earns money by begging alms.
^Hl
^>rfl I
Swimming in the flood, we reached the shore. 17.
tifd M tuM M?t TRI ^iui’1 MRt |
18.
ift
19.
MSftTJMT-l^MT cieRctH that'll SMIC1I % I
3nMMft^T^xrmMR^MMTM^t ?
The bird builds nest after collecting each straw. 20.
What will you do after passing the examination? 6.
TRTMR
HTR |
3HTZMRd<slctR3nft3TT7?T'^|
^>tI
chi
^midi ■cupi'crPPh dg
22.
Ultfl chbn I 4^i^t33?n ?
Does not your blood become hot (boil) on seeing the bad
J^4
I
Seeing a dog you should not flee because it will chase you.
I am coming just now after seeing the drama. 8.
MGCbl RTM
Reading the question paper, the students became bewildered. 21.
They sleep after reading the Bhagvadgita in the night. 7.
'flichl m!« isihdl I
Going to the post-office I bought post card.
Seeing a snake on the path, we started running away. 5.
MMR ifi ^<slct>{ dlPhciT 'M'dl'tit 5til I Seeing the monkey, the child laughed clapping the hands.
Emerging from the flowers, the fragrance spread. 4.
TRTMTM'ff Pb'llf MR Mgcl TT* I
23.
condition of the country? MTOT% RTtM #MMR MMVTM MR^T KMM MS ? I Indians waste (their) time sitting here and there gossipping.
120
121
Suggs • Learn Hindi Through English
« Learn Hindi Through English
41. PRESENT PARTICIPLE
24. 3TUT HifcHch«4<45hit 3TW5S thct><’iWfi »ls I Dissatisfied with the behaviour of his master, Suresh gave up the job.
A participle is a kind of adjective. It qualifies a noun or verb.
VOCABULARY * - fragrance ylttcdl - nest
MsitMi - to be perplexed rtirfi othi - applaud
But it is formed from a verb and it retains some properties of the verb. So it may be called verbal adjective, e.g. i)
- question paper
fdWT - straw
- noise
celt'll - collect
The present participle is formed by appending 7TT to the bare root - x<eidl,3TMT,'Hiai.
ii)
- fragrance
FTHT - snake
- a moving
train. hhtcii
mobile library.
Being an adjective ending in 3TT sound, the present participle will change according to the gender and number of the noun it qualifies, e.g. dgui '’TFft, ftavtcl
iii)
ui4l• (see Lesson 12)
For the sake of clarity, j?3TT may be added after the present participle. This jpTT will change into
where necessary,
d^dl ^3JT VFft TTHKKtrTT% I Flowing water is clean. xiridl i|f TTrft Tt iHT Rshd fi iv)
| Do not board a running train.
chi Md dW) Do not pluck the just-blossoming flowers.
The present participle may be used as adverb also, indicating how the verb (action) is done. Then it will come before the verb. It will agree with the subject. uImici y-cftidi T3TT '■nidi % I Gopal goes smiling. 3TT^ f I Boys come running. I Sita moves out wearing a newsaree.
{fidl v)
If there is an object and if comes after it, the participle will be in form. I I see (find) Gomathi singing. cd^cbl 7TH H'cllti f I The teacher finds the students making noise.
vi)
If the present participle is followed by preceded by W at the time of Gopal’s going. W at the time of his/her sleeping. jftrTT ■’TT# 7TJT4 at the time of Sita’s singing.
122
123
it will be
SMEW'S » Learn Hindi Through Eugl lull
SWfi a • Learn Hindi Through English vii)
If the present participle is doubled for effect or style, it will take ft form.
10.
ftft thvtt
11.
I have never seen him playing. Vrft 3ftr^vftfttftV^rT ft? VT?T 311^1
ftft-ftft ftt 'Jiini % I The child sleeps while weeping.. With 1ft, the present participle ( ft form) denotes immediately after or as soon as.
12.
ft frits!Ghori SEHWI 34 worm ftft GusHI -flift I 1 became tired writing continuously. Nevertheless I continued writing.
13.
PlMril <Jlrfft-fttrfftftftHfttl Vimala began to weep while talking.
14.
TNIT T^ VFT ftft-ftrT Vftv ftt Vtr I Giving alms continuously King Raghu became a pauper.
15.
vvft-vrftftft 34 nd (i
16.
ftt fttv vft vr vr jtt’KR 3^<si Tn* i We became bored hearing the same song again and again.
^jfrRJ ft> 3JTft ftt fttt VFTTI As soon as the police came, the thief fled. 3TTQ 1ft VS sifci^lI I As soon as you reach, please drop a letter. ix)
A present participle can be used as a noun. ^vft vft V7T I A drowning man catches at a straw. V? ftftt vft ftwidl ft I He makes the crying persons laugh.
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
ft Vrlft-fftRft
VH ft I
1 am a member of a mobile library. 2.
17. xRRRft cfft ybltft -'JVTRft 3rfftwft ItR VTT I The officer became frustrated calling the peon again and again.
'jirtrfl l|ft 3TFT ft and I Sita descended into burning fire.
3.
ftftt^fvsft »4
What thing a dying man would not desire? 5.
^5 cfftT fttft-TTtft ft I Some people talk while sleeping.
19.
34id'* rel="nofollow">i ’’ER^sft ■gt’'5^ °
20.
Vlftt fti V^ft-V^ft VrVT ft) fVTT ^TTrTT ft I
*4^1 qisai-^’hdi ^3JTV?T 3TTVT I Mahesh came here running and panting.
6.
18. I
Seeing a crying girl I became sad. 4.
TSCHIMcb 5tin I K3JT
I
Even a stone wears out by the continuous flow of water. 21.
fttft
^ft vft ftVVrT Sift I vftt ftt V?
8.
VT WT I The monkey climbed the tree by jumping.
9.
"vocabulary"
rtsGhm HTxTrft VTrft ft I Girls sing while dancing.
V^VIMrl fulfil tpTTVfe?nft I That mad fellow runs screaming. 124
ViTftnT I
Don’t disturb a sleeping dog. Otherwise it will bite you.
The villain spoke smilingly. 7.
vftr fttvT ft i
Leaving (his) wife and son sleeping Siddharth came out of the palace.
TFTftt 'jildl ft I While looking on, the night falls. viii)
vpft ftfrrft
34m«1tii -
however
- to be bored TsrFTVTW - villain
^Tfft «smi - continue
fvTFTT - wear out, rub
SIVFTT - to be tired
^TT - to ache
Sim - to be defeated 125
- search ftfwr - to pant
Learn Hindi Through English
SUKjgTS • Learn Hindi Through English
42.
MODEL SENTENCES
PAST PARTICIPLE
1.
7t5T RFTTR3TT Mgdl I Wear washed dress (cloth) daily.
In the famous line by John Keats “Heard melodies are sweet,
2.
but those unheard are sweeter," heard and unheard are examples
«FTT'STFTftrlrfl 7>? Is dry wood available in the timber-yard?
of past participle. The past participle is formed just like past indefinite (See Lesson 24). Let us recollect those rules briefly here and apply
mf?faRTR3TRt cfit gfuFFt’
3.
Forget what has gone before, think about the future. (Let
them to past participle.
bygones be bygones.) i.
The past participle is formed by appending 3TT to the root 4.
WT,w,^n, ii.
Root ending in shortens its vowel.
Don’t pluck flowers from plants. Bring fallen flowers.
Root ending in i 5.
also shortens its vowel and take ^TT. iii.
Root ending in 3JT/3Jt also takes RT. 3TFTT, Khn.
iv.
Exceptions have been indicated in Lesson 24.
i.
6.
8.
RFR f I
TFft^Tn^fTpnl ?ctrrrtff^
i
R«u(^3TT) qiMtr
rtal mim% I
9.
Rgrl () TgFT fRHfFFF tTs
It can be used as a noun.
Seeing the flowers that have blossomed, butterflies started
TFT TTRT I Do not strike those already dead.
hovering around.
XHo-irHsI dj FTFJ tf) i 1(51* I The educated should be civilized
iii.
R
It is a sin to take back the donation (gift) given.
Fpit frp 7^ 1? I Dry (dried) leaves are falling.
ii.
TFTTR TRI
chair.
ends in 3TT, it will change according to the subject.
IFF tht j|3TT 7TTQ TRsITI I saw a dead snake.
TFTRRt I
What is a minister’s throne after all? It is just like a broken
A past participle can be used as an adjective. If the participle
t^
RFT FT
We perform annual ceremony for dead relatives. 7.
also can be added depending upon the subject.
Tpft
Don’t believe in what you only heard (hearsay).
Briefly, the past tense form itself is used as past participle. Usage
rfttfi TgcT TFT ulsl I frft IF* TJpFT TTOTl I
10.
^.cf)
3T^3JTRT I
^sld>< tJ1<
also.
Seeing the open window, the thief entered into the house
When it is used as adverb, it takes I* form.
through it.
cd^<=Gl
(Tn) 3TT^ I The girl came wearing yellow
saree.
11.
RRT x^Mxliq
RftH aft ?
Who was the girl who sat here silently? 3FFftRFFR cicidK FR TFJ
I The emperor sat with
a sword tied around his waist. RTF! RFF if H 3TFTT I Don’t come inside the room with the shoes on. 126
127
SUgflfS » Learn Hindi Through English_____________________________
SiJ^S * Learn Hindi Through English
(2)
43.
COMPOUND VERBS
If there is a noun or pronoun before a past participle, then add
to that noun or pronoun. Which one to add depends
on the number and gender of the noun that comes after the past participle.
The book I bought was lost somewhere. 2.
~
feitsft
%?
A compound verb is a combination of two verbs. This combi nation helps in emphasizing or intensifying the meaning, e.g. went away, fell down. A verb is rendered intensive by adding another suitable verb to its root. The root of the verb will remain unchanged whereas the additional verb undergoes changes due to tense, gender, number. e.g. KR sivm - to kill outright, HRT - to throw down, RTH
Have you read the Ramayana written by Tulsidas? 3.
3nq^tlTFft^f
Rldnfl I
acdi- to speak out, sivm - give away, Rsft ^TT - to lose definitely In the examples cited, sivHI, ^TT, 33TT have been used as the
The saree you asked for is not available nowadays. 4.
dtlHIH uRl^uf I All the novels written by Premchand are famous. (3) If there is RR after the object, the past participle will be in
form. TRTRtft R7T Kt’ Ttai I I saw Saraswati sitting there.
(4)
additional verbs. But they do not retain their original meaning. They only strengthen or develop the meaning of the main (first) verb. are some of the verbs used as the second verbs of the compound verbs. These verbs occur in earlier lessons also in different contexts. There they have a meaning of their own. Here none. The procedure is: i.
Put the main (first) verb in its root form (Tft.Tt, fcl(H)
ii.
Add the second verb according the tense and the subject.
iii.
If the sentence is in past tense and if there is an object, the second verb will be formed according to the'object’s gender
The past participle can be doubled. Tf
and number. Add to the subject in such cases.
?T5> Tm I I got tired of (continuously) sitting. iv.
The main verb does not undergo any change. But xRH is an exception. In past tense, it will also change along with the second verb, ■dvt i TRT,
v.
th*,
xtcf) T?, xirfl T?
Compound verb is generally not used in negative sentences.
155TT: It is used to express completeness or finality. is not to be used when is used as last verb. duinftefttgrrTRT i Ram ate up all the bread. TTRTT RTd 128
’’TT TT? I
Sarala slept away at nine o’ clock yesterday. 129
SUgf0 • Learn Hindi Through English
fa fan fa fa wt fa i
___________________ Sgg> » Learn Hindi Through English nr arfat ■gnfa ifart i4j fa^ fa f faff i
What happened once, that happened for ever. 3TV MiSnia fat W fxif^«
She will give away her old books only to me. yd (fan I Hearing the news I started out at once. rmhh
4.STrT: It gives the idea of completion or thoroughness, with vehemence and within a short time. The idea of throwing also is suggested.
tnsft antii41 fa fafa fas sinm % I The cat will drink off the entire milk. fafa
cf TRTT I
falT^fafaRH STH I I
The washerman took away the clothes.
Hanuman killed the demons (in full).
2. fa It indicates doing a thing for one’s own sake. Further, it emphasizes the meaning of the main verb.
mifam ris4> fa Gasfa mfafan rfa sidi I
fa id41-1 tfar4t I
A mischievous boy broke the glass pane of the window.
MmH anfatfa 3jfa
mis sfa I
The money-lender confiscated the peasant’s land.
The mad fellow tore away his clothes.
W ^*14 $a41 -Jifal TsTT friMi ? What! Did you finish eating so quickly?
c-imsfa fafavm sidl I The woodcutter cut away the tree.
3TTV
% ffa( ^5 Tfa fa falffa> I
You please take (away) some money for expenses.
5 .VS: It signifies the suddenness of an action. It is also added to verbs which signify some act of consciousness for emphasis.
3Ts§rf Snufa WT RFT fan I
It also denotes chance, happening. 3TT MSdi means to befall,
Abdul will certainly accept your matter.
to happen to come.
44
sfafa fafaifafafa^fa naw frwfan fafa i
fa
I had (finally) purchased that house. 3.
The elephant breaks up the tree easily.
It signifies doing a thing for someone else. It also emphasizes the meaning of the main verb. ati 3jfal4 3TPRT HKI Wfatfa4 «iie 1 I That rich man distributed all his wealth among the poor. ffanfaf fafafarfasnffaT i
Hearing the news of the death of Smt. Indira Gandhi people burst into tears. M^ilm tjdmt'mfajfa I Hearing the jokes of the jester, we burst into laughter.
farfafa^sfa I The monkeys jumped from the tree (suddenly). far W rilu hi fa I Hearing the noise all people woke up.
Shivaji defeated Aurangazeb.
timm 4 anfa 141 yfl 4y fa I Ramdas sold out his old watch. 130
^7 V7 m^is fafa VST I At a distance, a mountain came into view. 131
gJteS’a • Learn Hindi Through English
__________________________ SUggS » Learn Hindi Through English
MR F5T means to be possible.
^R^TFlRFT it_____________ fSirtI’M frits Flft I You have completed writing such a big book within such a short time!
I did whatever I could. 6.33 : ‘to arise, to get up’ indicates (suddenly) start to... It also has the force of unexpectedness.
9. F3: It implies the idea of doing a thing beforehand (priority,
chlMni f^gji 3^t I Seeing (having) a bad dream, Komala screamed. gJeHi
jjfrTF cwt Fit <^HI FRT I The police inspector gave a blow to the rowdy.
precedence) or keeping safely.
'hTT'f^rt'5ifQ33T I The minister has kept the resignation letter ready.
Seeing the accident my heart trembled.
ihiRt33it When Socrates was giving a lecture, his wife shouted.
MF^TTyTRFRR 3> frT^33? ttsil % I
I have instructed the servant to wait for the guest. 3tRRft f^7T3> 33 FFRT FFTi FR F3T I The peon has kept the director’s room cleaned (already).
^3 33311 ? Why does Ahmed speak in the middle? 7. ^3: It gives the idea of finality, suddenness, haste, doing a thing without forethought or in desperation or doing forcibly. 3F MI'ld 33 TFT M3 FRt, Fj?t 3t MR 3i'll I Do not tease that mad man. Otherwise, he will strike.
oTTTRTft^’jfrrF37trfWt^tFWHT^tT337^F^ aft I The business man had (already) given the news to the police about the possibility of a theft. 10. t5tS: It indicates completion after effort. ftft $
Without thinking about the consequence what (awful) thing have I done!
Fit f?C|ch< w)si I I managed to drive the enemy back.
TTERRTi? ■J? 3FFt TFTT >£t TTlft RTFT3T3 T3T ^3T I The careless son lost the entire property of his father. s7<*<J{ ^3 f^TRTH 3?
TfHTnftTPT C15 4M-qiM ^|RRR wlsi I 1 read throughout the night and finished that novel.
iWt WpF TR 33 ^3T I
The patient sat up in his bed against the doctor’s instructions. ^1 g'JIl
MR ^3T I
The prince became the king after killing his brothers. 8. MF: It gives the idea of impropriety or foolishness. 3HR fWTF MT TJR> TF3 frR3 RTF I He dashed off a full article on this subject.
132
133
Uggs • Learn Hindi Through English
44.
Learn Hindi Through English
CAUSATIVE VERBS
(b)
jhu||jfgp ||J
If the first vowel of the root is long, shorten it. T* and 3TT change into and 3. and remain unchanged.
An action can be carried out in one of the following three ways: The subject himself does the work.e.g. The car goes.
2.
A second person gets the work done. e.g. The driver drives the car. A third person makes the second person get the work done, e.g. The owner asks the driver drive the car.
A verb whose subject does not function directly but another agent is called causal verb. When there is only getting the work done, it is called first causal. When there person who makes the first person get the work done, second causal.
acts through one person is a second it is called
Since, ‘causing something to be done’ is an action which must be directed towards somebody, all causative verbs are invariably transitive. The first causative verb is obtained by adding 3TT to the root. The second causal is made by adding RT to the root. e.g. 1.
RTCt R>R drtcfi T I (Action done by the subject)
2.
§i$d< RiR detin111 (First causal done by one agent)
3.
TtRR deididi % I (Second causal with two agents)
Similarly we can form Msdi (to read), M
Formation of causal verbs (a)
^RTRT - awaken wimi - cause to awaken
'jflddi -conquer Riaidi -help to conquer Rirididi -cause to be conquered
1.
3.
PM I - wake
Roots ending in consonant and having the first vowel short take 3TT and RT.
<*ddi - do tjddi - listen
d>
*whi -
cause to get done ^jddidi - cause to listen
aodi - rise
R3TRT - raise
aodidi - get raised
TRT^RTT - understand «H$iidi - explain
tidsididi - cause to explain
RRTT - die
*<
HHdi - kill 134
yididi-cause to rotate
tjMdi - go around
^hhi -
Radi - lie down
Riaidi - to place
tliodi - learn
Rita id i - teach
dieidl - speak ■^RTT - float 3->
rotate
- call tkidi - set afloat - spread
Rlddldl - cause to be placed - cause to teach sjcddHI - cause to call JWHI - cause to set afloat ^xddidi - cause to spread
dflddl - run
qlsidi - to race
qlsdidi - cause to race
^<sidi - see
Ro id i - show
Rod id I - cause to show
Note: R^gcdldl (for RtsiHi) and RiocdMI (for Rioidi) are colloquial, oidi has exceptional forms: fociMI (feed), focididi (cause to feed). (c)
Roots ending in long vowel shorten it and append HT in the first causal and HRT in the second causal.
nhn - sew - drink
Rhdidi - get sewn
Rieicildl - cause to get sewn
Reiidi - cause to drink
Rrididi - cause to give to drink
Rn - give Rcdidi - make to give Rcididi - cause another to give HTTT - sleep
^cdidi - put to sleep
UTTI - wash
^eiidl - get washed
0,1,11
Sjrididi -cause to get washed
ftn - weep hei id i - make cry held id i - cause to weep (d)
' cause to put to sleep
The following forms may be noted
Rididi - to be sold siddi - to sell RididHi - cause to sell dddl - is made ddidi - make dddidl - cause to make <^eidi - opens iaietdi - to open <^rididl - cause to open 135
5IJgg(s » Learn Hindi Through English
Sjjgjsff * Learn Hindi Through English leave a place
wis-n - give up
^^141 - liberate
- sit
f«toMi - to sit
Piocihi -
^•ii - break itself
ids’ll - to break
j^cihi
'£><>11 - burst
'his’ii - to crack
4>e-ii - get torn
Mils'll - tear
■S'b’ii - stop, stay
12.
cause to seat
- cause to break
13. The child drinks milk.
yseudi - cause to burst 4>scn-n -cause to tear <>et>cini - cause to stop
The mother feeds the child with milk (makes to drink, suckles). 15.
16.
«1TX|| tlidl t I
4'l«Mi’d ebl icfl % I The maid-servant puts the child to sleep.
3.
18.
-ilw^IdtMi % I
19.
The servant fells the tree. •debtds Pi
The owner gets the tree felled by the servant. 7.
20.
37U|lMch
trHsl4l f^tslld t I
21.
The teacher teaches the students (how) to write. 22. The head-master causes the teacher to teach the students to write. 10.
4H^4 «F5crf 4>l4st>4 3 4|4ld f I They make listen (tell) stories in the children’s programme in television.
4l
dk8ft, bdhdl ftdl I
The vehicle (car) was moving fast, I caused (somebody) to stop it.
i^^m«fffcHs(4l idtsldl I The students learn to write.
8.
i As I do not have money, I will not be able to get my cycle repaired.
The tree falls.
hiItk*
3ST4141farTT^ sftlRani^n I Make me drink (supply me with) cold water and feed me with roti.
4.
6.
31Hd>l Tra 91414 ’WRrefi 3TT4^pTsrai^TT I I shall cause (arrange) to send all your luggage to your house through the peon.
17.
4T 4ld>U’d^^^t <jridltdt I The mother gets the child put to sleep by the maid-servant.
5.
bridled % I
m
The mother causes the nurse to feed the child with milk.
The child sleeps 2.
fd riled % I
14.
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
eMdl3ft I Cause (somebody) to get this work done (by somebody else).
^d>IHd>d I
ftTTff TT«T Ririiai ^1 I get all my clothes sewn by the tailor. 43tFft■gsjtTt?T4T5T'fluid 1? I My neighbour awakens me everyday at five o’ clock.
23.
dddld'l I Shahjahan caused (had) the Taj Mahal built in marble.
Do this work (yourself). 11.
^cfirn ch<|3Tt I Have this work done (by somebody). 136
137
5ygg> * Learn Hindi Through English
45.
» Learn Hindi Through English
VOICE
As an object is necessary for an action to affect, the verb of the Passive Voice can be transitive only. The verb will be according to the object, e.g. A mango was eaten; Two mangoes were eaten. In Hindi the verb should agree with the number and gender of object.
STTRl The form of the verb indicating the relation of the subject to the action is called Voice. In other words, it is the form of a verb that shows whether the subject of a sentence performs the action or is affected by it. Hindi has three voices: Active Voice, Passive Voice
ftftnft'mE oNi 'nidi % I
(Object Mas. Sing.)
and Impersonal Voice. 1. The Active Voice <=
?T§%ft
(Object Fem. Pl.) ft afl'd I
something or is or is becoming something. The subject is the doer. tIM -jI Id I % I Mtii Pio I ^ni<4i I 3ft In these sentences THT,
ft sudd ftfft I
The Passive Voice
(Object Fem. Sing.) 6.
represents the subject as acted
upon. Hence the subject is not the doer. The object behaves like the subject and is directly related to the verb. e.g. The enemy was killed; I was called. Here, enemy and I are not the doers. On whom the result of the action (killed, called) fell assumes more importance than who killed or called.
The Impersonal Voice is always in the neutral construction. The verb will always be in masculine third person singular because only the action denoted by the verb is important. Though it sounds unnatural, a sentence will be like, ‘Sleeping is done by Rama / Sita / boys / girls.’ The intransitive verbs of the Active Voice undergo change in Impersonal Voice, e.g. I go (A.V.) - Going is done by me (I.V.). In Hindi: Tnrft/tllai ft/d^cbl ft/rl^f^>41 ft ftlqi ^idi % I
The result of an action will always fall on the object - the affected thing. Hence the Passive Voice is restricted to transitive
3.
'niqi 'flicti % I
verbs (verbs having objects) only. However, the Passive Voice
The Passive Voice is formed by:
is not much used in Hindi.
a.
In the Impersonal Voice there will be no object and so the verb will be intransitive. Sometimes it does not even have a
Combining the verb ^TFTT to the main verb changed in to past tense, e.g. XsTRn mini, 'Umi, f^TT tSTFTT.
b.
This compound verb will agree with the object in gender and number.
subject. If a subject is mentioned, it will be shown as able to or unable to do something. However, it is mostly used to express
c.
The tense of the Active Voice is to be maintained.
inability.
d.
The subject will be followed by ft.
subject. The action denoted by the verb itself serves as the
4.
(Object Mas. Pl.)
are the doers
of the acts denoted by the verbs. 2.
(Object Mas. Pl.)
The verb of Active Voice can be instransitive (TTR fttcTT ftfaT
Active Voice
Passive Voice
ftf) or transitive (THT Mguiftlai <su
TW xTRT ftftl % I
TTH ft rTRlftt infill ft 1 I
fthnft 138
ftftn ft 139
■nt’i
SUgj^S » Learn Hindi Through English
Sg^S • Learn Hindi Through English 8.
Active Voice: Subject + Verb according to subject in gender and number
13.
Being1 weak, he is not able to walk. 14.
Passive Voice: Subject + ft + verb according to object in gender and number Impersonal Voice: Subject + it + Verb always in third person masculine singular form
MODEL SENTENCES
1.
37^^1^1x4141 fl ohi
3.
Was the patient given medicine? STMl
'{HT d"bil it ^>75 R’le ^ft xjm’ciN aft xnioi I We people are unable to sit quietly even for a few minutes.
15.
c<4hh
16.
Oilfd^ltl <4<<-ha ebfq Hl-I 'dlcl I Kalidas was considered the greatest poet in Sanskrit.
4^41if rtHditi 44 hmYi d JI faim 'dim I Swords are not used in modem wars.
17. . 45lft-4>*ft 34I44HM 47 ^-ctSd Tift Jtsl I Comets have been seen in the sky sometimes. 18.
Rice is eaten much in South India. 2.
4>HyiU JP ^37471 4t4l 4
19.
47?T 'dial %f4> xlRHl 47fts-4tif 4ft f I It is said that there are no trees and plants in the moon. 44I
fa'41 -34 III ,frft (47471 ft % I
What can be done, my luck itself is bad.
Wheat is produced much in Punjab. 4.
4? TjtcT ^ftnf I This news was sent to him at once.
5.
I Hindi is taught in all Kendriya Vidyalayas.
6. 7.
‘IKtl «ich(i 4iT ^4 44T ^4 HId (^><41 xfllrtl f I Goat’s milk is used as medicine in villages.
ci5
it hhi 441 I
That Naxalite was killed by bullet.
8.
4TfTsTT 'fliai f 'Rfc4ft4777 ^44ft xTTt^4ft ftrft % I
9.
34ixflch<4 ftTE 4ft?TT ^t
It is seen that the very thing which we do not like takes place. 774 fcHd Mcu»4nf f I
Nowadays all subjects are taught from the point of view of examination only. 10.
^iHi'l if 7TT3-44f m fcitsfl «i^ I In olden days, books were written on palm leaves.
11.
^77
^ft x»1l«
In this climate even one step cannot be taken by me. 12.
177
141
SJJ^S • Learn Hindi Through English
9URg> » Learn Hindi Through English_____________________________
46.
CONNECTING THE SENTENCES
Let us see in this lesson how to combine sentences like: He is my friend. He lives in this house. It will be combined as follows: One who lives in this house is my friend. In Hindi we use jTT for this purpose,
9.
I Those whom you consider holy persons are, in fact, frauds.
10.
11.
5*4i^ <,4>i'if'i^ }di 1> fci»5R 3iMi41'^>’frn’
is a pronoun. Hence it will change if followed by a case. This has been dealt with in Lesson 10. In brief, it will change as follows: ^ft singular -
endured imprisonment for the sake of freedom. (2)
,01^/f^
Now we shall see how to combine sentences like: 1 went to 'Srt piurai -
, RM*i/Rid^i
fil, Fin , Fji h m I
the office. No one was there. It will become one sentence like: When I went to the office, (then) no one was there. In Hindi, we have the following expressions:
MODEL SENTENCES
When ... then
3^-7^
1.
Where ... there
jTFn-'STt
How much ... so much
Riddi-addi
I
TTrTT % <Tij ifU ql^ci % I
The person who lives in this house is my friend. 2.
'STt uttsTT
How ... similarly
«hinid< UtTJT y im 1? I
One who cheats others gets cheated in course of time.
MODEL SENTENCES 1.
All people respect one who has money. 4.
2.
3T^KR7^ f I
incarnation.
TS (311<^) cftnyuiqi 1?3TJ 3TTHpftTt d"l<4i(l 4^1 fudcfl/ 3.
dfH fueim I
W cHHT7TKlTT t TO
Whenever there is a decline in morality, then God takes an
In which country the Ganges flows, it is Bharat.
>vii<
3T3T Tjpft «4<44’1 dFTT Tra iffa dl’U'l rPTT I When it started raining, the peacock began to dance.
RfTTH7T'’tm |% ^TOT I
5.
■^rn-itrn/ThTi
■'Sra T3R R <*ct>di % rra 7T3> TR f
One whose age is above 30 does not get a job easily.
in the country. 6.
I One who has given us stomach will also give us (provide us with) food.
4.
Where the storm blows there trees and plants fall down. 5.
7.
LdU’l <45 4>h
4usn
One who has made this room dirty, let him also clean this. 8.
|| All that glitters is not gold. 142
3f|f3fhft3Tnftt xll^l ^nsft I Rlddl xil^l W3Tt I Go wherever you like. Eat as much as you want.
6.
'd'15 % ^Ti?T THT 3^7 5j*4id & I This the (very) place where Rama and Hanuman had met. 143
• Learn Hindi Through English_____________________________ 7.
gg§fs « Learn Hindi Through English
'dl?l ^li41 'fliil t? , ClVl 4*1 «hl fdt4(1 ch
47.
THE USE OF AND RTiRT
Wherever wisemen go, people welcome them. 8.
'flfSI (1«*i 3tl I cl
d HI cl/ld 4<5I *1^1 *ri *M->H i I
As far as I am concerned, I cannot lift so much weight. 9.
d^l
ft 1.
fJTcTHlff Hehl I
I looked for him here and there (everywhere) but could not meet him. 10.
speaker are reproduced with D& (that). Therefore, the two sentences, The boy said, ‘I will go to college,’ and 'The boy said that he would go to college' would be the same in Hindi:
(TO> KRT W 3TTTT I As long as there is life, there is hope.
11.
cis3> 3 RiRTDeif chim'd 'di-Xdi I There is no harm if the English
rrrgf advert 1
pattern with inverted commas is followed, i.e., 7TS%3r>RT, ‘it
Take as much fruits as you like from this basket. 12.
For reporting a speech, there is only one form in Hindi, namely, the direct narration. There is no such thing as indirect speech in Hindi. To report somebody’s words, the same words of the
fatFTTRR3rl41 fxl^dl I
speech as found in English. ns3> RiRT De RR *1(4^ RTRRT I
As much money, so much worry. 13.
Sft Hl
14.
1?R f^Hicici RT Dln-ii 4>xi( xiisrl |f 4d41 <Jd4>
2.
is used as conjunction.
I am not so much rich as Shri Narayanamurthy.
15.
%l
The higher we climb the Himalayas, the cooler it is.
if sdMdl ^fRi RR TTeH URRTT|1
Did 41 ^4-dd> T^Ri cltsich RTO f 3R41 TTRi3TtlM4< ifc RTH sft RfhRTRf I
I know that he is a glutton.
Even a professor does not have (possess) as many books as a writer does (has). 16.
It is a very nice thing that you have come,
Dld4 '■jvi
3l44chl
3.
fR> is used in the sense of or / whether. (JH 'J1l3il3 D> dffl?
Mltl 3d4 RT7R RRT Riff Rr3 I
Won’t you go or not?
India does not have so many war ships as America has. 17.
Did4 Dd
4
f^R "^TT AgHM
Is it not so?
You become my guest for as many days as you will stay in this town. 18.
3m 3ei 1
We cannot say whether it will rain or not.
Like father like son. 19.
4.
4IH 3«l I
4 RFRT fR> RR R^ RTR I
rtmi
^RTRJR(t) 3Ml RIM (t) I As is the work so is the name (fame).
21.
fR> is also used as infinitive (to). 41
Tell the servant that he go home (Tell the servant to go home).
As is the pay so is the work. 20.
RRRRRiffRiR «<»>tl fRtRFft ««4bllf^iR??f I
(JR^TT«ftaftTt, 3m
341 RRftl
As you sow so shall you reap. 144
The most popular and multi-purpose suffix qim is joined to noun, verb and adverb and thereby give meanings such as owner, doer or as belonging to a place. 145
Learn Hindi Through English
gLRj^S » Learn Hindi Through English l.With Noun a.
about to close - gl^cucii
When =uni is appended to a noun, it denotes: one who sells, one who deals in, one who is concerned with, etc. If
the train is about to start - ui^l
%I
the speaker - sTIm^cucii
the noun is masculine with 3JT end, the 3JT will become T?.
3. With adverbs
T’PTT+c| IM I-iM i.
that which is above - Joucmm
4iMe|IMl - fruit seller
fcMcflcllMI - electrician
34&HRcirMT - paper boy
H-syflcITcn - vegetable seller
- made of stone
the house below - 41x|cHMi *fchld
fiUl^ciiMl - vendor of sweets
wall that is behind - At^Trft <{lclH 4. qiwi may indicate futurity.
Mi^dicni - cartman
- milkman
A cFHMilkmen I I am going to Mumbai tomorrow.
^fcl y c| | M | - policeman
dliflciiMl - one wearing cap
MchMciiMI - house owner
*j
MODEL SENTENCES b. The masculine plural form will end
1.
in '3TH and the feminine
form will be cucfl.
Will you (feminine) go to Delhi or Jaipur? 2.
fadl4)At^fA^MIdl4) cftl Father said that you take money from mother.
3.
cT?3jf^Jl d$ 'dHcfl I That actress says that she does not know dancing.
4.
TJ^t'^t %fA rel="nofollow">A 3TFT ciW Aft 1KT I
moneyed persons - Wclirl sellers of bananas - cl cur) a book with binding - Fiicqctirfl fchnici side lane - icict icfl 7Tcft
gnf^tinsfFfr-fe'SR^?
I am very happy that I could render service to you people. c. If 4 IM I is tagged to a plural noun, that noun will take 3ft or iff form.
5.
TTSfriftAcFT^TfA»KF
34|sni<{l ftvT I
Gandhiji said that we would certainly get freedom.
one with long hair - vfA cuci+cUMI-n'^ cirTiciiMI
6.
one with big ears -etulcuMI
sichi< A A fA> 3iiMcfl cisOmci yRT 3TctA% I The doctor told the patient that your (his) health is slightly better.
girl with small eyes - wl<TI 3fhst+c(ivfl ns4il-wi
We have read in history that there was lack of unity among Indians.
2.With verbs (gerunds) one who reads - MGdl+ciivii-hG'leiKu
8.
one who knows - 'jim^cuvii the tomorrow that will not come - H 3n-taivii *M the train to Pakistan -
AftA 3TlA V5T if fcPsTT%fA> ({ImctcO ^A 3TTtnfl | My sister has written in her letter that she would come for Deepavali.
^Tlft 146
147
SUggS » Learn Hindi Through English 9.
itfeK4ftyT dlyfl d
10.
srntrnfo^i Nobody knows whether it will rain today or not.
11.
chU^ilcFTebig
cFtsdrcfl HleB-Cl Rldcfttl
One who knows computer work gets job quickly. All people like the person who talks sweet things. 13 3T^ff7P7 cFTR Chretien eh4xu(| 3ll« 141 tt d
16.
SUg^S « Learn Hindi Through English
48.
We know that subject and verb have close relationship. If the subject is singular, the verb too will be in singular. If the subject is plural, the verb too will be plural. If the subject is a pronoun like I, you, he, etc. the verb too takes the form appropriate to that pronoun. Apart from these neat rules, in Hindi, if the subject is masculine, the verb will be in masculine. If the subject is feminine, the verb too will be feminine. In certain tenses, when the verb is transitive, the verb will be according to the object in number and gender. So far good. But what will be the form of the verb if a) singular
TKTMxll^lqirl TH «jx=il «Ft‘gfzt I
and plural nouns, b) masculine and feminine noun, c) different pronouns
Chide those children who are making noise there.
come side by side as subjects in the same sentence? In English, when
HltR HINU| ^41^ 11 The minister is about to speak (give lecture) within a short while.
a multiple subject consists of a third, second, and first person pronoun, the verb is in the first person. Let us take the case of Hindi. 1.
3mr ct>i4st>*< if hr rhrh 3tt^ 1? i
17. THRMdirl
RT hifcict> 1>?
7R 3TtT rT^nrt 3TTTJ f I 2.
Who is the owner of that house (made) of stone. Tft
20.
=0? elJldini eogTit 3TRT^? Where has that traveller wearing a cap come from?
If the subjects are human beings and one of them is masculine, the verb also will be masculine.
xitddl ^1
{R fTldi if I
The clock (watch) that costs a hundred rupees also works well. 19.
If the sentence has more than one subject, the verb will be in plural.
Two singers have come to participate in today’s programme.
18.
AGREEMENT OF SUBJECT WITH VERB
4)dl 3jfaTR 3TR 1? I Msi 3^7 cdsf4>qT 3TT?f I 34TH 11 3.
qeRld «smi xu[^i> |
If the subjects are not human beings, yet living things (animate), then the verb will agree with the nearest subject.
We (one) should never believe those who flatter. 3fh tttt’ tr nft i1 4.
If the subjects are not living things (animate) and each is singular, then the verb will be in plural and masculine. 3^7 'HSti? I editi 3Tt7 STTcft RJ 1? I
148
149
SUgg^S » Learn Hindi Through English
* Learn Hindi Through English
5.
11.
If the subjects are not living things and in plural, then the verb
adjective, then the gender and number of that adjective will be
agrees with the nearest subject.
according to the nearest noun.
VirT 37t7 ftoi$<4i «sil I 37ft ’■hM Hsi 1>l 6.
then the verb will be formed according to the nearest object. 31ft ehMsi iaftqi I
Pairs like M Id I - ft a 1,
irft are treated as
masculine units. So we have to say: (ft ’TTttT-'ftdT,KTf«4?d, (ft -ei |x| I - XI | x[).
ftft^trST37ftM41 <3(14)1 fft737ftft 37ft 31<3I If 4ftftor 777J is placed after the subjects which are of different genders, then the verb will be masculine. TST’T 37t7 ftoi I 4)41 ftflc) f I TT4, sfftrtTT^rRfttf I 8.
37ft7T7ft
In certain tenses when the verb is transitive and formed according to the object and if there is more than one object,
7.
If there are two nouns in different genders but with a single
The readers of this book need not feel confused over the complexity of these rules. They will be able to come to grip with these rules in course of time by extra reading in Hindi. However, when a sentence looks clumsy or sounds unnatural by following the above rules, it is advisable to recast the sentence or break it into two so as to make it sound normal. Instead of saying,ftld I 37ft 71*4 37lft f (as per rule 2), better say
Some grammarians do not agree with the rule no.2 above but recommend that if the subject are of different genders, the verb agrees with the last. It is to be decided by personal choice.
ftftTT 3717ft | 37ft TUT ftt 37T7nf I or ftftfT 37ft 7TK K^ft 377rt fl (rule 7). Instead of saying, 7JK 37ft ^KjfTTt Kt (as per rule 10), better say 7JR 'Jflft Kt 37ft ^K ftt '’Im 1 % or 7JK 31ft =TK Ktft 'KTft f I (rule 7).
7TOcistbl 3ft7 J«-5l(l Msftiftt 3tlcfl f I 9.
If the two subjects are quality or feelings, the verb remains in the singular. sETU 37ft 5® ^37TI I became angry and sad. 3743?) VST 37ft db^MjpJT I He (she) was grieved and surprised.
10.
If the subjects are pronouns in different persons, the order of preference for verb will be first-second-third person plural. ft, 37t7 7^7
tjr
74 f I
sft7 ^k "stt 74 Kt I
150
151
SUggfS » Learn Hindi Through English _____________________________
49.
SggjS » Learn Hindi Through English
3)7 4
SPECIAL FEATURES OF SOME CASES
4 87574441
77545754)41 1.
While 4 14 cm means meet or see, 57) Pern means become available
It comes after an object, if the object is a human being. ■8(477554 4*371
47754 Ihcii 11 met Ram.
It is not necessary if the object is a non-human being or an inanimate thing.
*P
JII4
I
Other longer verbs which take a it are: 375 577, MI«Pl 577,
cK4t <J*P clfj
2.
3$ 775 54 filcdl I Ram got it.
ynshirt «h< (meet), 41*41 «h<, 3l<;i 4>< (promise), -hhlrl 4>t,
?
Both 54,4 are used with nouns denoting time. 54 denotes a point of time (at) whiled denotes a period (during).
577 (love), ^1 (pleased) ¥li<0 mt, $55777 577 (refuse), WT7 57t. 2. In expressions like 37773)44*357,
5$ 775 54 37757I He came at night.
is no harm if it omitted.
5$ 775 4 37737 I He came during the night. 3.
But if the noun is qualified (has an adjective), both 54,4 may be omitted. 5775 775 7J77 5M1 5>7 74 4? T77
4.
5$ 55) Hfft 377^?
54 is omitted when the verb indicates going to or coming from a place. W5)
3754-3754 57 (ehl) tip
54 is to be added with the days of the week and the dates.
Hindi has two kinds of verbs: (i) direct like 73757,n
If two nouns are connected by of, the of is translated as 37747-44 depending upon the next word (Lesson 9) in Hindi. TTrffSTT
7775377 54, mTx| nidjisi 54 6.
a.
‘I expect a telegram’ will become ‘I do expectation of telegram’.
if 5775 3775^57 37757 I 5.
577/4; /H?)
is feminine while
m) may be added to inanimate things for emphasis.
1.
3P aw is() M
is masculine.
1 expect a telegram = I do expectation of a telegram. 4 <777 44 TIcffm 577777
$ 1. It is used when the verb is 57$,4t57,''J75, hp i , (h M,75$/St iP
4 <777 577 $55)77 577777 $ I 2.
We respect them = We do respect of them. 37737 5774 fl (577 because 37757 is masculine)
if 57S774 f4>*f)*i •Up <Ml
$5 d-i4>l $7575 5774 4 I (54 because $7575 is feminineja
4 7573) 4 773757 ■’jtn 1 152
153
» Learn Hindi Through English 3.
Stjg&'S • Learn Hindi Through English
He helps me =' He does help of me. TOif +^tRRR/1
%I
g. feminine)
TOitit «5i«4ni wen % I 4.
TORR R> cftR
The teacher praises the student = The teacher does
TOT ifc T*R> 'gsft f I Ram has a daughter.
praise of the student.
vihci<|
rtiilgi 4>Trl 1> I (Rft because
3T&RNct> vJTR
Ri TOT RT RtR 1?1 Animals have four legs.
TO 3Rftr 3ll
M^itUjrtidsb feminine) b.
is used to indicate relationship, parts of the body, property, irrespective of the number and gender of the next word in Hindi.
RR/^t is used to express the value of a thing. TORR rftn TRR ^t stein - a pen costing three rupees.
KRR VR> nGj-i sft I We had a sister.
■jTTO TRR RR Rt?T the horse of the value of thousand rupees. c.
TJR> RTR i? I Ahmed has only one hand.
R^t TTOR TOT tifxlq 11 The minister has four secretaries.
RR/cfit is used to indicate the source of a thing or maker.
3TR3tRlft, d?
R?2R RR MRild a stone house
m-mi
^geit ^t Hlrll a garland of flowers TOT 3RJ^t a gold ring
4/to
a.
4 is used adverbially. R8TR 4 - briefly, - secretly.
if - openly, RR TOT R
b.
R denotes price. TOTORt 4 Pha} iTR
? How many apples
TO^^tRit a silver watch TJRRftRRT^t
will one get for ten rupees? c.
make” (Richard Lovelace) d.
That child was bom in a washerman’s house.
RR uldHH the merchant of Venice
TO TORT (if) TOT R^R TO ?
RTRTO 3uq4l villager if WK
Who was there at that time? fR Id41 (if) ZRTRT «i(5ri TOTO % I
& Jawaharlal Nehru belonged to
Nowadays tomato is very cheap.
Allahabad. e.
Sometimes if is omitted. TO TO TOR TORt R> TO (if) jpTT I
RR etc. are used to indicate a place or residence
Rft
^<si? What can one, who has no eyes,
see?
TO is used to indicate one’s age TO 'TOT TO cisRJ ten year old boy
d.
Sometimes it it,RT it are used to mean from among or for emphasis. ^R Micil it it 3TTR TTrItih % I
f.
TO denotes strong negation. TO RfT^ TO Riff I He will not (at all) go. 154
Among these fruits the mango is the best. 155
Sgg> » Learn Hindi Through English
SWffs * Learn Hindi Through English______________________________
50. PARTING ADVICE
Midi TsUdlft^ R«t>ini 'Aim 11
3ldRdl
Gold is dug out of mines. 1^3'ft'ft 3^t Rrtilvft I
1. The absolutive form 357 (Lesson 40) should be added to the Word concerned. It is not to be written separately.
He took out the watch from the pocket.
fft73T3>7, 737-4l<M, ft-d<M
773ERft fartl<M ft317377 I Carry the book from the table.
2.
Other examples are: ftftt ft ft, TTJS ft ft, ft? 37 ft etc. e.
The following verbs take er before them.
7733.
33777 77337 rely on, 33^3/14^31713337 - believe, ^3377 37737 invade, attack,
num - blame, 'jt-Mi si'll - be angry,
Mid i - flirt 1,ftd-ftl, xuvl-'UvH, 3 <33 I - fa <si 3 11
Hyphen should be placed before 777/^777 ^3-73, 3TT3-ft7773ft^
4.
3JvR3R37 commit atrocity. f.
In the case of compounds, hyphen should be placed between the nouns concerned.
Hyphen should be used in certain words to avoid ambiguity. 7^-77^ is different from I
Sometimes we may omit 37 .
5.
In pairs like 77^-33,3^-Hftt, USe the vowel rather than3. Ron*
ft 3773ft 3T3 (37)3^77^1
33,ftfft^,R?fft
I prostrate before you.
It is to be noted that our currency notes have the word 7733 instead of 73TTi
3T^ft3Tft(37) 3^7 313313 triftui I Great disgrace will fall on your head.
6.
some Sanskrit words found in Hindi, fa aid,
(lifted 373ft f^ctilft (er) 3773 7737I The parcel reached its destination.
3773133 (37)3?
7.
3ft, 3ft should be written as separate words. 3ft 3ft7T33ft, $ft ch^MIHltd 3ft,
8.
lift
ufft, 7773, 337 should not be written separately. 3fftf^3, ilfdidd, T7TH33T3,33777773,331^11 fa
ftiffttl
Send this letter to his address.
9.
Some words have two forms in currency. Both are acceptable. Some examples are: 3j?7ft-^ftf 377ft-37ff
777^3-77^3 §ehW-<j4>id dl4Ri-<3<sim 3733-3cf3
’sR<37rt-«i<4?rt 37rft-3?ff 156
are now in
use. faa'3, are becoming obsolete.
3u«tftl fatift stctiyl (er) 'Jim'ii? Where will the poor man go to?
It is no longer the practice to use right-slanting stroke below
37377-37^77 157
Wsih Appendix - I Si13lol
CLASSIFIED VOCABULARY
raisin mozambique custard apple orange peach apple
Fruits grape at'jfk
3FTR
311^1 3TT| 3TR an^spsTRT cfxi^d
fig walnut, chestnut pineapple pomegranate guava plum peach mango plum jack fruit
WtKT tfdlc^ ifcr
xgcT Flowers oleander lotus Wd’iV'PT?,
fetfw, ■firafira, riicTT 3?}
a<=£3 a^r *ik
TTRTT
ctd
currant banana elephant apple date musk melon apricot rose berry pompelmoose cherry rose apple tomato water melon thorn apple orange pear lemon papaya jujube, plum wood apple
Jjd|c|
MVI, "MHeft W
dtRltl HHI'+idt
Hl'KI rjlfd^l 159
lily bud pandanus chrysanthemum flower of pomegranate daisy balsam tulip rose marigold yellow jasmine, magnolia jasmine sweet jasmine olive basil narcissus prickly pear cobra flower myrtle daisy round jasmine
SUgf^S * Learn Hindi Through English
SUg^5 • Learn Hindi Through English q4*j<si sun flower silk cotton
friR,
Sdilcdi 3t1^
4*1 ch 3d *4-Met
Trees and their Parts
chid chidl rjsjfr
rir? ^5Tcr feolcbl 'jRT IF?
sid, SllOl ?TTS
•Ilk'Md
^T^TT, Mcdl
«l«jd
riht
sfr^rr^
«hhh, rmfh
germ guava mango tamarind graft wood thorn stone gum pine bark rind coir root conifer branch palm tree stem coconut margosa leaf holy banyan tree acacia banyan bamboo seed plum, jujube birch pulp mulberry cypress teak cactus
Vegetables 3Rsft
cat'll
ISRs^ll
9kt ’Tt'sft <«1K, ^iChcTl
■q-4Isi, Pifcl riritri
HMcfi
^61
itril
WR KPT
an edible root 160
myrobalan potato colocynth long cucumber pumpkin bitter gourd ivy gourd mushroom pumpkin squash gourd musk melon cucumber carrot cabbage cluster beans snake gourd beet root sour lemon water melon coriander spinach, potherb mint pumpkin (white) onion cauliflower cabbage capsicum brinjal lady's finger lentil chillies radish fenugreek yam garlic bottle gourd sweet potato turnip drumstick greens sabre beans
9R U? ■’thfcf rft
drains and Pulses 3R^
M’fl
dildHdi ^*TT ■m^ci Rl4SI, ft=dSI
HH
^ddl, 'AH'MM
KT51
yellow gram black gram white gram horse gram wheat field pea gram rice beaten rice oats barley millet sesame pulse paddy pearl millet maize pea pulse of lentil green gram, kidney bean ground nut red gram finger millet cow pea sago
Mbft, WT Hddi 'JlNHiCl
rikT m ci
hh<*
'rffc
PH VW? Mil
Iron ofKIh •vroH H0l{ HI'S
w fiptf fctf feft
Eatables 3TST W
^dlh-41, elivil ^9, 359
4>ldl (W ‘S1PT cUR
egg pickle ginger cardamom sugarcane curry cashew nut pepper minced meat saffron
TT< KW INCH
ftsl crh!
cTRT
161
rice milk jaggery meat clarifiedbutter sauce sugar butter milk, whey nutmeg mace cumin seed curd cinnamon milk coriander seed salt cheese betel leaf thin rice cake loaf pistachio almond butter cream gruel meat pepper chillies sweets sugar candy liquorice jam small mustard molasses salad castor seed bread butter milk parched rice clover wine
SURRAS • Learn Hindi Through English
SUjffi » Learn Hindi Through English w? stTTMT BKBt WK
tiid
crane goose, swan
HIKH w
honey soup yellow mustard betel nut semolina, coarse flour dry ginger aniseed turmeric asafoetida
ttct
----------------
~ ,l,ifen A nimuls
<£
<3 "''Ml WTriT <SK$I TOT
Birds
=bl<4d, ^3TT
fa^tr, tot ’tft’TT
■^FTT^,
tor ktcTT did ebb «Vjdl
k £k «lCf1<Sl
■^lyT
’frf $tT ■*kn, ti i Rcbi
bIk
swallow owl wood pecker pigeon cuckoo crow eagle vulture sparrow ruddy goose red-legged partridge bat kite chicken partridge parrot magpie stork quail duck, drake weaver bird hawk, falcon nightingale cock hen canary peacock oSiich
TOT
TOrs, (tok ■fe
W
■^3TT
^ddl
■stl’M, $k
fWt
TOJ, TO?
^ft4T
Sb TOK, TOTOTO
d^sbMl
162
riiror fmi
camel tortoise dog mule rabbit hare donkey, ass COW squirrel jackal rhino alligator horse panther, leopard mouse mole boar giraffe pony leopard hippopotamus antelope mongoose monkey goat tiger stag cat ox, bullock bear sheep wolf buffalo crocodile lamb ape hyena
^3R
f^KB
fox hound lion bull Pig elephant deer
Insects
B^BT Od'Hd pKtitZ
’’tkrc
^ffeT tottoT
f?0H4>dl
t
?fhn W fest
sfen, fro fero fd <-Hd.il
HPI TOBT, HildBI
♦iWl
boa, python crab earthworm bug chameleon centipede grain moth snail black ant ant lizard glow worm. fire fly louse leech prawn cricket grasshopper locust wasp butterfly cockroach white ant cobra moth horse flea wasp scorpion spider fly mosquito
fish bee frog snake oyster
USX-li
BtJH'Wl ^(©ch BN fe
JTfff & 3NT
parts of the Body 3PJ6I 3krft, silk 3Fnfk^T arte, 3Fpft TTSt afe, ^fc, TOK wr «+>♦«,
^T, ®TR, TtH tsrNsl
TTrTT, '3x5 *n
163
N’t, w
thumb intestine ring finger eye finger heel lip shoulder temple waist, loin wrist arm pit ear little finger elbow hair skull blood neck throat cheek anus kidney lap knee skin nipple, teat breast buttocks face braid chest
im
SUg^S * Learn Hindi Through English
SUga^S • Learn Hindi Through English
faq
Rhk farit fit'll ZFT
t'""1 trffa dot'll
ffafa faa W
l§?r
dl^H FT#
Mtidl
teit fas yadl tz trft
'L'-bSI sl'M ?fafa fa?
Krai
jaw thigh liver tongue ankle leg chin index finger sole palate spleen tooth jaw beard brain heart nostrils vein nose nail pulse navel eyelid rib foot calf of the leg back pupil stomach muscle foot, leg lung arm pit eyelash arm hair eye brow gum forehead
mouth, face fist vagina backbone penis head bone palm hand heart
fafa ft?
fat
?fafa
S-faT
fefiR Diseases hydrocele blindness
farm Spjftnf, 3iM^,
3|(dtlK
chlHoll,
TftfcFTT
4>lcl 1 '■rcK ^•sl
fafa W
4*11 i rrfarra 4
Hehl
’Ifa •^cb
^ch'W
dl^d, ^TT ?Rt ?R
164
indigestion diarrhoea goitre constipation jaundice typhoid hunchbacked leprosy cough scabies itch baldness gout, rheumatism abortion whitlow dumb giddiness small pox dropsy cold malaria, ague plague asthma diarrhoea ringworm
heart attack sinus w stone nfat ■qyiyra, <-i=tr=>tparalysis elephant dysentery fafat blister Ttfar, fj?rcn, pimple, acne abscess deafness piles fever cjSR fistula W diabetes nfai? epilepsy fatfa cataract fafanfa? chickenpox tuberculosis wn, st? lame <^ISI dengue trbi-si «^siR influenza small pox ^?ld
i 4ki
3Tlf^ Clothes fafan
cfrsH <+>41*1, <3>
n??T, F?fa ■nrafafa’n
f?le1 l^b W3
■4b i l •4ldl, *1H<
bodice napkin blanket shirt cushion bolster cover muffler veil sheet cloak blouse
*hRhi
^
fafa dfcb'MI
faRwr <<w A
fafa
■qfafafa
tfa
fafai
4Wi fa#(
sfafa tnfa
underwear, half pant socks shoe hat cap pillow towel gloves dhoti half pant turban trousers curtain bedcover belt mantle veil bolster table cloth socks stockings quilt handkerchief cloak, gown petticoat uniform chemise salwar, trousers saree TFT 3TTT 3H^W
Gems and Jewels
^31
cbizi
fat?
165
ring bracelet bangle (iron) earring hair pin, brooch nose pin zircon, sardonyx bangle gems
SURR'S » Learn Hindi Through English medal wristlet TO, R’jft nose ring sapphire anklet M’MI emerald topaz turquoise armlet pebble *1|Am rel="nofollow"> ruby, carbuncle tiara, crown, diadem coral Kt?ft pearl lapiz lazuli, cat's eye ellt’Bb, dlicft ear pendant oyster agate neckband ?R necklace ^fcr diamond
rim rtlgi WW rihn
dddl
tin iron marble lead gold
-Relatives 'bi'w, mm
■mi •4)
'jfl'flT 7W, ^rt ^<5 Mil’ll mf
dRi
laftx W«t Minerals 3riTO> ^Wln
mica steel glass bell metal <=t^M
SURR> • Learn Hindi Through English
rim
rirR
M Ml til MMItO
mrit ‘'TH!
TOft vfa
166
father's younger brother (uncle) father's younger brother's wife, aunt elder sister's husband elder sister husband's elder brother husband's elder brother's wife father's elder brother's wife, aunt father's elder brother father's father father's mother son-in-law husband's younger brother husband's youn ger brother’s wife husband's sister's husband husband's sister daughter's son daughter's daughter grandson grand daughter mother's father mother's mother husband
Adi,
Th 3m
riim
w min,
Tldl'JII
writ wi mrit mf mrit, mro
mrri
TIT, KRTT TOtT
TOft
Kbn rifcft
Anidi, dAtf)HT
•H1J
wife father son daughter son's son son's daughter father's sister's father’s sister's husband sister sister's husband daughter-in-law father's sister. aunt brother's son brother's daughter sister's son sister's daughter brother brother's wife mother's brother's son mother's brother's daughter mother mother's brother, uncle mother's brother's wife mother's sister’s husband mother's sister, aunt mother's sister's son step mother father-in-law wife's sister's husband wife's brother
wife's sister mother-in-law co-wife
w rita
- Occupations 3TWT5F 3ffmrin
3rfticfdi 3||<$(d
Chdlct)l<
i{ Aitild ^•sl
Ml ell
mKRTt
'Ji 1^*11 'Jll^tt fjI'Rtl I'Jf 'Jjell^l
SlRhMl
mfrrit TOT Mel lei
mf
^t
ejItot deidl^l
167
teacher engineer actor advocate commission agent artist butcher farmer green grocer potter treasurer shepherd musician milkman peon watchman, security magician detective binder weaver jeweller tinker contractor postman betel leaf seller oil vendor tailor broker midwife sub-inspector nurse, guardian (female) carder plumber
SUgg^S • Learn Hindi Through English
^41^1 THHKt
yctilSN)
Md'tdl, WtHI
=T'vf
barber sailor journalist betel leaf seller grocer watchman priest publisher manager lecturer pedlar carpenter weaver sweeper
SURRAS • Learn Hindi Through English reporter secretary soldier goldsmith merchant physician barber confectioner
tibiK
Building and its Parts 3fHnt Silcll
3frf)3t 3lHld
*1 wi I , ^3
Hsft
rv
KKft
<M
fefcs vloidiK
cl
°4104 id 1
ftw, snwra
labourer boatman banker gardener printer clerk accountant (traditional) sculptor sweeper cobbler dyer mason cook cashier clerk writer, author accountant (modem) auditor blacksmith lawyer physician(native) lecturer teacher editor
aftfi tSWT
orAd ofcl^ld
ffe£t ■'ISJflll
W «stt W d
acloi ddd) Ml
HeT
fy_,
did
Mtdlcii Hcltdt
168
attic, garret niche fire place courtyard eaves brick pillar tile granary window peg platform lime door frame bar roof, terrace thatch window railing lattice chain peep hole latrine door door sill corridor, threshold tap foundation gutter plaster
urinal floor •sKUIol portico verandah ®Kld31 drawing room Hdld dais parapet arch ntfr gutter kitchen ventilator Si^dk rafter wr stair wwjfg rptWHT bathroom
^lloftsTFn
TRf
s33T , ’dnd’l
fifen fs®d 1
fWt afd rel="nofollow">4i aeai
Household goods aw+n-O 31 l^d 1
3W<1 SlWofl w dxikl
dikl
<SUd
dddl
shelf mirror iron box mortar comb bowl small bowl, cup frying pan ladle fork chair axe kettle tiny mortar for medicine cot pitcher mat spoon
cTSRRt, ^Icfi
mr cTTcn fati^ d<jdd, sold
ferrami
■^Idld’l SJ'Kpft Halt'll rR5T Heid HlddM, Mld^H Mlefdl
^tfdld slddl «Kdd «Hedl
dl«n, ^pft, dldl,
■
fimzt
key tea pot cot tongs
^eld did cl dVl rp-Ft), rPTFTt
169
fireplace, stove stick sieve broom swing basket small box box bucket lid earthen lamp oven pillow plank for sitting pan plate wire lock three-legged stool tooth brush matches earthen lamp milk pot censer pan screen, curtain bed door mat cradle saucer cup flower vase purse utensil, pot bucket brush pastry roller bottle sack, canvas bag chum stick
SURRAS • Learn Hindi Through English
SUgffe « Learn Hindi Through English 'Ayi Alep! fa-M-ril
faft ^ter tftetT
tiOdi ’Tffa
fe
fa fe-u ■fat
pestle table reed stool candle dish quilt rope string , fata lantern tumbler, bowl glass pane phial box nut cracker soap stone to grind condiments jug, pitcher needle winnow scythe earthen kettle
Xr*afen? fat
^Icl, c^<^l41
fet ■’fa’ fat fat fed fetat HVcR
fefat fa AmMiH
pick axe shovel blow pipe auger mallet sickle hammer plough
WfT HlN’SI
<MViI
fauti fatal
tapin' -
Directions
east west tafat south
- Tools
saw razor nail spade axe scissors pen knife knife small knife chisel nut bellows lancet syringe bolt screw screw driver
ffefT fa HUT Davs of the Week riWTR
Monday Tuesday Wednesday ■gfatfeli, WtR Thursday SjSbMK Friday SlPlMK Saturday K,
^pfa sntd Rld«K
ffa«K
fa Mllfal
4l
cTTeT
w
black rose colour ochre orange colour blue yellow violet brown red white golden green
(il)
sfta, wt fact, Hosts
3nritTra Mid
5Fr,fa
fefa
Rr, Rma W, MddKI
fajj
(Starting around middle of April) 9tl IO
fau,
Milfcfch,
4iIRm>
dark half of the lunar month moment hour half yearly quarterly day time noon fortnight (i.e. 14 nights) day after tomorrow/ day after yesterday (according to verb)
31 IM l(p, 3RTT3 HI Mm
afternoon new moon today midnight tomorrow/ yesterday (according to verb)
c^c>u| ■qjft
Names of Months (Indian)
’-irrt, wi?, fafe,
winter autumn
fafa, 1Ffe - Time
3TRT
41U
far,
spring summer rains
?Rr[, SR^,
Colours
fafm
sfat
mH id, nil, d-s=hi
full moon forenoon dawn
7j^r?r, RtfeTT, tR<J, Mid:
KRffaf,
fe. 170
^fa, Mlfa, oRUIO
3WIMIHII
January February March April May June July August September October November December
3T^cf
-rA .. TTM, w
diM
Names of Months
fa
^53, hIhh - Seasons
*i$Ri, HIH,
fa
171
morning month
SURgS » Learn Hindi Through English
SUgfl*5 * Learn Hindi Through English
$ldi®«l, STrft strt, tan, tat, diyy>id
tai tiMl l^, $Udl
d$<=n<41
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66
night century evening bright half of the lunar month century week millennium
3155 - Numerals 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ... 11 ... 12 ... 13 ... 14 ... 15 ... 16 ... 17 ... 18 ... 19 ... 20 ... 21 ... 22 ... 23 ... 24 ... 25 ... 26 ... 27 ... 28 ...
fe eta 5R TriW
w. ti Id 3TT3
fe tRf nita ^ta eta
feta ■dldiQ
dJ6K$ 'd’dltl
ta tata tan feta
deeii{«
172
'd'ielta eta ^tata 'Meelid feta feta feta tJeeta feta atata XHetletld ■yir-ta 3+eileta ^TTeta Sdldta feyita fentta fey i eta fetteta Sfsaidta
’TTO 444144 «Hdd leKHd fedd H-dHd awd
rrtrh Sidildd
u le ad’d 6 did* fekue feds fets fey h 6
700 800 900 1000
67 68 'dd^edt 69 70 .. 4d>^eei<. 71 .. dgeeK 72 [d$cd< 73 .. fe^eeK, 74 .. 75 .. M-qgerK fef.eeie 76 .. dd^dK 77 78 .. 79 ... 'ddldl 80 .. 44>y in) 81 .. «RTTHt 82 .. fetal 83 .. fetal 84 Mdldl 85 . fetal 86 .. ^Kdldl 87 .. . 3fd6ldl 88 ddlti) 89 .. 90 ... H®s| ^4qid^ 91 92 .. fikidi 93 .. ■dkld^ 94 .. M-dld^l 95 .. . R$4lds| 96 tlvdld^ 97 3id6id«l 98 .. p, ,,, ,N Id^Hq 99 fe 100 .. 200 .. . fefe etafe 300 .. 400 .. tafe 500 .. & fe 600 ..
...
3TT3^ feta
125
dntfe
150 250
tata
1500
ta^tR
2500
tataR
>/4 l‘/4 2% 314 % 1% 2%
tamf, mn w Tr°nr ddl did
tafe taeta
‘/3 2/ 3 14 114 216 316 0.1 0.2 0.23 per cent (%)
lel^l{ fefeta 3TTHT ^>Gp
dlo> did <W(Hdd Id fid did
DE VAN AG ARI FIGURES ? S 19 X 8
173
3 X <5
?o
SURfl^S • Learn Hindi Through English
vfcfire Appendix - II , . ;; . Wjf - PROVERBS . .
:
'
1. 3T7 *F7T FT FIT TOT I
All’s well that ends well. 2. 3tm tft W *1 arnti A blind person will need eyes most. 3. araf<*rntttt I A one-eyed man is king among blind persons. A figure among ciphers. 4. 7U7FT
What use calling a doctor after death? 7. snft There are miles to go before I sleep. 8. 3fra <*7 1*7 $^7 i Out of sight out of mind. 9. 7FI <1*|4 77 ^3fTdi Snlq'xws <1 TdO t1
Necessity is the mother of invention. 14.
3OT *t < H<.^7 3(^S| I
Prevention is better than cure. 174
15. ^TTT*<
SWfS « Learn Hindi Through English 33. <9iy7it Hvirliv FTTOTt dtSUU'I 50. 3£l 714 *^T71^ I Everyone is unhappy in his own Where there is a will, there is a way. way. 51. 7(^7^ 71177 77 *4*7 *K I 34. 1317-717 if 771, *H*M 4 FFt I The proof of the pudding is in the eating. To quake at work but sweat at food. 52. 7 Id dl<41 Mi4 I 71 d "t 7It I d < I 35. tairtl fed 111 <717 77771 Have life have everything. An empty mind is the devil's work shop. 53. Did tsflTI fed Ml^dl <1^4 TT71 <3 I 36. 1|717777 44*7 41ddl < I Much effort much profit. 54. f mt sfh t« 411 Murder will speak out. Live and let live. 37. tal<SI M$IS fedidl 7fed 11 55. f Sra aiU Much ado about nothing. To bite the hand that feeds. 38. W 7q7li7ll4H,7^7T7q7ts1*|dl
Sg§*S • Learn Hindi Through English 69.
SURAHS » Learn Hindi Through English 87. 313 Ki, 3?f3^|
33ftft! ladft 33 d?l7l I
A drowning man clutches a straw.
Much cry little wool. 88.
70. 313 ft! d I 33 <13 35f ftai 3131 |
Never look a gift horse in the mouth. 71.
313 ft ^3 3373 ft |
There is something rotten.
89.
313 ^ftld 337 3131
90.
ftfttKlftftnftKIHI
A little learning is a dangerous thing.
72. TtdK ft'ft 333133 fl
Even walls have ears. 73.
did 3 *1 I ft! tjlM Ml^l til’d'! 01 Kt ft 1
Crows are never the whiter for wash ing.
^313313 733,
Do good and forget it. Have many acquaintances but 91. ’ ft 7ft <3iMi<. (dr-dl K^ftlKTlt I friends very few. Sinning all six days and going to 74. ^ffttnft47 Midi tl don’t practise. A burnt child dreads the fire. 93. MllftlK 31^11 76. ^r^tT^uwk’tFft^'iFfti A slave cannot even dream of hap Oil and truth will come to the sur piness. face. 94. <J3 *Td Mldft ftfl M5dR Klftf I 77. ^ftil d^ld^l The child is the father of the man. Distant drums sound well. 78. ftfanftz Iftd *73 i 4idl 11 Let us see which way the wind blows. 79. f ti ft 3lft <j773 Klft I Better late than never.
95. ftnisr^rftdd) 37 ^7173131 tl
96.
ft3sfk3^3337t<33U3Kil
80. ftldl Mil ^rdi 3 37 Mil 3 Mie M>i I
97.
337 331 313 33731 33 7KR I
98.
3331 ftt HI 33 33 #7 3314311
Money is a good servant but a bad master. Love and logic have no relation. A blindman is no judge of colours.
A rolling stone gathers no mass. 81. 3
dft'D 3 3UI 3iftnt I
No flute, no dance. No priest, no prayer. 82.
3 313 msi 3 fhn, tldft 331 IjQq11
83.
3 7^*11 did, 3 dft'il Ml^dl I
Butcher’s knife cannot wait indefi nitely. 99.
Money is everything.
A wolf in lamb's skin. 100.33 573J133313 ^711
No source, no result. 84.
To be a badman is better than to have a bad name.
33t K^fti Rd ftt I
Glamour does not last long. 85.
333 ft vJTl’JK ft 713-7131
101,35
3T3 3 Klft 31133 f^l I
Make hay while the sun shines.
A bad workman quarrels with his tools. 86. 3133, 333 31751, f tft 3^51 ^3 I Humility always works. 176
102.Id'll 313 ^3135133311
There is no smoke without fire. 103.i33rft3rft3r3fti No pains no gains.
123.357ft 3331 ft I
104.f33I3t73ft3Kfl
Unless you yourself go, much can not be accomplished.
Riches have wings. 124.did I ft ftddl Midi ft 35131331
Rod is the logic of fools.
105,3ftft dlf? f3317 ft 3lft ft! 7jf I
Let the past bury its dead and think of the future. 106.31317 fti 713351? 371371
Sorrow makes the hour longer.
125.3713 3137 31 ^331571
When wine is in, wit is out. 126.7lft d^'MM) ddd ft> I All side with the strongest. 127.713333 ft! ?«TRT Klftt I
107. ^3-^3ft3?r KTKlt I
Little drops make the ocean. 108. ft3I7ftft3R3cftl Better to wear out than to rust out. 109.31ft ft? d^d ft 313 Migl ft eld? Sow thistles and expect pickles.
A word is enough to the wise. 128.137 ipift 513ftft3ft I
Misfortune at the very outset. 129.3171 dim 4R|4 313131ft die I
Better give the wool than surrender the whole sheep.
llO.^ft 333 3^13 illMIdl I
No prayer in empty stomach.
13O.Tfttft 3331 ft ft! 3#f R*ddl I
Softness does not pay. 131.1)73 ij7d ft 5> KftTI I Things follow their own inclination. 112.33 331 ft! ft 3311 To a pure mind, tub water becomes 132.5<M)d Midi, W3 KtJTT I Jack of all trades, master of none. the Ganges. 133.4.71*1 ft! M*l I j, ^713 ft 33lf I 113.373(5#) dsdl Kt 33133-3# 331 fti I Evil got, evil spent. The remedy is worse than disease. 111 .ftft fti 3lft 313 33lft I
Casting pearls before swine.
114.3701 331 d^I <3701 I
134 .?I3 ft33 3ft KTTTft 331 ?
A fair face needs no makeup. A desperate man clings to anything. 115.3^311331711 135.51715ft: fti KRdit I Diamond cuts diamond. Don’t hit a man when he is down. 136.513517 137313 ft 5t3 mImR 313 I 116.1331 dldj Tlftt ftt 331 ft<
As the king so are his subjects. 118.73 didl ^1531 MW ft Rd mR fti did I
Sweet are the uses of adversity. 119.7371 3133 313 ft fft3 37 373 PlTII'l I
Constant use wears out anything. 120.773133 33137 33 3 3311
The lion has lost its teeth but not its roar. 121.713^31
431 713 313131311
Living from hand to mouth. 122.dd>sl ft37337 -lift I
Threat works.
33733-bodyguard ftlJdl^lM fftftKK-finger-print expert 3133 srfiraiTl-zonal officer 3lft3?lH3 arfSKHTl-fire-fighting officer srfawn-advocate Ktftsra-superintendent wra-chairman, head 33JKT3 arfoKHTt-section officer spjftsrid stfsKin-research officer srfftKirf-agent 'MM id-conservator of forests 177
SJJgj£s • Learn Hindi Through English aarterf afiianft - public relations officer ara aftrarft-enquiry officer zata-typist atftaa-superintendent of post offices zrptth- postmaster arfaat-postman ddidlfl ddisaR-technical officer d^.ttldciK-tahsildar RRat^-telegraph clerk dl'-Ht-gunner ateiZR-station house officer
- economist 3R aaa afaaaft - small savings officer ararf-professor awaa afaanTt-income tax officer aapa-commissioner aiala*-organizer arcaa reservation clerk aajiaftai-stenographer ar^Rfaz-dietician zr=a £wfafaa-upper division clerk d~Miij*J-high commissioner ^ai(di
SUI^S » Learn Hindi Through English rjfaa atftaa-supenntendent of police 'jfaa anjaa-police commissioner vatRTa afaztRl-publication officer traR aftRsal-publicity officer ama astm-head master ay M*i 41-prime minister ■RUHlMlif-principal WFS-manager rrh-HI l-l+-managing editor wja afza-principal secretary a^naat-administrator 7'jrraa Rfeaan-administrative officer afvrstRi- instructor wwaa-lecturer ^azt-sender, despatcher trt? fitat aftrzTU-adult education officer aiz Rkarafaftsra-inspector of weights and measurements a?Rt-storekeeper Rfiazaafaa-cabinet secretary aat-minister aazTa afcrard-polling officer id-postmaster general a^ifaaaar-advocate general aRtfazaa-director general a^tfaflsz;-inspector general RSiRk-mayor id-accountant general araat^-goods clerk Wt afaam-chief engineer ?jaz faafaa arjaa-chief election commissioner ijaa anatETht-chief judge rjaa aamjftf-chief justice RRRRZt-chief minister rjaa afaa-chief secretary ■4i(4«M41fd?K-mechanical engineer arafezWaz-travelling ticket examiner
ataai afaanzt-planning officer iid'jd -ambassador ciaiqid-governor ilgtfd-president •ClzRa I-cashier ■ClvHiK afwff-employment officer star waa-auditor ^yuid-accountant RRrata afazsa-wild life warden dlPlSRRR afaaTO-commercial tax officer fez ax afiiRKi-sales tax officer ftaiaTsast-head of department [quid araat-pilot aa RBJRR-labour commissioner mpa afaa-joint secretary afaa-secretary ama +diiu| afy anti-social welfare officer a?aai-surveyor awfcn afeanft-cooperative officer grsn afaaiRt-security officer tjRRT afyaaft-information officer WHid afaaaft-reception officer ftrsr afaaaft-health officer ADMINISTRATIVE TERMS abolition-aajaa, aa above cited-RFRR^tja absence-ayileqfa, ilt^iRiti abstract-aR acceptance-wi^fd, t4l«w< accommodation-atata accord-RRTRRRai accordi ngly-aa^aa account-^at, wrr, f^ara acknowledgement-HNdl, mtea tjan, miIr) ta'l’jfd act-afafaaa
179
IffiB’S • Learn Hindi Through English acting-*ifi?i^* action-'+i-fdii, ad hoc-ttzfi adjourn-?? Rid *
cancel-?^ *
Sffi£*5 * Learn Hindi Through English exemption-^z exped ite-fira *tfdi{ fltvn explanation-Pt^zRnvT favourable-flrjpfl figures-flM filc-ffiffin financial year-ffltfl (ffixfitfl) flfi following-fdMfftfeid for consideration-fflflKifi for disposal-fitzift th? for information-rjnRTfi for signature-dwadfipffit7 foregoing-'ffflfif forthcoming-flT’mft forth with-dsu, dr*i« further action-wfi fit gazette-difl'tfl gazetted-tlflflffid grade-fl d*fl grant-'flflZPt handover-df-Mi honorarium-flldfifl honourable-HMdlfl in accordance with-fi wtk in addition to-dflh flfdk+d in connection with, in continuation of-fififlufi in due course-fl? iflflfl in force-HP] in general-flTflfihm: in lieu of-fiflflTnfl in respect of-% fflflfl ft in view of-^afi^q increinent-fiflfl indemnify-fl(d'iRf*
investigation-flifl issue-fl itl *vn joining date-ftflTCfl fifth necessary action, the needful-fltfl^flflt 4ii(q i { office memorandum-* n fit? flnh officiating-7? ihnh ■ on-behalf of-^ftflftft ordinance-flwfirt original copy-rjfl flfif pass-fl•jflfd flfl pay-dd-i, ddedig pending-Rfllftd permanent-wfit petition-flifii*i, snff please acknowledge receipt-fllddl ftfirq post-fl? po sting-Ad id! postpone-fl'rffifl/flvtfir prescribed-ffifl? priori ty-fltflfaflt?n probation-flra, flftfiterr proceed ings-*ifidi41 proclamation-fltflfll ' promotion-Mfil-flld, d<*fl proposal-M
SURRAS • Learn Hindi Through English
SUgg> * Learn Hindi Through English urgent-few vacancy-Rfe vacant-fen verification-nwrn waming-fetfel with regard tofe fest n yours faithfully-nfetn yours sincerely, yours truly-amtmt
remission-nfel remuneration-fe’-rffe, fe-iain representation-uRfe resignation-^ I'lna, fefe resolution-e*^ retire-fer R^w fen retrenchment-fed rule-fen, sanction-fefeR, Rfet salary-fen scale of pay-fen mn schedule-aifejfe scheme-fen seal-fen sealed-nfefe section-snjwi, aro seniority-nffenr, fefen serial number-^ni^ sir-*tfen specimen-nqnT, nrnnT staff-fefei fe, smt stamp (revenue)-'fe'l fes statement-nnwr, nnrn submit-fe w subordinate-nafen, Hingct substitute-rfet surety- >11 Rib surplus-fetfe survey-few suspend-RRRa nnm suspension-fnfen temporary-nnfet, ntrfefe tender-RR bl through proper channcl-ffefel tour-fet transfer-n^ifevi, nfet true copy-fet uRRR typing-fen under consideration-ffeW-ftn undcrsi gned-fel Qt-i i fe until further orders-nfe fest fnfe dm
11. fl-good, easy tjfe, feib 12. 3fe=inter aidtf^fe 13. <=f=bad
SlTFIXES-wra Suffixes are elements attached to a verb root, noun, pronoun, adjective for form ing related words. Primary Suffixes (attached to root) 1. root itself used as noun fem-fe (sport) 2. lengthening/modifying the vowel of the root 'Moi’i 1-^TfeT (gait) ■ffenr-fe (friendship) 3. Wdr?=doing habitually Iw-ms (drunkard) 4. 3TT, fe abstract nouns fmwr (quarrel), Hfe 5. Wfet for fei*=saleable 6. 3trat=doing habitually fetm (swimmer) 7. 3TT^, 3TH, 3TraZ, 3THT, 3il^d, ?T, fe, n form abstract nouns. nm-i (protection) ■WH (tax) ddme (decoration) <j
14. fet^again, re 15. H=with, same
Prefixes are words which are not used independently but modify the meaning of a word, when attached to it in the beginning. Primary Prefixes (from Sanskrit) 1. n denotes negation/lack -mn Re i - a| Rti I at becomes 3F( before vowel fefe - strife ai iR - an |R 2. contrary 31M-H |-1,
3. am=contrary, inferior 4. 3TT= until, contrary atM-e, amRUT
anrnn (taking) atTrnm (coming) 5. ww=near, vice, sub bMbiu, ei^eaR, 'SH-i*k 6. fe=evil, difficult 's’K 7. ffe=without fnfe, R<M
16. B?=with Secondary Prefixes (indigenous) 1. W, without, lacking 2. ^=bad, evil 3. flacking §«ldl
4. fe without fer 5. ffe=without ffe-rnmn (unmarried) 6. '-R=full wfe Arabic and Persian Prefixes 1. fe=without, against, un fefefe, femrfet, fetwfel 2. WT=without 3. 'ft=per fe nw (per rupee) 4. WT=without dlMOI
5. mt=bad 6. fewithout 7. Severy
Reel, Raid, few
182
183
Slggjs • Learn Hindi Through English
SUggS • Learn Hindi Through English (bitterness) fofo (poverty) MHIdMH (madness) (old age) 2. btt, ^rt, f, form adjectives (thirsty) (of Kolkata) (rosy) 1 (poisonous) (of the market place) 3. W, form diminutives fWferr (young daughter) Ttfo (hill) Persian Suffixes 1. i forms abstract nouns tpfl (pleasure) 2. *K,’TR=dealing in (magician) hwik (helper) 3. 3TH1, HFF, fo, fo, w form adjectives ■Hram (annual) adt-tra (dangerous) dddtld (salty) dlHdid (wealthy) folfo (landlord)
fok ffo Gard 1 for tp fo
<sild rtf? fof fo
for
HR HcTT
W:
fol
DIRECT VERBS .■ (without using w/do) 3TT 33 33
37TR fo
hrtt
eft Id
<3d<sl3I
come getup fly get down unload, remove wear earn do tell shiver cut jump knock
for for for d*ll
^TT 'Ji HI 'jfH jft
for ils 184
buy eat bloom feed pull open (itself) play lose dig (you) open sing bury count fall to be threaded wear out enter wander taste climb shine graze walk, go drive, conduct lick shout scream steal kiss select print hide seize touch give up wake up another bum go wake up know live win add, connect
313 fe 72 3H 3i?i
•sid 33 3fa 33?
i® rite
W 'F 33T
$
^3
ut *1^1
Plchcl
73
Mid
ntz
plough bend, bow swing fall stroll evade, postpone remain break cheat stay, wait be afraid frighten put down drown swing close, put lid on push, jostle search carry break, smash swim pat spit press, suppress show give see run frighten wash bathe dance start, get out catch cook read serve recognize wear reach bring up melt beat
qt 7TH ^5 77T HZ 7?T3
ci ■'I 3^(1 sT3 I 3tsi 3d 1 3<;d
slid ®ritr T*
<3 nt ntH H77?
WT
*R *4d1 HPT *41 d HR
^RT
Tt
185
drink grind ask, enquire get caught get torn tear throw spread escape save clock strike ring a bell increase tell change flow divide tie weave call sell sit sow speak wander fill up run away, escape bark forget send bark die refuse, reject demand accept beat meet, get smile put, keep live crawl weep, cry stop, prevent
Learn Hindi Through English
SUgg^S * Learn Hindi Through English
nr cTR fan ct
nte
W
fant fit fita
Ht
fik
fer IBdl
3i*fk
fight jump bring load write take lie down return decorate rot understand endure, put up with teach sew learn hear make (baby) sleep sleep think entrust, handover laugh go away defeat sway give a jerk
3n&4lf?<4> snfiafi 3TRTFT 3n?TR 3n^A<=h
{hi-mk 'dftd
fat
tydglRlcb
fif’JT
4>fd>4 cfodH
4>'W4I
ftTtw LIST OF ADJECTIVES 31cPl 3Wd nfe 3W»T 3H4> W
sfldH 3THT 3Fjfsr?T afafa?
HFTlfa 3F^T
separate steady much uncivilized many restless half done strange final blind improper unsuitable alone temporary good
4)l4>l
4kU 4)ldl 4vS4l, "4^311
<3 Id) WT
W1
<3ddl
186
rich international spiritual final easy independent modem honest suitable opposite liberal useful sad high, tall rough, uneven historical mean upside down many difficult severe, cruel miserly less weak few, little, something raw sufficient central soft thorny total cut black bitter coward beautiful happy empty special rough, uneven open bad sour
■‘i
w 4dd
’FTPT ?jdr«n inrifa TO mfat VERT nferr fam
RisIM-SI
•4 Id l=h -MH=Cldl 144)41 ■MdHdl
ffapi ^4l4l ?J3t
?jn <5^1 fifa
a«i'Si
d'^rd 4141 dl^l fam mfa ^4dl
fam
dirty deep wet, damp round dumb poor proud hot wrong lukewarm ochre rose rural dense, thick proud wounded inferior broad irritable clever alert, tight cunning glittering smooth pungent small obstinate much false crooked broken cold correct loose strong fast, sharp, intelligent healthy fresh pungent little right (side) lean, weak slow, faint
fam pKIdl 4 Id 1 4d<Sd ■j£ldl dKM •lid 14 4*^1 fam 441 mfit 4ldi 44cPrl fam
wfat qfan wo TOOT
'TEFT ’T5T-fd
Md)4>
TO 4)1411 fafat ^4>l<
ri? 4 l4>l 44HI^T
44414
«T)hi<
187
fearless unique short mischievous pointed, sharp angry useless tiny low new famous blue salty yellow full enough pure, holy lovable old ancient ripe, cooked educated thirsty nutritious last, previous definite happy every famous torn tasteless violet wasteful old closed balance roguish ugly notorious sick unconscious plenty dishonest
SRp • Learn Hindi Through English
3Wft I
STtHT-WcH
TO ■M-s^di
riter
rjr?rm d^M
w dyl^d ritet TOTOTT
♦te'id)
w ’J’f ■H^ll rifat
deaf foolish equal stale grand, superb left ugly innocent heavy full showy hungry terrible forgetful brownish sweet faded monthly great famous strong fat wanton ordinary difficult hardworking charming sweet foolish costly suitable tasty
Pl^lid frifri^t ,KKdl
fiTfira
tK«bl
TO’f rirtrwn WTHR’T rtKE W
distil
rihn dtdl WUpftq dH d’ita
rra 'il(a% <. 1'Ji A f^1political <=h did dld^ti d«l<si cHl
frirn
interesting red suitable lame long foreign rare
writ ^TTTO
r-
188
.
special broad, liberal strange, peculiar mischievous urban balance clean calm, peaceful educated official, government beautiful clean, pure dry easy straightforward correct ordiary clean lazy satisfied courageous sweet smelling civilized straight safe cheap praiseworthy desolate golden white healthy independent tasty permanent green prosperous ever smiling clever airy every lightweight
3Tlf^ Clothes fafan
cfrsH <+>41*1, <3>
n??T, F?fa ■nrafafa’n
f?le1 l^b W3
■4b i l •4ldl, *1H<
bodice napkin blanket shirt cushion bolster cover muffler veil sheet cloak blouse
*hRhi
^
fafa dfcb'MI
faRwr <<w A
fafa
■qfafafa
tfa
fafai
4Wi fa#(
sfafa tnfa
underwear, half pant socks shoe hat cap pillow towel gloves dhoti half pant turban trousers curtain bedcover belt mantle veil bolster table cloth socks stockings quilt handkerchief cloak, gown petticoat uniform chemise salwar, trousers saree TFT 3TTT 3H^W
Gems and Jewels
^31
cbizi
fat?
165
ring bracelet bangle (iron) earring hair pin, brooch nose pin zircon, sardonyx bangle gems
SURR'S » Learn Hindi Through English medal wristlet TO, R’jft nose ring sapphire anklet M’MI emerald topaz turquoise armlet pebble *1|Am rel="nofollow"> ruby, carbuncle tiara, crown, diadem coral Kt?ft pearl lapiz lazuli, cat's eye ellt’Bb, dlicft ear pendant oyster agate neckband ?R necklace ^fcr diamond
rim rtlgi WW rihn
dddl
tin iron marble lead gold
-Relatives 'bi'w, mm
■mi •4)
'jfl'flT 7W, ^rt ^<5 Mil’ll mf
dRi
laftx W«t Minerals 3riTO> ^Wln
mica steel glass bell metal <=t^M
SURR> • Learn Hindi Through English
rim
rirR
M Ml til MMItO
mrit ‘'TH!
TOft vfa
166
father's younger brother (uncle) father's younger brother's wife, aunt elder sister's husband elder sister husband's elder brother husband's elder brother's wife father's elder brother's wife, aunt father's elder brother father's father father's mother son-in-law husband's younger brother husband's youn ger brother’s wife husband's sister's husband husband's sister daughter's son daughter's daughter grandson grand daughter mother's father mother's mother husband
Adi,
Th 3m
riim
w min,
Tldl'JII
writ wi mrit mf mrit, mro
mrri
TIT, KRTT TOtT
TOft
Kbn rifcft
Anidi, dAtf)HT
•H1J
wife father son daughter son's son son's daughter father's sister's father’s sister's husband sister sister's husband daughter-in-law father's sister. aunt brother's son brother's daughter sister's son sister's daughter brother brother's wife mother's brother's son mother's brother's daughter mother mother's brother, uncle mother's brother's wife mother's sister’s husband mother's sister, aunt mother's sister's son step mother father-in-law wife's sister's husband wife's brother
wife's sister mother-in-law co-wife
w rita
- Occupations 3TWT5F 3ffmrin
3rfticfdi 3||<$(d
Chdlct)l<
i{ Aitild ^•sl
Ml ell
mKRTt
'Ji 1^*11 'Jll^tt fjI'Rtl I'Jf 'Jjell^l
SlRhMl
mfrrit TOT Mel lei
mf
^t
ejItot deidl^l
167
teacher engineer actor advocate commission agent artist butcher farmer green grocer potter treasurer shepherd musician milkman peon watchman, security magician detective binder weaver jeweller tinker contractor postman betel leaf seller oil vendor tailor broker midwife sub-inspector nurse, guardian (female) carder plumber
SUgg^S • Learn Hindi Through English
^41^1 THHKt
yctilSN)
Md'tdl, WtHI
=T'vf
barber sailor journalist betel leaf seller grocer watchman priest publisher manager lecturer pedlar carpenter weaver sweeper
SURRAS • Learn Hindi Through English reporter secretary soldier goldsmith merchant physician barber confectioner
tibiK
Building and its Parts 3fHnt Silcll
3frf)3t 3lHld
*1 wi I , ^3
Hsft
rv
KKft
<M
fefcs vloidiK
cl
°4104 id 1
ftw, snwra
labourer boatman banker gardener printer clerk accountant (traditional) sculptor sweeper cobbler dyer mason cook cashier clerk writer, author accountant (modem) auditor blacksmith lawyer physician(native) lecturer teacher editor
aftfi tSWT
orAd ofcl^ld
ffe£t ■'ISJflll
W «stt W d
acloi ddd) Ml
HeT
fy_,
did
Mtdlcii Hcltdt
168
attic, garret niche fire place courtyard eaves brick pillar tile granary window peg platform lime door frame bar roof, terrace thatch window railing lattice chain peep hole latrine door door sill corridor, threshold tap foundation gutter plaster
urinal floor •sKUIol portico verandah ®Kld31 drawing room Hdld dais parapet arch ntfr gutter kitchen ventilator Si^dk rafter wr stair wwjfg rptWHT bathroom
^lloftsTFn
TRf
s33T , ’dnd’l
fifen fs®d 1
fWt afd rel="nofollow">4i aeai
Household goods aw+n-O 31 l^d 1
3W<1 SlWofl w dxikl
dikl
<SUd
dddl
shelf mirror iron box mortar comb bowl small bowl, cup frying pan ladle fork chair axe kettle tiny mortar for medicine cot pitcher mat spoon
cTSRRt, ^Icfi
mr cTTcn fati^ d<jdd, sold
ferrami
■^Idld’l SJ'Kpft Halt'll rR5T Heid HlddM, Mld^H Mlefdl
^tfdld slddl «Kdd «Hedl
dl«n, ^pft, dldl,
■
fimzt
key tea pot cot tongs
^eld did cl dVl rp-Ft), rPTFTt
169
fireplace, stove stick sieve broom swing basket small box box bucket lid earthen lamp oven pillow plank for sitting pan plate wire lock three-legged stool tooth brush matches earthen lamp milk pot censer pan screen, curtain bed door mat cradle saucer cup flower vase purse utensil, pot bucket brush pastry roller bottle sack, canvas bag chum stick
SURRAS • Learn Hindi Through English
SUgffe « Learn Hindi Through English 'Ayi Alep! fa-M-ril
faft ^ter tftetT
tiOdi ’Tffa
fe
fa fe-u ■fat
pestle table reed stool candle dish quilt rope string , fata lantern tumbler, bowl glass pane phial box nut cracker soap stone to grind condiments jug, pitcher needle winnow scythe earthen kettle
Xr*afen? fat
^Icl, c^<^l41
fet ■’fa’ fat fat fed fetat HVcR
fefat fa AmMiH
pick axe shovel blow pipe auger mallet sickle hammer plough
WfT HlN’SI
<MViI
fauti fatal
tapin' -
Directions
east west tafat south
- Tools
saw razor nail spade axe scissors pen knife knife small knife chisel nut bellows lancet syringe bolt screw screw driver
ffefT fa HUT Davs of the Week riWTR
Monday Tuesday Wednesday ■gfatfeli, WtR Thursday SjSbMK Friday SlPlMK Saturday K,
^pfa sntd Rld«K
ffa«K
fa Mllfal
4l
cTTeT
w
black rose colour ochre orange colour blue yellow violet brown red white golden green
(il)
sfta, wt fact, Hosts
3nritTra Mid
5Fr,fa
fefa
Rr, Rma W, MddKI
fajj
(Starting around middle of April) 9tl IO
fau,
Milfcfch,
4iIRm>
dark half of the lunar month moment hour half yearly quarterly day time noon fortnight (i.e. 14 nights) day after tomorrow/ day after yesterday (according to verb)
31 IM l(p, 3RTT3 HI Mm
afternoon new moon today midnight tomorrow/ yesterday (according to verb)
c^c>u| ■qjft
Names of Months (Indian)
’-irrt, wi?, fafe,
winter autumn
fafa, 1Ffe - Time
3TRT
41U
far,
spring summer rains
?Rr[, SR^,
Colours
fafm
sfat
mH id, nil, d-s=hi
full moon forenoon dawn
7j^r?r, RtfeTT, tR<J, Mid:
KRffaf,
fe. 170
^fa, Mlfa, oRUIO
3WIMIHII
January February March April May June July August September October November December
3T^cf
-rA .. TTM, w
diM
Names of Months
fa
^53, hIhh - Seasons
*i$Ri, HIH,
fa
171
morning month
SURgS » Learn Hindi Through English
SUgfl*5 * Learn Hindi Through English
$ldi®«l, STrft strt, tan, tat, diyy>id
tai tiMl l^, $Udl
d$<=n<41
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66
night century evening bright half of the lunar month century week millennium
3155 - Numerals 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ... 11 ... 12 ... 13 ... 14 ... 15 ... 16 ... 17 ... 18 ... 19 ... 20 ... 21 ... 22 ... 23 ... 24 ... 25 ... 26 ... 27 ... 28 ...
fe eta 5R TriW
w. ti Id 3TT3
fe tRf nita ^ta eta
feta ■dldiQ
dJ6K$ 'd’dltl
ta tata tan feta
deeii{«
172
'd'ielta eta ^tata 'Meelid feta feta feta tJeeta feta atata XHetletld ■yir-ta 3+eileta ^TTeta Sdldta feyita fentta fey i eta fetteta Sfsaidta
’TTO 444144 «Hdd leKHd fedd H-dHd awd
rrtrh Sidildd
u le ad’d 6 did* fekue feds fets fey h 6
700 800 900 1000
67 68 'dd^edt 69 70 .. 4d>^eei<. 71 .. dgeeK 72 [d$cd< 73 .. fe^eeK, 74 .. 75 .. M-qgerK fef.eeie 76 .. dd^dK 77 78 .. 79 ... 'ddldl 80 .. 44>y in) 81 .. «RTTHt 82 .. fetal 83 .. fetal 84 Mdldl 85 . fetal 86 .. ^Kdldl 87 .. . 3fd6ldl 88 ddlti) 89 .. 90 ... H®s| ^4qid^ 91 92 .. fikidi 93 .. ■dkld^ 94 .. M-dld^l 95 .. . R$4lds| 96 tlvdld^ 97 3id6id«l 98 .. p, ,,, ,N Id^Hq 99 fe 100 .. 200 .. . fefe etafe 300 .. 400 .. tafe 500 .. & fe 600 ..
...
3TT3^ feta
125
dntfe
150 250
tata
1500
ta^tR
2500
tataR
>/4 l‘/4 2% 314 % 1% 2%
tamf, mn w Tr°nr ddl did
tafe taeta
‘/3 2/ 3 14 114 216 316 0.1 0.2 0.23 per cent (%)
lel^l{ fefeta 3TTHT ^>Gp
dlo> did <W(Hdd Id fid did
DE VAN AG ARI FIGURES ? S 19 X 8
173
3 X <5
?o
SURfl^S • Learn Hindi Through English
vfcfire Appendix - II , . ;; . Wjf - PROVERBS . .
:
'
1. 3T7 *F7T FT FIT TOT I
All’s well that ends well. 2. 3tm tft W *1 arnti A blind person will need eyes most. 3. araf<*rntttt I A one-eyed man is king among blind persons. A figure among ciphers. 4. 7U7FT
What use calling a doctor after death? 7. snft There are miles to go before I sleep. 8. 3fra <*7 1*7 $^7 i Out of sight out of mind. 9. 7FI <1*|4 77 ^3fT
Necessity is the mother of invention. 14.
3OT *t < H<.^7 3(^S| I
Prevention is better than cure. 174
15. ^TTT*<
SWfS « Learn Hindi Through English 33. <9iy7it Hvirliv FTTOTt dtSUU'I 50. 3£l 714 *^T71^ I Everyone is unhappy in his own Where there is a will, there is a way. way. 51. 7(^7^ 71177 77 *4*7 *K I 34. 1317-717 if 771, *H*M 4 FFt I The proof of the pudding is in the eating. To quake at work but sweat at food. 52. 7 Id dl<41 Mi4 I 71 d "t 7It I d < I 35. tairtl fed 111 <717 77771 Have life have everything. An empty mind is the devil's work shop. 53. Did tsflTI fed Ml^dl <1^4 TT71 <3 I 36. 1|717777 44*7 41ddl < I Much effort much profit. 54. f mt sfh t« 411 Murder will speak out. Live and let live. 37. tal<SI M$IS fedidl 7fed 11 55. f Sra aiU Much ado about nothing. To bite the hand that feeds. 38. W 7q7li7ll4H,7^7T7q7ts1*|dl
Sg§*S • Learn Hindi Through English 69.
SURAHS » Learn Hindi Through English 87. 313 Ki, 3?f3^|
33ftft! ladft 33 d?l7l I
A drowning man clutches a straw.
Much cry little wool. 88.
70. 313 ft! d I 33 <13 35f ftai 3131 |
Never look a gift horse in the mouth. 71.
313 ft ^3 3373 ft |
There is something rotten.
89.
313 ^ftld 337 3131
90.
ftfttKlftftnftKIHI
A little learning is a dangerous thing.
72. TtdK ft'ft 333133 fl
Even walls have ears. 73.
did 3 *1 I ft! tjlM Ml^l til’d'! 01 Kt ft 1
Crows are never the whiter for wash ing.
^313313 733,
Do good and forget it. Have many acquaintances but 91. ’ ft 7ft <3iMi<. (dr-dl K^ftlKTlt I friends very few. Sinning all six days and going to 74. ^ffttnft
95. ftnisr^rftdd) 37 ^7173131 tl
96.
ft3sfk3^3337t<33U3Kil
80. ftldl Mil ^rdi 3 37 Mil 3 Mie M>i I
97.
337 331 313 33731 33 7KR I
98.
3331 ftt HI 33 33 #7 3314311
Money is a good servant but a bad master. Love and logic have no relation. A blindman is no judge of colours.
A rolling stone gathers no mass. 81. 3
dft'D 3 3UI 3iftnt I
No flute, no dance. No priest, no prayer. 82.
3 313 msi 3 fhn, tldft 331 IjQq11
83.
3 7^*11 did, 3 dft'il Ml^dl I
Butcher’s knife cannot wait indefi nitely. 99.
Money is everything.
A wolf in lamb's skin. 100.33 573J133313 ^711
No source, no result. 84.
To be a badman is better than to have a bad name.
33t K^fti Rd ftt I
Glamour does not last long. 85.
333 ft vJTl’JK ft 713-7131
101,35
3T3 3 Klft 31133 f^l I
Make hay while the sun shines.
A bad workman quarrels with his tools. 86. 3133, 333 31751, f tft 3^51 ^3 I Humility always works. 176
102.Id'll 313 ^3135133311
There is no smoke without fire. 103.i33rft3rft3r3fti No pains no gains.
123.357ft 3331 ft I
104.f33I3t73ft3Kfl
Unless you yourself go, much can not be accomplished.
Riches have wings. 124.did I ft ftddl Midi ft 35131331
Rod is the logic of fools.
105,3ftft dlf? f3317 ft 3lft ft! 7jf I
Let the past bury its dead and think of the future. 106.31317 fti 713351? 371371
Sorrow makes the hour longer.
125.3713 3137 31 ^331571
When wine is in, wit is out. 126.7lft d^'MM) ddd ft> I All side with the strongest. 127.713333 ft! ?«TRT Klftt I
107. ^3-^3ft3?r KTKlt I
Little drops make the ocean. 108. ft3I7ftft3R3cftl Better to wear out than to rust out. 109.31ft ft? d^d ft 313 Migl ft eld? Sow thistles and expect pickles.
A word is enough to the wise. 128.137 ipift 513ftft3ft I
Misfortune at the very outset. 129.3171 dim 4R|4 313131ft die I
Better give the wool than surrender the whole sheep.
llO.^ft 333 3^13 illMIdl I
No prayer in empty stomach.
13O.Tfttft 3331 ft ft! 3#f R*ddl I
Softness does not pay. 131.1)73 ij7d ft 5> KftTI I Things follow their own inclination. 112.33 331 ft! ft 3311 To a pure mind, tub water becomes 132.5<M)d Midi, W3 KtJTT I Jack of all trades, master of none. the Ganges. 133.4.71*1 ft! M*l I j, ^713 ft 33lf I 113.373(5#) dsdl Kt 33133-3# 331 fti I Evil got, evil spent. The remedy is worse than disease. 111 .ftft fti 3lft 313 33lft I
Casting pearls before swine.
114.3701 331 d^I <3701 I
134 .?I3 ft33 3ft KTTTft 331 ?
A fair face needs no makeup. A desperate man clings to anything. 115.3^311331711 135.51715ft: fti KRdit I Diamond cuts diamond. Don’t hit a man when he is down. 136.513517 137313 ft 5t3 mImR 313 I 116.1331 dldj Tlftt ftt 331 ft<
As the king so are his subjects. 118.73 didl ^1531 MW ft Rd mR fti did I
Sweet are the uses of adversity. 119.7371 3133 313 ft fft3 37 373 PlTII'l I
Constant use wears out anything. 120.773133 33137 33 3 3311
The lion has lost its teeth but not its roar. 121.713^31
431 713 313131311
Living from hand to mouth. 122.dd>sl ft37337 -lift I
Threat works.
33733-bodyguard ftlJdl^lM fftftKK-finger-print expert 3133 srfiraiTl-zonal officer 3lft3?lH3 arfSKHTl-fire-fighting officer srfawn-advocate Ktftsra-superintendent wra-chairman, head 33JKT3 arfoKHTt-section officer spjftsrid stfsKin-research officer srfftKirf-agent 'MM id-conservator of forests 177
SJJgj£s • Learn Hindi Through English aarterf afiianft - public relations officer ara aftrarft-enquiry officer zata-typist atftaa-superintendent of post offices zrptth- postmaster arfaat-postman ddidlfl ddisaR-technical officer d^.ttldciK-tahsildar RRat^-telegraph clerk dl'-Ht-gunner ateiZR-station house officer
- economist 3R aaa afaaaft - small savings officer ararf-professor awaa afaanTt-income tax officer aapa-commissioner aiala*-organizer arcaa reservation clerk aajiaftai-stenographer ar^Rfaz-dietician zr=a £wfafaa-upper division clerk d~Miij*J-high commissioner ^ai(d
SUI^S » Learn Hindi Through English rjfaa atftaa-supenntendent of police 'jfaa anjaa-police commissioner vatRTa afaztRl-publication officer traR aftRsal-publicity officer ama astm-head master ay M*i 41-prime minister ■RUHlMlif-principal WFS-manager rrh-HI l-l+-managing editor wja afza-principal secretary a^naat-administrator 7'jrraa Rfeaan-administrative officer afvrstRi- instructor wwaa-lecturer ^azt-sender, despatcher trt? fitat aftrzTU-adult education officer aiz Rkarafaftsra-inspector of weights and measurements a?Rt-storekeeper Rfiazaafaa-cabinet secretary aat-minister aazTa afcrard-polling officer id-postmaster general a^ifaaaar-advocate general aRtfazaa-director general a^tfaflsz;-inspector general RSiRk-mayor id-accountant general araat^-goods clerk Wt afaam-chief engineer ?jaz faafaa arjaa-chief election commissioner ijaa anatETht-chief judge rjaa aamjftf-chief justice RRRRZt-chief minister rjaa afaa-chief secretary ■4i(4«M41fd?K-mechanical engineer arafezWaz-travelling ticket examiner
ataai afaanzt-planning officer iid'jd -ambassador ciaiqid-governor ilgtfd-president •ClzRa I-cashier ■ClvHiK afwff-employment officer star waa-auditor ^yuid-accountant RRrata afazsa-wild life warden dlPlSRRR afaaTO-commercial tax officer fez ax afiiRKi-sales tax officer ftaiaTsast-head of department [quid araat-pilot aa RBJRR-labour commissioner mpa afaa-joint secretary afaa-secretary ama +diiu| afy anti-social welfare officer a?aai-surveyor awfcn afeanft-cooperative officer grsn afaaiRt-security officer tjRRT afyaaft-information officer WHid afaaaft-reception officer ftrsr afaaaft-health officer ADMINISTRATIVE TERMS abolition-aajaa, aa above cited-RFRR^tja absence-ayileqfa, ilt^iRiti abstract-aR acceptance-wi^fd, t4l«w< accommodation-atata accord-RRTRRRai accordi ngly-aa^aa account-^at, wrr, f^ara acknowledgement-HNdl, mtea tjan, miIr) ta'l’jfd act-afafaaa
179
IffiB’S • Learn Hindi Through English acting-*ifi?i^* action-'+i-fdii, ad hoc-ttzfi adjourn-?? Rid *
cancel-?^ *
Sffi£*5 * Learn Hindi Through English exemption-^z exped ite-fira *tfdi{ fltvn explanation-Pt^zRnvT favourable-flrjpfl figures-flM filc-ffiffin financial year-ffltfl (ffixfitfl) flfi following-fdMfftfeid for consideration-fflflKifi for disposal-fitzift th? for information-rjnRTfi for signature-dwadfipffit7 foregoing-'ffflfif forthcoming-flT’mft forth with-dsu, dr*i« further action-wfi fit gazette-difl'tfl gazetted-tlflflffid grade-fl d*fl grant-'flflZPt handover-df-Mi honorarium-flldfifl honourable-HMdlfl in accordance with-fi wtk in addition to-dflh flfdk+d in connection with, in continuation of-fififlufi in due course-fl? iflflfl in force-HP] in general-flTflfihm: in lieu of-fiflflTnfl in respect of-% fflflfl ft in view of-^afi^q increinent-fiflfl indemnify-fl(d'iRf*
investigation-flifl issue-fl itl *vn joining date-ftflTCfl fifth necessary action, the needful-fltfl^flflt 4ii(q i { office memorandum-* n fit? flnh officiating-7? ihnh ■ on-behalf of-^ftflftft ordinance-flwfirt original copy-rjfl flfif pass-fl•jflfd flfl pay-dd-i, ddedig pending-Rfllftd permanent-wfit petition-flifii*i, snff please acknowledge receipt-fllddl ftfirq post-fl? po sting-Ad id! postpone-fl'rffifl/flvtfir prescribed-ffifl? priori ty-fltflfaflt?n probation-flra, flftfiterr proceed ings-*ifidi41 proclamation-fltflfll ' promotion-Mfil-flld, d<*fl proposal-M
SURRAS • Learn Hindi Through English
SUgg> * Learn Hindi Through English urgent-few vacancy-Rfe vacant-fen verification-nwrn waming-fetfel with regard tofe fest n yours faithfully-nfetn yours sincerely, yours truly-amtmt
remission-nfel remuneration-fe’-rffe, fe-iain representation-uRfe resignation-^ I'lna, fefe resolution-e*^ retire-fer R^w fen retrenchment-fed rule-fen, sanction-fefeR, Rfet salary-fen scale of pay-fen mn schedule-aifejfe scheme-fen seal-fen sealed-nfefe section-snjwi, aro seniority-nffenr, fefen serial number-^ni^ sir-*tfen specimen-nqnT, nrnnT staff-fefei fe, smt stamp (revenue)-'fe'l fes statement-nnwr, nnrn submit-fe w subordinate-nafen, Hingct substitute-rfet surety- >11 Rib surplus-fetfe survey-few suspend-RRRa nnm suspension-fnfen temporary-nnfet, ntrfefe tender-RR bl through proper channcl-ffefel tour-fet transfer-n^ifevi, nfet true copy-fet uRRR typing-fen under consideration-ffeW-ftn undcrsi gned-fel Qt-i i fe until further orders-nfe fest fnfe dm
11. fl-good, easy tjfe, feib 12. 3fe=inter aidtf^fe 13. <=f=bad
SlTFIXES-wra Suffixes are elements attached to a verb root, noun, pronoun, adjective for form ing related words. Primary Suffixes (attached to root) 1. root itself used as noun fem-fe (sport) 2. lengthening/modifying the vowel of the root 'Moi’i 1-^TfeT (gait) ■ffenr-fe (friendship) 3. Wdr?=doing habitually Iw-ms (drunkard) 4. 3TT, fe abstract nouns fmwr (quarrel), Hfe 5. Wfet for fei*=saleable 6. 3trat=doing habitually fetm (swimmer) 7. 3TT^, 3TH, 3TraZ, 3THT, 3il^d, ?T, fe, n form abstract nouns. nm-i (protection) ■WH (tax) ddme (decoration) <j
14. fet^again, re 15. H=with, same
Prefixes are words which are not used independently but modify the meaning of a word, when attached to it in the beginning. Primary Prefixes (from Sanskrit) 1. n denotes negation/lack -mn Re i - a| Rti I at becomes 3F( before vowel fefe - strife ai iR - an |R 2. contrary 31M-H |-1,
3. am=contrary, inferior 4. 3TT= until, contrary atM-e, amRUT
anrnn (taking) atTrnm (coming) 5. ww=near, vice, sub bMbiu, ei^eaR, 'SH-i*k 6. fe=evil, difficult 's’K 7. ffe=without fnfe, R<M
16. B?=with Secondary Prefixes (indigenous) 1. W, without, lacking 2. ^=bad, evil 3. flacking §«ldl
4. fe without fer 5. ffe=without ffe-rnmn (unmarried) 6. '-R=full wfe Arabic and Persian Prefixes 1. fe=without, against, un fefefe, femrfet, fetwfel 2. WT=without 3. 'ft=per fe nw (per rupee) 4. WT=without dlMOI
5. mt=bad 6. fewithout 7. Severy
Reel, Raid, few
182
183
Slggjs • Learn Hindi Through English
SUggS • Learn Hindi Through English (bitterness) fofo (poverty) MHIdMH (madness) (old age) 2. btt, ^rt, f, form adjectives (thirsty) (of Kolkata) (rosy) 1 (poisonous) (of the market place) 3. W, form diminutives fWferr (young daughter) Ttfo (hill) Persian Suffixes 1. i forms abstract nouns tpfl (pleasure) 2. *K,’TR=dealing in (magician) hwik (helper) 3. 3TH1, HFF, fo, fo, w form adjectives ■Hram (annual) adt-tra (dangerous) dddtld (salty) dlHdid (wealthy) folfo (landlord)
fok ffo Gard 1 for tp fo
<sild rtf? fof fo
for
HR HcTT
W:
fol
DIRECT VERBS .■ (without using w/do) 3TT 33 33
37TR fo
hrtt
eft Id
<3d<sl3I
come getup fly get down unload, remove wear earn do tell shiver cut jump knock
for for for d*ll
^TT 'Ji HI 'jfH jft
for ils 184
buy eat bloom feed pull open (itself) play lose dig (you) open sing bury count fall to be threaded wear out enter wander taste climb shine graze walk, go drive, conduct lick shout scream steal kiss select print hide seize touch give up wake up another bum go wake up know live win add, connect
313 fe 72 3H 3i?i
•sid 33 3fa 33?
i® rite
W 'F 33T
$
^3
ut *1^1
Plchcl
73
Mid
ntz
plough bend, bow swing fall stroll evade, postpone remain break cheat stay, wait be afraid frighten put down drown swing close, put lid on push, jostle search carry break, smash swim pat spit press, suppress show give see run frighten wash bathe dance start, get out catch cook read serve recognize wear reach bring up melt beat
qt 7TH ^5 77T HZ 7?T3
ci ■'I 3^(1 sT3 I 3tsi 3d 1 3<;d
slid ®ritr T*
<3 nt ntH H77?
WT
*R *4d1 HPT *41 d HR
^RT
Tt
185
drink grind ask, enquire get caught get torn tear throw spread escape save clock strike ring a bell increase tell change flow divide tie weave call sell sit sow speak wander fill up run away, escape bark forget send bark die refuse, reject demand accept beat meet, get smile put, keep live crawl weep, cry stop, prevent
Learn Hindi Through English
SUgg^S * Learn Hindi Through English
nr cTR fan ct
nte
W
fant fit fita
Ht
fik
fer IBdl
3i*fk
fight jump bring load write take lie down return decorate rot understand endure, put up with teach sew learn hear make (baby) sleep sleep think entrust, handover laugh go away defeat sway give a jerk
3n&4lf?<4> snfiafi 3TRTFT 3n?TR 3n^A<=h
{hi-mk 'dftd
fat
tydglRlcb
fif’JT
4>fd>4 cfodH
4>'W4I
ftTtw LIST OF ADJECTIVES 31cPl 3Wd nfe 3W»T 3H4> W
sfldH 3THT 3Fjfsr?T afafa?
HFTlfa 3F^T
separate steady much uncivilized many restless half done strange final blind improper unsuitable alone temporary good
4)l4>l
4kU 4)ldl 4vS4l, "4^311
<3 Id) WT
W1
<3ddl
186
rich international spiritual final easy independent modem honest suitable opposite liberal useful sad high, tall rough, uneven historical mean upside down many difficult severe, cruel miserly less weak few, little, something raw sufficient central soft thorny total cut black bitter coward beautiful happy empty special rough, uneven open bad sour
■‘i
w 4dd
’FTPT ?jdr«n inrifa TO mfat VERT nferr fam
RisIM-SI
•4 Id l=h -MH=Cldl 144)41 ■MdHdl
ffapi ^4l4l ?J3t
?jn <5^1 fifa
a«i'Si
d'^rd 4141 dl^l fam mfa ^4dl
fam
dirty deep wet, damp round dumb poor proud hot wrong lukewarm ochre rose rural dense, thick proud wounded inferior broad irritable clever alert, tight cunning glittering smooth pungent small obstinate much false crooked broken cold correct loose strong fast, sharp, intelligent healthy fresh pungent little right (side) lean, weak slow, faint
fam pKIdl 4 Id 1 4d<Sd ■j£ldl dKM •lid 14 4*^1 fam 441 mfit 4ldi 44cPrl fam
wfat qfan wo TOOT
'TEFT ’T5T-fd
Md)4>
TO 4)1411 fafat ^4>l<
ri? 4 l4>l 44HI^T
44414
«T)hi<
187
fearless unique short mischievous pointed, sharp angry useless tiny low new famous blue salty yellow full enough pure, holy lovable old ancient ripe, cooked educated thirsty nutritious last, previous definite happy every famous torn tasteless violet wasteful old closed balance roguish ugly notorious sick unconscious plenty dishonest
SRp • Learn Hindi Through English
3Wft I
STtHT-WcH
TO ■M-s^di
riter
rjr?rm d^M
w dyl^d ritet TOTOTT
♦te'id)
w ’J’f ■H^ll rifat
deaf foolish equal stale grand, superb left ugly innocent heavy full showy hungry terrible forgetful brownish sweet faded monthly great famous strong fat wanton ordinary difficult hardworking charming sweet foolish costly suitable tasty
Pl^lid frifri^t ,KKdl
fiTfira
tK«bl
TO’f rirtrwn WTHR’T rtKE W
distil
rihn dtdl WUpftq dH d’ita
rra 'il(a% <. 1'Ji A f^1political <=h did dld^ti d«l<si cHl
frirn
interesting red suitable lame long foreign rare
writ ^TTTO
r-
188
.
special broad, liberal strange, peculiar mischievous urban balance clean calm, peaceful educated official, government beautiful clean, pure dry easy straightforward correct ordiary clean lazy satisfied courageous sweet smelling civilized straight safe cheap praiseworthy desolate golden white healthy independent tasty permanent green prosperous ever smiling clever airy every lightweight
Related Documents
N Sreedharan Learn Hindi Through English_optimizer
March 2021 0
Learn Hindi Through English
February 2021 0
Learn Arabic Through English
March 2021 0
Learn Data Mining Through Excel
January 2021 1
3.rapidex Spoken Hindi Through Tamil.ppnss.pdf
January 2021 0
15_laws_of_growth-lunch-n-learn-facilitator_guide-ro.pdf
February 2021 0More Documents from "Iulian Dita"
N Sreedharan Learn Hindi Through English_optimizer
March 2021 0
Prapenuntutan Tp Perikanan
February 2021 1
Lorin Kliven - Uzavrele Strasti
February 2021 1
Prometeu Inlantuit De Eschil
February 2021 1
Strzok Page Text Messages 5-19-17
January 2021 1